Operating Instructions - Firmware Center

User’s Guide
Guide to the Machine
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Printing Documents
Copying Originals
Scanning Originals
Sending and Receiving a Fax
Configuring the Machine Using the Control
Panel
Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Maintaining the Machine
Troubleshooting
Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
Appendix
For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before
using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Find Information about Operations and Troubleshooting...............................................................11
Operating Manual (Printed)....................................................................................................................... 11
Operating Manual (Digital Format)........................................................................................................... 11
How to Read This Manual...............................................................................................................................13
Introduction...................................................................................................................................................13
Symbols Used in This Manual.....................................................................................................................13
Model-Specific Information........................................................................................................................ 13
Disclaimer..................................................................................................................................................... 14
Notes............................................................................................................................................................ 14
Note to Administrator.................................................................................................................................. 15
List of Option................................................................................................................................................ 15
About IP Address......................................................................................................................................... 16
1. Guide to the Machine
Guide to Components......................................................................................................................................17
Exterior: Front View......................................................................................................................................17
Exterior: Rear View...................................................................................................................................... 19
Interior...........................................................................................................................................................21
Control Panel................................................................................................................................................22
Installing Option............................................................................................................................................... 25
Attaching Paper Feed Unit.......................................................................................................................... 25
How to Use the [Home] Screen...................................................................................................................... 28
Displaying the [Home] Screen....................................................................................................................28
How to Use the [Home] Screen.................................................................................................................. 28
Customizing the [Home] Screen..................................................................................................................... 31
How to Customize the [Home] Screen.......................................................................................................31
Adding to the [Home] Screen Shortcuts to Favorite Items........................................................................ 31
Changing the Order of Icons on the [Home] Screen................................................................................31
Deleting an Icon on the [Home] Screen.....................................................................................................32
Registering Frequently Used Functions........................................................................................................... 33
Registering Functions in a Favorite Item..................................................................................................... 33
Recalling a Favorite Item.............................................................................................................................34
Deleting a Favorite Item.............................................................................................................................. 35
Displaying Frequently Used Modes Preferentially........................................................................................ 36
1
Multi-access......................................................................................................................................................37
About Operation Tools.................................................................................................................................... 41
Entering Characters..........................................................................................................................................42
Character Entry Display.............................................................................................................................. 42
Available Characters...................................................................................................................................43
Entering Text................................................................................................................................................. 43
Using RICOH Smart Device Connector......................................................................................................... 45
Connecting a Smart Device to the Machine Using NFC.............................................................................. 46
Writing the Machine's Information to the NFC tag with a Smart Device................................................ 46
Using the Application on a Smart Device by Using NFC.........................................................................46
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Workflow for Loading Paper and Configuring Paper Sizes and Types...................................................... 47
Loading Paper.................................................................................................................................................. 48
Loading Paper into Tray1 and 2................................................................................................................ 48
Loading Paper into Bypass Tray................................................................................................................. 53
Loading Envelopes.......................................................................................................................................54
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Control Panel.................................................................57
Specifying the Paper Type.......................................................................................................................... 57
Specifying the Standard Paper Size...........................................................................................................58
Specifying a Custom Paper Size................................................................................................................ 58
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using Web Image Monitor........................................................... 60
Specifying a Custom Paper Size................................................................................................................ 60
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Printer Driver.................................................................. 61
When Using Windows................................................................................................................................ 61
When Using OS X........................................................................................................................................62
Supported Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 63
Specifications of Paper Types..................................................................................................................... 66
Non-Recommended Paper Types.............................................................................................................. 72
Paper Storage.............................................................................................................................................. 73
Print Area...................................................................................................................................................... 73
Placing Originals..............................................................................................................................................77
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass...................................................................................................77
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder....................................................................................... 77
2
About Originals............................................................................................................................................78
3. Printing Documents
What You Can Do with the Printer Function...................................................................................................81
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer.................................................................................................... 82
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication............................................................................................. 82
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled............................................................................................... 82
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box.............................................................................................84
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box from the [Start] Menu................................................... 84
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box in an Application.......................................................... 84
Basic Operation of Printing............................................................................................................................. 86
If a Paper Mismatch Occurs....................................................................................................................... 87
Canceling a Print Job...................................................................................................................................87
Printing Confidential Documents..................................................................................................................... 89
Storing a Locked Print file............................................................................................................................ 89
Printing a Locked Print file............................................................................................................................90
Deleting a Locked Print file.......................................................................................................................... 91
Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)........................................................................................ 93
What Is PictBridge?......................................................................................................................................93
PictBridge Printing........................................................................................................................................ 93
What Can Be Done on this Machine......................................................................................................... 94
Exiting PictBridge......................................................................................................................................... 94
When PictBridge Printing Does Not Work.................................................................................................95
Printing with Mopria.........................................................................................................................................97
Using Various Print Functions...........................................................................................................................98
Print Quality Functions................................................................................................................................. 98
Print Output Functions.................................................................................................................................. 99
4. Copying Originals
What You Can Do with the Copier Function............................................................................................... 101
Copier Mode Screen.................................................................................................................................... 102
Basic Operation of Copying.........................................................................................................................104
Canceling a Copy..................................................................................................................................... 105
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies......................................................................................................... 107
Specifying Reduce/Enlarge..................................................................................................................... 108
3
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing....................................................109
Specifying Combined and 2-sided Copies.............................................................................................112
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing............................................................114
Duplex Copying Using the ADF............................................................................................................... 115
Duplex Copying Manually Using the Exposure Glass...........................................................................117
Copying an ID Card......................................................................................................................................119
Specifying Scan Settings for Copying..........................................................................................................122
Adjusting Image Density........................................................................................................................... 122
Selecting the Document Type According to Original.............................................................................122
5. Scanning Originals
What You Can Do with the Scanner Function.............................................................................................125
Scanner Mode Screen.................................................................................................................................. 126
Registering Scan Destinations.......................................................................................................................128
Modifying Scan Destinations....................................................................................................................134
Deleting Scan Destinations....................................................................................................................... 134
Testing Transmission.................................................................................................................................. 135
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder...............................................................................................................137
Printing the Check Sheet.......................................................................................................................137
Confirming the User Name and Computer Name............................................................................. 138
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer.......................................................................................... 140
Specifying Access Privileges for the Created Shared Folder............................................................ 142
Registering a Shared Folder in the Machine's Address Book........................................................... 142
Send Scanned Files to a Shared Folder..............................................................................................143
Basic Operation of Scan to E-mail............................................................................................................... 146
Configuring SMTP and DNS Settings..................................................................................................146
Registering Destination E-mail Addresses to the Address Book........................................................ 147
Sending Scanned Files by E-mail........................................................................................................ 147
Basic Operation of Scan to FTP....................................................................................................................150
Configuring FTP Server Settings...........................................................................................................150
Sending Scanned Files to an FTP Server.............................................................................................150
Specifying the Scan Destination Using [Resend].........................................................................................153
Basic Procedures for Saving Scan Files on a USB Flash Memory Device................................................ 154
Basic Operation for RICOH Scan Utility......................................................................................................157
4
Preparations for Using RICOH Scan Utility.............................................................................................157
Using Ricoh Scan Utility to Scan to a Computer.....................................................................................157
Using RICOH SP C260 series Scan to Scan from a Smart Device.......................................................160
Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning........................................................................................................ 162
Using TWAIN scanner.............................................................................................................................. 162
TWAIN scanning.......................................................................................................................................162
Settings you can configure in the TWAIN dialog box........................................................................... 163
Basic Operation for WIA Scanning............................................................................................................. 165
Basic Operation for ICA Scanning...............................................................................................................166
Installing the ICA Driver............................................................................................................................ 166
Using ICA Scanner....................................................................................................................................166
ICA Scanning.............................................................................................................................................166
Settings you can configure in the ICA dialog box.................................................................................. 167
Using SANE scanning................................................................................................................................... 169
Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning........................................................................................................ 170
Specifying the Scanning Size According to the Size of the Original....................................................170
Adjusting Image Density........................................................................................................................... 171
Specifying Resolution................................................................................................................................ 172
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
What You Can Do with the Fax Function.....................................................................................................175
Fax Setting Workflows.................................................................................................................................. 176
Fax Mode Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 177
Setting the Date and Time............................................................................................................................. 179
Registering Fax Destinations......................................................................................................................... 180
Registering Fax Destinations Using the Control Panel............................................................................ 180
Registering Fax Destinations Using Web Image Monitor...................................................................... 182
Preventing Transmission to the Wrong Destination.................................................................................184
Sending a Fax................................................................................................................................................ 186
Selecting Transmission Mode...................................................................................................................186
Internet Fax Transmission.......................................................................................................................... 187
Basic Operation for Sending a Fax......................................................................................................... 188
Canceling a Transmission......................................................................................................................... 190
Specifying the Fax Destination................................................................................................................. 192
5
Useful Sending Functions.......................................................................................................................... 195
Specifying Scan Settings for Faxing........................................................................................................ 197
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)..................................................................................200
Basic Operation for Sending Faxes from a Computer........................................................................... 200
Configuring Transmission Settings............................................................................................................202
Configuring the LAN-Fax Address Book................................................................................................. 202
Editing a Fax Cover Sheet........................................................................................................................ 205
Receiving a Fax..............................................................................................................................................206
Selecting Reception Mode....................................................................................................................... 206
Receiving an Internet Fax..........................................................................................................................210
Forwarding or Storing Faxes in Memory................................................................................................ 212
Receiving or Rejecting Faxes from Special Senders...............................................................................216
Lists/Reports Related to Fax......................................................................................................................... 218
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Basic Operation.............................................................................................................................................219
Menu Chart.................................................................................................................................................... 220
Copier Features Settings............................................................................................................................... 221
Scanner Features Settings............................................................................................................................. 226
Fax Features Settings..................................................................................................................................... 228
Address Book Settings...................................................................................................................................237
System Settings...............................................................................................................................................238
Printer Features Settings.................................................................................................................................246
Paper Settings................................................................................................................................................ 250
Administrator Tools Settings.......................................................................................................................... 255
Printing Lists/Reports..................................................................................................................................... 263
Printing the Configuration Page................................................................................................................263
Types of Lists/Reports............................................................................................................................... 263
Network Settings............................................................................................................................................265
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Available Setting Functions Using Web Image Monitor............................................................................ 269
Using Web Image Monitor...........................................................................................................................270
Displaying Top Page..................................................................................................................................... 271
Changing the Interface Language........................................................................................................... 272
6
Checking the System Information................................................................................................................. 273
Status Tab...................................................................................................................................................273
Counter Tab............................................................................................................................................... 274
Machine Information Tab......................................................................................................................... 277
Configuring the System Settings................................................................................................................... 278
Sound Volume Adjustment Tab................................................................................................................ 278
Tray Paper Settings Tab............................................................................................................................ 278
Copier Tab................................................................................................................................................. 282
Fax Tab.......................................................................................................................................................282
Priority Tray Tab.........................................................................................................................................284
Toner Saving Tab...................................................................................................................................... 285
I/O Timeout Tab....................................................................................................................................... 285
Black-and-White Print Priority Tab...........................................................................................................286
Registering Destinations................................................................................................................................ 287
Registering Fax Special Senders.................................................................................................................. 288
Restricting Machine Functions According to User.......................................................................................289
Enabling the User Restriction Settings...................................................................................................... 289
When Machine Functions are Restricted..................................................................................................... 293
Configuring the Network Settings................................................................................................................ 295
Network Status Tab...................................................................................................................................295
IPv6 Configuration Tab............................................................................................................................. 296
Network Application Tab......................................................................................................................... 296
DNS Tab.................................................................................................................................................... 297
Auto E-mail Notification Tab.................................................................................................................... 298
SNMP Tab................................................................................................................................................. 299
SMTP Tab...................................................................................................................................................300
POP3 Tab...................................................................................................................................................301
Internet Fax Tab.........................................................................................................................................301
Wireless Tab.............................................................................................................................................. 302
Configuring the IPsec Settings.......................................................................................................................305
IPsec Global Settings Tab.........................................................................................................................305
IPsec Policy List Tab................................................................................................................................... 305
Printing Lists/Reports..................................................................................................................................... 309
7
Configuring the Administrator Settings.........................................................................................................310
Administrator Tab...................................................................................................................................... 310
Reset Settings Tab......................................................................................................................................310
Backup Setting Tab................................................................................................................................... 311
Restore Setting Tab....................................................................................................................................312
Set Date/Time Tab....................................................................................................................................312
Energy Saver Mode Tab.......................................................................................................................... 313
PCL6 Mode................................................................................................................................................314
9. Maintaining the Machine
Replacing the Print Cartridge........................................................................................................................315
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle................................................................................................................ 320
Replacing a Component............................................................................................................................... 326
Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Unit.................................................................................................326
Replacing the Fusing Unit and Transfer Roller........................................................................................ 326
Cautions When Cleaning..............................................................................................................................327
Cleaning the Toner Density Sensor.............................................................................................................. 328
Cleaning the Friction Pad and Paper Feed Roller....................................................................................... 330
Cleaning the Registration Roller and Paper Tray........................................................................................ 333
Cleaning the Exposure Glass........................................................................................................................336
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder...........................................................................................................337
Moving and Transporting the Machine....................................................................................................... 339
Disposal......................................................................................................................................................340
Where to Inquire....................................................................................................................................... 340
10. Troubleshooting
Error and Status Messages on the Screen...................................................................................................341
Removing Paper Jams....................................................................................................................................351
Removing Printing Jams.............................................................................................................................351
Removing Scanning Jams......................................................................................................................... 359
When You Cannot Print Test Page............................................................................................................... 362
Paper Feed Problems.....................................................................................................................................363
Print Quality Problems................................................................................................................................... 366
Checking the Condition of the Machine..................................................................................................366
Checking the Printer Driver Settings......................................................................................................... 367
8
Printer Problems............................................................................................................................................. 369
When You Cannot Print Properly............................................................................................................. 369
When You Cannot Print Clearly...............................................................................................................373
When Paper Is Not Fed or Ejected Properly...........................................................................................376
Other Printing Problems............................................................................................................................ 377
Copier Problems............................................................................................................................................ 378
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies.................................................................................................. 378
When You Cannot Make Copies as Wanted.........................................................................................379
Scanner Problems.......................................................................................................................................... 380
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan File............................................................... 380
When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected............................................................................................. 380
Fax Problems..................................................................................................................................................381
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages As Wanted.......................................................... 381
When an Error Is Notified via a Report or E-mail...................................................................................384
Error Code................................................................................................................................................. 386
Common Problems.........................................................................................................................................391
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
Connecting the Machine to a Wired Network........................................................................................... 393
Using a USB Cable................................................................................................................................... 393
Using an Ethernet Cable........................................................................................................................... 394
Connecting the Machine to a Wireless Network........................................................................................396
Installing the Printer Driver........................................................................................................................ 396
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Wizard................................................................................................................. 396
Using the WPS Button............................................................................................................................... 398
Using a PIN Code..................................................................................................................................... 399
12. Appendix
Transmission Using IPsec...............................................................................................................................401
Encryption and Authentication by IPsec.................................................................................................. 401
Security Association.................................................................................................................................. 402
Encryption Key Exchange Settings Configuration Flow......................................................................... 403
Specifying Encryption Key Exchange Settings........................................................................................403
Specifying IPsec Settings on the Computer............................................................................................. 404
Enabling and Disabling IPsec Using the Control Panel..........................................................................406
9
Notes About the Toner.................................................................................................................................. 407
Specifications of the Machine...................................................................................................................... 408
General Function Specifications.............................................................................................................. 408
Printer Function Specifications.................................................................................................................. 410
Copier Function Specifications.................................................................................................................411
Scanner Function Specifications...............................................................................................................413
Fax Function Specifications...................................................................................................................... 414
Paper Feed Unit TK1220..........................................................................................................................416
Consumables..................................................................................................................................................418
Print Cartridge............................................................................................................................................418
Waste Toner Bottle....................................................................................................................................421
Information for This Machine........................................................................................................................ 422
User Information on Electrical & Electronic Equipment
(mainly Europe and Asia)..........422
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)......................................... 423
Environmental Advice for Users
Notice To Wireless LAN Interface Users
(mainly Europe)............................................................... 423
(mainly Europe).................................................424
NOTES TO USERS REGARDING FACSIMILE UNIT (NEW ZEALAND)............................................. 425
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA)..........................................................425
Notes to users in the United States of America....................................................................................... 425
Notes to Canadian Users of Wireless Devices....................................................................................... 428
Notes to Canadian Users regarding Facsimile Unit............................................................................... 428
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens.................................................................................429
ENERGY STAR Program........................................................................................................................... 429
Saving Energy............................................................................................................................................429
Trademarks.....................................................................................................................................................431
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................435
10
How to Find Information about Operations
and Troubleshooting
You can find support information about operating the machine and troubleshooting in the Operating
Manual (printed), Operating Manual (digital format), and Help (online).
Operating Manual (Printed)
The following manuals are provided with this machine.
Safety Information
This manual explains the safety precautions that should be followed when using the machine. Be
sure to read this manual before using the machine.
Setup Guide
This manual explains how to set up the machine. It also explains how to remove the machine from
the packaging and how to connect it to a computer.
Operating Manual (Digital Format)
Operating manuals can be viewed from Ricoh's website or from the provided CD-ROM.
Viewing from a web browser
Access the Internet from a web browser.
Confirm that the computer or the machine is connected to the network.
Download the operating manuals from http://www.ricoh.com/.
Viewing from the provided CD-ROM
Operating manuals can also be viewed from the provided CD-ROM.
• When using Windows
1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Click [Read Manual] and follow the instructions on the screen.
The PDF file manual opens.
• When using OS X
1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click Manuals.htm file, located on the CD-ROM root directory.
3. Select the language.
4. Click [Read PDF manuals].
11
5. Click the manual you want to refer to.
The PDF file manual opens.
12
How to Read This Manual
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Symbols Used in This Manual
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine’s functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.
Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.
DUE201
13
The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region A model:
• CODE XXXX -27
• 220–240 V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17
• 120–127 V
• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Notes
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
14
Note to Administrator
Password
Certain configurations of this machine can be password-protected to prevent unauthorized modifications
by others. We strongly recommend you to create your own password immediately.
The following are the operations that can be password-protected:
• Entering the [Address Book], [Network Settings], or [Administrator Tools] menu using the control
panel
You can access these menus without a password by factory default.
The setting for creating a password can be found in [Administrator Tools].
• Configuring the machine using Web Image Monitor
You can configure the machine using Web Image Monitor without a password by factory default.
The setting for creating a password can be found in [Administrator Settings].
For details about creating passwords, see page 310 "Configuring the Administrator Settings".
User Restriction
You can restrict the use of certain functions of this machine to users with proper authentication.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can select the functions you want to restrict, and register the users who
can use that function upon authentication.
• For details about creating passwords and configuring the user restriction settings, see page 289
"Restricting Machine Functions According to User".
List of Option
Option List
Paper Feed Unit TK1220
Referred to as
Paper feed unit
• If Paper feed unit is attached, "Tray 2" appears on the machine's control panel.
15
About IP Address
In this manual, "IP address" covers both IPv4 and IPv6 environments. Read the instructions that are
relevant to the environment you are using.
16
1. Guide to the Machine
This chapter describes preparations for using the machine and its operating instructions.
Guide to Components
This section introduces the names of the various parts on the front and rear side of the machine and
outlines their functions.
Exterior: Front View
1
2
15
3
14
4
13
5
12
11
6
7
8
10
9
DUE203
17
1. Guide to the Machine
No.
1
Name
Input Tray for the ADF (Auto
document feeder)
Description
Place stacks of originals here. They will feed in
automatically.
This tray can hold up to 35 sheets of plain paper for the
SP C260SFNw and up to 50 sheets of plain paper for
the SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
2
Auto Document Feeder
(Exposure Glass Cover)
The ADF is integrated with the exposure glass cover.
Open this cover to place originals on the exposure
glass.
3
Exposure Glass
Place originals here sheet by sheet.
4
Extender for the ADF Tray
Extend these when placing paper longer than A4 in the
input tray for ADF.
5
Standard Tray/Top Cover
Printed paper is delivered to this tray. Up to 150 sheets
of plain paper can be stacked here.
Open this to replace the print cartridges.
18
6
Front Cover
Open this cover to replace the waste toner bottle or
remove jammed paper.
7
Front Cover Open Lever
To open the front cover, pull this lever on the right side
of the machine.
8
End Fence
Adjust this fence to the paper size.
9
Tray 1
This tray can hold up to 250 sheets of plain paper.
10
Bypass Tray
Load paper here sheet by sheet.
11
Side Fence
Adjust this fence to the paper size.
12
Control Panel
Contains a screen and keys for machine control.
13
USB Flash Disk Port
Insert a USB flash disk for using the Scan to USB
function or connect a digital camera using a USB cable
for PictBridge printing.
14
Output Tray for the ADF
Originals scanned with the ADF are delivered from
here.
15
ADF Cover
Open this cover to remove originals jammed in the ADF.
Guide to Components
Exterior: Rear View
9
5
1
2
6
3
7
4
8
DUE204
No.
Name
Description
1
G3 (analog) Line Interface Connector
For connecting a telephone line.
2
External Telephone Connector
For connecting an external telephone.
3
Ethernet Port
For connecting the machine to the network
using a network interface cable.
4
USB Port
For connecting the machine to a computer
using a USB cable.
5
Stop Fences
Pull up this fence to prevent paper falling off
when printing a large amount of paper at a
time.
The fence can be adjusted at the A4/Letter
or Legal size position.
6
Cable Cover
Remove this cover when connecting cables
to the machine.
7
Rear Cover
Remove this cover when loading paper
longer than A4 in Tray 1.
19
1. Guide to the Machine
No.
Name
Description
8
Power Socket
For connecting the power cord to the
machine.
9
Button for Sliding the ADF
Press to slide the ADF towards the rear of the
machine and hold it in that position, if paper
output to the output tray is difficult to retrieve.
• As shown, slide the ADF while pressing the button for sliding the ADF. Be sure to check that the ADF
is closed in advance. Be careful not to trap your fingers when sliding.
DUE205
• Pull up the retainer as shown below to prevent A4- or Letter-size printed copies from falling off.
DUE206
• Pull up the retainer as shown below to prevent Legal-size printed copies from falling off.
20
Guide to Components
1
2
3
DUE207
Interior
1
2
3
4
5
DUE212
21
1. Guide to the Machine
No.
Name
Description
1
Print Cartridge
Install the print cartridges from the machine rear, in the order of
cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). Messages
appear on the screen when print cartridges need to be replaced,
or new ones need to be prepared.
2
Fusing Unit Lever
Lower both the left and right levers when you print on an
envelope.
3
Fusing Unit
Fuses toner to the paper.
You might have to move this unit to check for or remove jammed
paper.
4
Waste Toner Bottle
Collects toner that is wasted during printing.
5
Transfer unit
You need to remove this when you replace the waste toner bottle.
• For details about the messages that appear on the screen when consumables need to be replaced,
see page 341 "Error and Status Messages on the Screen".
Control Panel
1
2
8
No.
1
22
Name
NFC tag
3
4
9
5
6
10
7
DUE128
Description
Connects a smart device to the machine when you touch this tag
on a smart device.
Guide to Components
No.
Name
Description
2
[Home] key
Press to display the [Home] screen. For details, see page 28
"How to Use the [Home] Screen".
3
Display panel
This is a touch panel display that features icons, keys, and
shortcuts that allow you to navigate the screens of the various
functions and provide you with information about operation status
and other messages.
4
Number keys
Use to enter the numbers for copies, fax numbers and data for the
selected function.
5
[Clear/Stop] key
• While the machine is processing a job: press to cancel the
current job.
• While configuring the machine settings: press to cancel the
current setting and return to standby mode.
• While in standby mode: press to cancel temporary settings
such as image density or resolution.
6
[B&W Start] key
Press to scan or copy in black and white, or start sending a fax.
7
[Power] key
Press to turn on and turn off the main power. To turn off the
machine, press and hold down this key for at least three seconds.
This indicator lights up blue when the machine is turned on.
If the machine's system is busy, the power may not be turned off
even though you press and hold down this key for three seconds. If
this is the case, press and hold down the [Clear/Stop] key and
[Power] key simultaneously for at least three seconds to force the
machine to turn off.
8
Fax indicator
Indicates the status of the fax functions. Lights up when received
faxes that have not been printed out exist in the machine's
memory. Flashes when the machine is unable to print out the faxes
due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a paper
jam.
9
Alert indicator
Flashes yellow when the machine will require maintenance soon
(such as replacing consumables), or lights up red when a machine
error occurs.
When an alert is issued, check the messages on the screen. For
details about the messages that appear on the screen, see
page 341 "Error and Status Messages on the Screen".
23
1. Guide to the Machine
No.
10
Name
[Color Start] key
Description
Press to scan or copy in color.
• The backlight of the screen is turned off when the machine is in Energy Saver mode.
• When the machine is processing a job, you cannot display the menu for configuring the machine.
You can confirm the machine's status by checking messages on the screen. If you see messages
such as "Printing...", "B&W Copying...", "Color Copying...", or "Processing...", wait until the current
job is finished.
• The color of the control panel varies depending on the model.
24
Installing Option
Installing Option
This section explains how to install options.
Attaching Paper Feed Unit
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and
electric shock hazard.
• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.
• Before installing or removing options, always disconnect the power cord plugs from the wall
outlet and allow time for the main unit to fully cool. Failing to take these precautions could result
in burns.
• SP C260SFNw
The machine weighs approximately 29 kg (64 lb.). When moving the machine, use the inset
grips on both sides, and lift slowly in pairs.
• SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw
The machine weighs approximately 30 kg (66.2 lb.). When moving the machine, use the inset
grips on both sides, and lift slowly in pairs.
• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping may cause injury.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. If the cord is
unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cords can cause an
electrical or fire hazard.
• Tray 1 is required to print using the optional paper feed unit. Without Tray 1, paper jams will occur.
• The machine must be lifted by two people.
• Do not hold the tray to lift the machine.
1. Confirm that the following is true: The machine's cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.
25
1. Guide to the Machine
2. Remove the adhesive tape from the optional paper feed unit.
DPP210
3. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides. Lifting the machine requires two
people.
DUE287
4. There are three upright pins on the optional paper feed unit. Align the holes of the
machine with the pins, and then lower the machine slowly.
DUE323
5. Plug the machine's cord back into the wall outlet, and then turn on the power.
• After installing the optional paper feed unit, select Tray 2 in the printer driver. For details, see the
printer driver Help.
• If the new device is listed in the column of configuration options, it has been properly installed.
26
Installing Option
• If the optional paper feed unit is not installed properly, try to install it again by repeating the
procedure. If the problem persists, contact your sales or service representative.
• For details about printing the configuration page, see page 263 "Printing Lists/Reports".
27
1. Guide to the Machine
How to Use the [Home] Screen
• The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on. You can change this
default setting under Function Priority. See page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
Displaying the [Home] Screen
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
• Function or shortcut icons will be displayed on the [Home] screen. For details, see page 28 "How
to Use the [Home] Screen".
• To use a different function, press the icon of the function you want to use.
How to Use the [Home] Screen
The icons of each function are displayed on the [Home] screen.
You can add shortcuts to favorite items to [Home] screens 2 and 3. The icons of added shortcuts appear
on the [Home] screen. You can recall favorite items by pressing the shortcut icons.
To display the [Home] screen, press the [Home] key.
28
How to Use the [Home] Screen
[Home] screen 1
1
2
3
4
9
5
8
7
6
DUE303
[Home] screen 2
10
DUE304
1. Supply Information icon
Displays the remaining amount of toner.
2. [Scanner]
Press to scan originals and save images as files.
For details about how to use the scanner function, see page 125 "Scanning Originals".
3. [Fax]
Press to send or receive faxes.
For details about how to use the fax function, see page 175 "Sending and Receiving a Fax".
29
1. Guide to the Machine
4. Wireless LAN icon
Press to display the [Wi-Fi Configuration] screen.
This icon appears when Wireless LAN is enabled.
5.
/
Press to switch pages when the icons are not displayed on 1 page.
6. [Setting]
Press to customize the default settings of the machine to meet your requirements.
7. [Status]
Press to check the machine's system status, operational status of each function, and Locked Print jobs. You can
also display the machine's maintenance information.
8. [Card]
Press to make ID card copies.
9. [Copier]
Press to make copies.
For details about how to use the copy function, see page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
10. Shortcut icon
You can add shortcuts to favorite items to the [Home] screen. For details about how to register shortcuts, see
page 31 "Adding to the [Home] Screen Shortcuts to Favorite Items".
For details about examples of shortcuts that you can register, see page 34 "Example of favorite items".
• You can change the order of favorite item icons. For details, see page 31 "Changing the Order
of Icons on the [Home] Screen".
30
Customizing the [Home] Screen
Customizing the [Home] Screen
You can add shortcuts to favorite items in the [Home] screen. You can recall favorite items by pressing
the shortcut icons. You can rearrange the order of the function and shortcut icons.
How to Customize the [Home] Screen
You can customize the [Home] screen to make it more accessible.
The icons of each application are displayed on the [Home] screen. You can also add shortcuts to
favorite items registered in some applications.
For details about the items on the [Home] screen, see page 28 "How to Use the [Home] Screen".
• When you register a favorite item, the shortcut to the favorite item appears on [Home] screens 2 or
3. If [Home] screens 2 and 3 do not have enough space for more icons, registering any more
favorite items becomes impossible.
• You can register a total of 12 icons for shortcuts to favorite items, 6 icons on each of the 2 pages.
Adding to the [Home] Screen Shortcuts to Favorite Items
When you register frequently used settings for functions such as copier and fax functions as favorite
items, the shortcuts to them appear on [Home] screens 2 or 3. For details about how to register a
favorite item, see page 33 "Registering Functions in a Favorite Item".
Changing the Order of Icons on the [Home] Screen
You can change the order of the favorite item icons on [Home] screen 2 and 3 to make them more
accessible.
1. Press and hold an icon that you want to move.
31
1. Guide to the Machine
2. Select [Move Up] or [Move Down].
The position of an icon switches from that of another icon located ahead or behind.
• You cannot change the order of the icons on the [Home] screen 1.
Deleting an Icon on the [Home] Screen
Delete unused favorite item icons. You can only display icons and shortcuts that you use.
When a shortcut to a favorite item on the [Home] screen is deleted, the registered favorite item is also
deleted. For details about how to delete a favorite item, see page 35 "Deleting a Favorite Item".
• You cannot delete icons on the [Home] screen 1.
32
Registering Frequently Used Functions
Registering Frequently Used Functions
You can store frequently used job settings in the machine memory and recall them easily.
Registering Functions in a Favorite Item
You can register up to 12 favorite items for each function.
The following settings can be registered to favorite items:
• Copier:
Sim to Dup, Dup to Dup, Paper Tray, Reduce/Enlarge, Quantity, Original Settings, Original Type,
Other Settings, Sort
• Fax:
Immed. TX, TX Settings
• Scanner:
Original Settings, Scan Setting
This section explains how to register functions to a favorite item by using each application.
1. Edit the settings so all functions you want to register to a favorite item are selected on the
[Copier], [Fax], [Scanner], or [ID Card Copy] screen.
2. Press the favorite item icon (
) in the upper right of the screen.
3. Press the [Input favorite item name:] box.
4. Enter the favorite item name, and then press [OK].
5. Confirm the name you entered is displayed, and then press [OK].
6. Press the [Home] key.
The favorite item is registered to the [Home] screen.
• You can enter up to 8 characters for a favorite item name.
• Favorite items are not deleted by turning the power off or by pressing the [Clear/Stop] key unless
the favorite item is deleted or overwritten.
• Favorite items can be registered to the [Home] screen, and can be recalled easily. For details, see
page 31 "Adding to the [Home] Screen Shortcuts to Favorite Items".
33
1. Guide to the Machine
Example of favorite items
Copier
Favorite item name
Favorite item description
Effect
Eco copy
Specify [Sim to Dup].
You can save paper and
toner.
Thumbnail copy
Specify settings to combine
and print a multiple pages on
one side or both sides of
paper in [Other Settings...].
You can copy up to four
pages onto one side of a
sheet, so that you can save
paper.
Fax
Favorite item name
Departmental fax transmission
Favorite item description
In [TX Settings], specify [Fax
Header].
Effect
This setting can be used if the
receiver specifies forwarding
destinations by senders.
• The names of favorite items given above are just examples. You can assign any name to a favorite
item according to your objectives.
• Depending on your business details or the type of documents to be scanned, registering a favorite
item cannot be recommended.
Recalling a Favorite Item
You can recall the favorite item and operate the machine using the stored settings.
34
Registering Frequently Used Functions
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press [ ] until the favorite item icon you want appears.
3. Press the favorite item icon.
• Using the favorite item causes the previous settings to be cleared.
Deleting a Favorite Item
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press [ ] until the favorite item icon you want appears.
3. Press and hold down the favorite item icon.
4. Press [delete].
35
1. Guide to the Machine
Displaying Frequently Used Modes
Preferentially
Specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation switch is turned on, or when System
Reset mode is turned on.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon.
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [ ].
5. Press [Function Priority].
6. Specify the mode to be displayed preferentially.
7. Press the [Home] key.
• For details about which modes you can specify, see "page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
36
Multi-access
Multi-access
This machine can perform multiple jobs using different functions, such as copying and faxing, at the
same time. Performing multiple functions simultaneously is called “Multi-access”.
The following table shows the functions that can be performed simultaneously.
Current job
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax memory reception
Copying
• Internet Fax reception*9
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• LAN-Fax transmission
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax memory reception
• Printing*1
• PictBridge printing*7
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory*8
Scanning
• Fax immediate printing*8
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer (except when
TWAIN scanning)*8
• LAN-Fax transmission (except when TWAIN scanning)*8
• Internet Fax reception*8
• Mobile printing (from a device)*8
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax memory reception
• Printing*1, 7
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory*8
Scan to USB
• Fax immediate printing*8
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer (except when
TWAIN scanning)*8
• LAN-Fax transmission (except when TWAIN scanning)
• Internet Fax reception*8
• Mobile printing (from a device)*8
37
1. Guide to the Machine
Current job
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously
• Internet Fax reception
Fax immediate transmission
(scanning an original and
sending it simultaneously)
• Printing*5
• PictBridge printing
• Mobile printing (from a device)
• Copying
Fax memory transmission
(sending a fax that has already
been stored in the machine's
memory)
• Scanning
• Internet Fax reception
• Printing*5
• PictBridge printing
• Mobile printing (from a device)
Fax receiving and printing
• Internet Fax reception*9
• Scanning*6
• Copying
• Scanning
• Printing a Fax job in the machine's memory
Fax memory reception (storing
a received fax into the
machine's memory)
• Internet Fax transmission
• Internet Fax reception
• Printing*1
• PictBridge printing
• Mobile printing (from a device)
• Fax memory reception
Printing a Fax job in the
machine's memory
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• LAN-Fax transmission
• Internet Fax reception*9
• Scanning*6
• Copying
• Printing a Fax job in the machine's memory
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job
from a computer
• Internet Fax transmission
• LAN-Fax transmission
• Internet Fax reception
• Scanning*6
38
Multi-access
Current job
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously
• Fax reception (no printing)
• Fax memory reception
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
Internet Fax transmission
• LAN-Fax transmission
• Internet Fax reception
• Printing*5
• PictBridge printing
• Mobile printing (from a device)
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax memory reception
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• LAN-Fax transmission
• Internet Fax transmission
• Internet Fax reception*9
• Scanning*8
• Fax immediate transmission (scanning and sending)*8
Internet Fax reception
• Copying*10
• Scanning*10
• Fax immediate transmission*10
• Fax reception*10
• Printing a Fax job in the machine's memory*10
• Internet Fax reception*10
• Printing*10
• PictBridge printing*10
• Mobile printing (from a device)*10
• Scanning*2
• Fax immediate transmission*3
Printing
• Fax memory transmission*3
• Fax memory reception
• Internet Fax transmission
• Internet Fax reception*9
39
1. Guide to the Machine
Current job
Types of jobs that can be executed simultaneously
• Scanning (except for Scan to USB)*4
• Fax immediate transmission
PictBridge printing
• Fax memory reception
• Fax memory transmission
• Internet Fax transmission
• Internet Fax reception*9
• Fax memory transmission
• Internet Fax reception*9
Mobile printing (from a
device)
• Fax memory reception
• Scanning*8
• Fax immediate transmission*8
• Internet Fax transmission*8
*1 Printing starts after scanning is finished if [Gradation:] is set to [Standard] or [Fine] (PCL/DDST printer driver),
or when printing from the PostScript 3 printer driver.
*2 Scanning is not possible if [Gradation:] is set to [Standard] or [Fine] (PCL/DDST printer driver), or when
printing from the PostScript 3 printer driver.
*3 Fax transmission is not possible if [Gradation:] is set to [Fine] (PCL/DDST printer driver), or when printing
from the PostScript 3 printer driver.
*4 PictBridge printing might fail if the free memory space is low.
*5 Printing may be canceled if [Gradation:] is set to [Standard] or [Fine] (PCL/DDST printer driver), or when
printing from the PostScript 3 printer driver.
*6 Fax printing may take longer than normal if you scan using the control panel at the same time, especially
when scanning multiple pages using the exposure glass.
*7 Scan to USB is not available with PictBridge.
*8 Multi-access is possible when each job is performed using the exposure glass or ADF on the SP C260SFNw.
Multi-access is not possible when each job is performed using the exposure glass or ADF on the SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
*9 Internet faxes that are received cannot be printed.
*10 Simultaneous processing is possible only when the current job is to receive an Internet fax but not to print it.
• If you try to use a function that cannot be performed simultaneously, you will hear a beep sound
from the machine or see a failure message pop up on your computer screen. In this case, try again
after the current job is finished.
40
About Operation Tools
About Operation Tools
This section explains the operation tools of this machine.
Control Panel
The control panel contains a screen and keys for controlling the machine. They allow you to
configure the machine's various settings.
For details about how to use the control panel, see page 219 "Configuring the Machine Using the
Control Panel".
Web Image Monitor
You can check the machine's status and configure its settings by accessing the machine directly
using Web Image Monitor.
For details about how to use Web Image Monitor, see page 269 "Configuring the Machine Using
Utilities".
41
1. Guide to the Machine
Entering Characters
This section describes how to enter text on the screens of the functions such as copier or fax or on the
Setting screen.
To open the keyboard, press the input box twice.
Character Entry Display
This section explains the entry screen and the keys displayed on it.
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
9
8
7
DUE305
1. Characters you enter are displayed on the text field.
2. Cancels the entered text and closes the character entry display.
3. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
4. Confirms text and closes the character entry display.
5. Deletes all characters that have been input.
6. Enters characters.
7. Switches between uppercase and lowercase.
8. Enters a space.
9. Displays the current input method.
10. You can switch the input method from the menu displayed pressing this key. Press to enter
numbers, symbols, and some special characters.
42
Entering Characters
Available Characters
You can enter the following characters:
• Alphabetic characters
• Symbols
• Numerals
0123456789
Entering Text
When you enter a character, it appears at the position of the cursor.
Entering letters
1. Press the letters you want to enter.
Entering alphanumeric characters and symbols
1. Press [
].
2. Press [123] or [,.-&@%].
3. Press the numbers or symbols you want to enter.
43
1. Guide to the Machine
Deleting characters
1. Press [ ] or [C] to delete characters.
44
Using RICOH Smart Device Connector
Using RICOH Smart Device Connector
To use RICOH Smart Device Connector, access the App Store or Google Play with your smart device,
search for and download the "RICOH Smart Device Connector" application from the site.
Check the App Store or Google Play to see the functions you can use on RICOH Smart Device
Connector.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press the [Machine info] tab.
The QR code is displayed on the screen.
4. Start the application on the smart device, and then read the QR code.
Follow the instructions displayed on the application.
For details about how to connect a smart device to the machine using Near-field communication
(NFC), see page 46 "Connecting a Smart Device to the Machine Using NFC".
45
1. Guide to the Machine
Connecting a Smart Device to the Machine
Using NFC
This section describes how to connect your smart device to the machine using NFC.
Writing the Machine's Information to the NFC tag with a Smart Device
1. Configure the network connection of the machine.
2. Access the App Store or Google Play from your smart device, search for and download
the "RICOH SP C260 series Scan" or "RICOH Smart Device Connector" application from
the site.
3. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
4. Press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen.
5. Press the [Machine info] tab.
The QR code is displayed on the screen.
6. Start the application on the smart device, and then read the QR code.
7. Write the machine's network information to the NFC tag using the application, and then
touch the NFC tag with the smart device.
Using the Application on a Smart Device by Using NFC
1. Start the application on the smart device, and then touch the NFC tag with the smart
device.
2. Print using "RICOH Smart Device Connector" by touching the NFC tag or execute a scan
using "RICOH SP C260 series Scan".
46
2. Paper Specifications and Adding
Paper
This chapter describes how to load paper and originals and about their specifications.
Workflow for Loading Paper and Configuring
Paper Sizes and Types
This section explains how to load paper and operations required after paper is loaded.
After following the procedures below, you can copy or print on the paper that is loaded in the machine.
Load paper into the paper tray.
Specify the paper type and size.
Specify the paper type and size on the printer driver.
For details about the procedures, refer to the next page.
Procedure
Reference
See page 48 "Loading Paper".
There are two ways to specify the paper type and size.
• When using the control panel
See page 57 "Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the
Control Panel".
• When using Web Image Monitor
See page 60 "Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using Web
Image Monitor".
See page 61 "Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Printer
Driver".
For details about supported paper, see page 63 "Supported Paper".
47
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Loading Paper
This section explains how to load paper into the paper tray and the bypass tray.
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
For information about supported paper, precautions for storing paper and print areas, see page 63
"Supported Paper".
Loading Paper into Tray1 and 2
The following example explains the loading procedure for the standard paper tray (Tray 1).
The same procedure applies to loading paper in Tray 2.
• Before printing on paper other than envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers on the machine rear,
inside the rear cover. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes.
• Curled paper may jam. Straighten curled paper before loading.
• After loading paper in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel to avoid
printing problems. This machine does not detect the paper size automatically.
• Be sure to select the correct paper size and feed direction using the paper size dial on the tray.
Otherwise, the printer might be damaged, or printing problems might occur.
• Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the upper limit mark inside the paper tray. Excessive
stacking can cause paper jams.
• If paper jams occur frequently, flip the paper stack in the tray.
• Do not mix different types of paper in the same paper tray.
• After loading paper, specify the paper size using the control panel and paper type using the
control panel. When printing a document, specify the same paper size and type in the printer
driver as specified on the printer.
• Do not move the side fences and end fence forcefully. Doing so may damage the tray.
• Do not slide the paper tray in forcefully when inserting the loaded tray into the printer. Otherwise,
the side and end fences or the paper guide of the bypass tray might move.
• When loading label paper, load it one by one.
48
Loading Paper
1. Pull out the paper tray carefully with both hands.
DUE214
Place the tray on a flat surface.
2. Push the metal plate down until it clicks.
DUE215
3. Pinch the clip on the side fence and the end fence, and slide them to the maximum extent.
DUD462
49
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
4. Fan the paper before loading it.
DAC344
5. Load the paper in the tray with the print side faced up.
Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit marked inside the tray.
Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the projection on the side fences. (Tray 1 only)
DUE218
6. Check there are no gaps between the paper and the fences; both side and end fences.
DUE219
7. Carefully push the paper tray straight into the machine.
To avoid paper jams, make sure the tray is securely inserted.
50
Loading Paper
DUE220
• The upper limit differs depending on the paper type (thin or thick paper). See the label inside the
tray to check the upper limit.
• The remaining paper indicator on the right front side of the paper tray shows approximately how
much paper is remaining.
Extending Tray 1 to load paper
This section explains how to load paper longer than A4 (297 mm) into the machine.
1. Remove the rear cover using a coin.
DUE221
2. Pull out tray 1 carefully with both hands.
Place the tray on a flat surface.
51
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
3. Push the metal plate down until it clicks.
DUE215
4. Pinch the extender in the "PUSH" direction, and then pull out the extender until it clicks.
DUE222
After extension, check that the arrows on the extender and tray are aligned.
DUE223
5. Follow Steps 3 to 6 in "Loading Paper into Tray1 and 2".
• To reinsert the extender, you might have to push it with moderate force.
52
Loading Paper
Loading Paper into Bypass Tray
• Before printing on paper other than envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers on the machine rear,
inside the rear cover. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes.
• Do not load paper while the machine is printing.
• Load paper with the print side down and in the short-edge feed direction.
• Curled paper may jam. Straighten curled paper before loading.
• Duplex printing is not possible.
• Tray 1 and 2 are unavailable if paper is loaded in the bypass tray.
• You cannot load paper into the bypass tray while the machine is in Energy Saver mode.
1. Insert the top edge of the paper into the machine.
DUE224
2. Adjust the paper guides to the paper size.
DUE225
53
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
3. Support the paper with both hands, and insert it carefully until it stops.
DUE226
Loading Envelopes
• Before printing on envelopes, make sure to lower the levers on the machine rear, inside the rear
cover, to avoid envelopes coming out creased. Also, pull up the levers back to their original
positions after printing. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing
on paper other than envelopes.
• Avoid using self-adhesive envelopes. They may cause machine malfunctions.
• Check there is no air in the envelopes before loading.
• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.
• Before loading envelopes, flatten their leading edges (the edge going into the machine) by running
a pencil or ruler across them.
• Some kinds of envelope might cause misfeeds, wrinkles or print poorly.
• Print quality on envelopes may be uneven if parts of an envelope have different thicknesses. Print
one or two envelopes to check print quality.
• In a hot and humid environment, the envelope might be output creased or improper printing
quality.
54
Loading Paper
Lowering the fusing unit levers
1. Pull the front cover open lever, and then carefully lower the front cover.
2
1
DUE227
2. Lower the fusing unit levers.
DUE228
3. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
DUE229
For details about loading an envelope, see page 48 "Loading Paper into Tray1 and 2", and
page 53 "Loading Paper into Bypass Tray". Note that you cannot load an envelope in Tray 2.
55
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• If printed envelopes come out badly creased, load the envelopes in the opposite direction, and
then rotate the print object by 180 degrees using the printer driver before printing. For details, see
the printer driver Help.
• When Using Tray 1
• If the envelope flap is on a short side, place the envelope with the flap side in the tray recess.
If the envelope flap is on a long side, place the envelope with the flap side on the right.
DUE230
• When Using the Bypass Tray
• If the envelope flap is on a short side, place the envelope with the flap side in the front part of
the tray. If the envelope flap is on a long side, place the envelope with the flap side on the
right.
DUE231
56
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Control Panel
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using
the Control Panel
This section describes how to specify the paper size and paper type using the control panel.
• Paper type and size can also be specified using the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver
Help.
• For prints from the bypass tray or Tray 1, you can select to print according to either the printer
driver settings or the control panel settings with [Bypass Tray Priority] under [Paper Settings]. For
details about [Bypass Tray Priority], see page 250 "Paper Settings".
• If [Auto Continue] under [System Settings] is enabled, printing stops temporarily if a paper type/
size error is detected. The printing restarts automatically with the settings made with the control
panel after about ten seconds. For details about [Auto Continue], see page 238 "System Settings".
Specifying the Paper Type
This section describes how to specify the paper type.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Paper Settings].
4. Select the tray for which you want to specify the paper type.
5. Select the desired paper type.
6. Press the [Home] key.
57
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Specifying the Standard Paper Size
This section describes how to specify the standard paper size.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Paper Settings].
4. Select the tray for which you want to specify the paper size.
5. Select the desired paper size.
6. Press the [Home] key.
Specifying a Custom Paper Size
This section describes how to specify a custom paper size.
• Custom size paper cannot be loaded in tray 2.
• When you perform printing, make sure that the paper size specified with the printer driver matches
the paper size specified with the control panel. If a paper size mismatch occurs, a message
appears on the display. To ignore the error and print using mismatched paper, see page 87 "If a
Paper Mismatch Occurs".
58
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Control Panel
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Paper Settings].
4. Select the tray for which you want to specify the paper size.
5. Press [ ] twice.
6. Press [Custom Size].
7. Select [mm] or [inch].
8. Press the box next to [Horiz:].
9. Enter the horizontal size, and then press [OK].
10. Press the box next to [Vert:].
11. Enter the vertical size, and then press [OK].
12. Confirm the size you entered is displayed, and then press [OK].
13. Press the [Home] key.
59
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using
Web Image Monitor
This section describes how to specify paper sizes and types using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
The top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
2. Click [System Settings].
3. Click [Tray Paper Settings].
4. Select the paper type and paper size for the tray you want to use.
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [OK].
7. Close the web browser.
Specifying a Custom Paper Size
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering the IP address.
2. Click [System Settings].
3. Click [Tray Paper Settings].
4. Select [Custom Size] in the [Paper Size] list.
5. Select [mm] or [inch] and specify the width and length.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [OK].
8. Close the web browser.
60
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Printer Driver
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using
the Printer Driver
• Make sure that the paper type and size specified with the printer driver matches the type and size
of the paper loaded in the tray. Since this machine does not detect paper sizes automatically, the
type or size of the paper may be mismatched and the print job may not print correctly.
When Using Windows
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 7. The actual procedure may vary
depending on the operating system you are using.
1. Open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from the printer driver.
For information of how to open the printer driver properties from [Devices and Printers], see
page 84 "Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box".
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
2. Click the [Paper] tab.
3. In the [Input Tray:] list, select the paper tray you want to use for printing.
4. In the [Paper Type:] list, select the type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray.
5. Select the [Print On] check box and select the size of the paper that is loaded in the paper
tray.
Clear the [Fit to Print Size] check box as necessary.
61
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
6. Click [OK].
When Using OS X
The procedure in this section is an example based on OS X 10.11. The actual procedure may vary
depending on the operating system you are using.
1. Start System Preferences.
2. Click [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you are using.
4. In the [Default paper Size:] list, select the size of the document to be printed.
62
Supported Paper
Supported Paper
• After loading paper in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel. This
machine does not detect the paper size automatically.
• When loading custom size paper into Tray 1 or the bypass tray, specify the width and length using
the control panel and the printer driver.
• When printing on custom size paper from the bypass tray, you can print without specifying the
paper type or paper size from the control panel depending on the settings for [Bypass Tray
Priority].
Tray 1
Type
Plain Paper
Middle Thick Paper
Recycled Paper
Thick Paper 1
Thick Paper 2
Thin Paper
Size
A4, B5 JIS, A5 LEF, A5 SEF, B6
JIS, A6, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11,
51/2 × 81/2, 71/4 × 101/2, 8
× 13, 81/2 × 13, 81/4 × 13,
16K, 41/8 × 91/2, 37/8 ×
71/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL Env,
81/2 × 132/5, 81/2 × 133/5
Weight
Capacity*1
60 to 160 g/m2
250
(16 to 43 lb.)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Letterhead
Preprinted Paper
Label Paper
Prepunched Paper
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Color Paper
Envelope
63
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Type
Size
Capacity*1
Weight
Plain Paper
Custom size:
60 to 160 g/m2
250
Middle Thick Paper
90 to 216 mm in width,
(16 to 43 lb.)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Recycled Paper
148 to 356 mm in length
Thick Paper 1
(3.54 to 8.50 inches in width,
Thick Paper 2
5.83 to 14.0 inches in length)
Thin Paper
Letterhead
Preprinted Paper
Label Paper
Prepunched Paper
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Color Paper
Envelope
*1 The number of envelopes that can be loaded is up to 10.
Tray 2 (option)
Type
Thin Paper
A4
Plain Paper
Letter (81/
Middle Thick Paper
Thick Paper 1
Recycled Paper
Color Paper
Preprinted Paper
Prepunched Paper
Letterhead
64
Size
2 × 11 inches)
Weight
Capacity
60 to 105 g/m2
500
(16 to 28 lb.)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Supported Paper
Bypass tray
Type
Size
Weight
A4, B5 JIS, A5 LEF, A5 SEF, B6
JIS, A6, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11,
51/2 × 81/2, 71/4 × 101/2, 8
× 13, 81/2 × 13, 81/4 × 13,
16K, 41/8 × 91/2, 37/8 ×
71/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL Env,
81/2 × 132/5, 81/2 × 133/5
60 to 160 g/m2
Plain Paper
Custom size:
60 to 160 g/m2
Middle Thick Paper
90 to 216 mm in width,
(16 to 43 lb.)
Recycled Paper
148 to 356 mm in length
Thick Paper 1
(3.54 to 8.50 inches in width,
Thick Paper 2
5.83 to 14.0 inches in length)
Plain Paper
Middle Thick Paper
Recycled Paper
Thick Paper 1
Thick Paper 2
Thin Paper
Capacity
1
(16 to 43 lb.)
Letterhead
Envelope
Label Paper
Prepunched Paper
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Color Paper
1
Thin Paper
Letterhead
Envelope
Label Paper
Prepunched Paper
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Color Paper
• You cannot print on Legal size paper in the following cases:
• PCL printer driver/DDST printer driver
When [Gradation:] in [Print Quality] is set to [Fine]
65
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• PostScript 3 printer driver
When [Print Quality] in [Printer Features] is set to [Best Quality]
Specifications of Paper Types
The following tables describe the types of paper that can be used with this machine.
• Depending on the paper type, the toner may take a while to dry. Before handling printed sheets,
make sure that they have fully dried. Otherwise, the toner may smudge.
• Print quality can be guaranteed only if recommended paper is used. For more information about
the recommended paper, contact your sales or service representative.
Plain Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
66 to 74 g/m2 (18 to 20 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13,
81/4 × 13, 16K, 81/2 × 132/5, 81/2 × 133/5
Middle Thick Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13,
81/4 × 13, 16K, 81/2 × 132/5, 81/2 × 133/5
Thick Paper 1
Item
Paper thickness
66
Description
91 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb.)
Supported Paper
Item
Description
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
None
Notes
The number of sheets that can be printed per minute is approximately half
that of middle thick paper.
Thick Paper 2
Item
Description
Paper thickness
106 to 160 g/m2 (28 to 43 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size
None
Notes
The number of sheets that can be printed per minute is approximately half
that of middle thick paper.
Thin Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
60 to 65 g/m2 (16 to 17 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13,
81/4 × 13, 16K, 81/2 × 132/5, 81/2 × 133/5
Recycled Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13,
81/4 × 13, 16K, 81/2 × 132/5, 81/2 × 133/5
67
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Item
Notes
Description
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Color Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13,
81/4 × 13, 16K, 81/2 × 132/5, 81/2 × 133/5
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Preprinted Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and tray 2
Duplex supported size
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13,
81/4 × 13, 16K, 81/2 × 132/5, 81/2 × 133/5
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Prepunched Paper
Item
68
Description
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13,
81/4 × 13, 16K, 81/2 × 132/5, 81/2 × 133/5
Supported Paper
Item
Notes
Description
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Plain Paper], [Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Letterhead
Item
Description
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Can be used with any of the paper trays.
Duplex supported size
A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13,
81/4 × 13, 16K, 81/2 × 132/5, 81/2 × 133/5
Notes
Paper that has a thickness outside the specified range cannot be printed
onto.
Bond Paper
Item
Description
Paper thickness
106 to 160 g/m2 (28 to 43 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size
None
Notes
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is
approximately half that of middle thick paper.
• If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thick Paper
1].
Cardstock
Item
Description
Paper thickness
106 to 160 g/m2 (28 to 43 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
69
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Item
Duplex supported size
Notes
Description
None
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is
approximately half that of middle thick paper.
• If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thick Paper
1].
Label Paper
Item
Description
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size
None
Notes
• The number of sheets that can be printed per minute is approximately
half that of middle thick paper.
• Avoid using adhesive label paper on which glue is exposed. Glue
may stick to the inner parts of the machine, which can cause paper
feed problems, deterioration in print quality, or premature wear of the
print cartridge's photo conductor unit.
Envelope
Item
Description
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size
None
Notes
• Avoid using self-adhesive envelopes. They may cause machine malfunctions.
• The number of envelopes that can be printed per minute is approximately half that of middle thick
paper.
• Paper can be loaded only up to the lower of the two paper limit marks of the tray.
• If printed envelopes come out badly creased, load the envelopes in the opposite direction. Also,
configure the printer driver to rotate the print object 180 degrees. For details about changing the
orientation see the printer driver Help.
70
Supported Paper
• Environmental factors can degrade the print quality on both recommended and non-recommended
envelopes.
• If envelopes are severely curled after printing, flatten them by bending them back against the curl.
• After printing, envelopes sometimes have creases along their long edges and toner smear on their
unprinted sides. Print images might also be blurred. When printing large, black-solid areas, striping
can occur as a result of the envelopes overlapping.
• To correctly specify the length of an envelope whose flap opens along its short edge, be sure to
include the open flap when measuring.
CER112
• Fan envelopes, and then align their edges before loading.
DAC573
• When fanning envelopes, make sure they are not stuck together. If they are stuck together,
separate them.
• When fanning envelopes, make sure the envelope flaps are not stuck. If they are stuck, separate
them.
• Before loading envelopes, flatten them out so that their curl does not exceed that shown as shown
below.
71
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
DAC574
• If the curl is severe, flatten out the envelopes using your fingers, as shown below.
DAC575
• You may not be able to perform duplex printing on 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13, Folio (81/4 × 13 inches),
or 16K (195 mm × 267 mm) size paper in the following cases:
• PCL printer driver/DDST printer driver
When [Gradation:] in [Print Quality] is set to [Fine]
• PostScript 3 printer driver
When [Print Quality] in [Printer Features] is set to [Best Quality]
Non-Recommended Paper Types
Do not use the following types of paper:
• Ink-jet printer paper
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Curled or twisted paper
• Torn paper
• Wrinkled paper
• Damp paper
72
Supported Paper
• Dirty or damaged paper
• Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity
• Paper that has already been printed onto, except a preprinted letterhead paper.
Malfunctions are especially likely when using paper printed on by other than a laser printer
(e.g.monochrome and color copiers, ink-jet printers, etc.)
• Special paper, such as thermal paper and carbon paper
• Paper weighing heavier or lighter than the limit
• Paper with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
• Adhesive label paper on which glue or base paper is exposed
• Paper with clips or staples
• When loading paper, take care not to touch the surface of the paper.
• Even if paper is adequate for the machine, poorly stored paper can cause paper misfeeds, print
quality degradation, or malfunctions.
Paper Storage
• Store paper appropriately. If the paper is stored incorrectly, misfeeds, lower printing quality, or
malfunctions may result.
When storing paper:
• Do not store paper in a humid place.
• Do not store paper in direct sunlight.
• Do not stand paper on its edge.
• Store any leftover paper in a wrapping or box supplied with the paper.
Print Area
The diagram below shows the area of the paper that the machine can print on.
73
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
From the printer driver
2
4
4
3
1
3
DAC571
1. Print area
2. Feed direction
3. Approx. 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)
4. Approx. 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)
Envelope
4
3
3
1
2
3
DAC577
1. Print area
2. Feed direction
3. Approximately 10 mm (0.4 inches)
4. Approximately 15 mm (0.6 inches)
74
Supported Paper
Copier function
4
4
3
1
3
2
DAC580
1. Print area
2. Feed direction
3. Approx. 4 mm (0.2 inches)
4. Approx. 3 mm (0.1 inches)
Fax function
4
4
3
1
3
2
DAC580
1. Print area
2. Feed direction
3. Approx. 4.2 mm (0.2 inches)
4. Approx. 2 mm (0.08 inches)
75
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Borderless printing is not supported.
• The print area may vary depending on the paper size, printer language and printer driver settings.
• For better envelope printing, we recommend you set the right, left, top, and bottom print margins to
at least 15 mm (0.6 inches) each.
76
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
This section describes the types of originals you can set and how to place them.
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass
This section describes the procedure for placing originals on the exposure glass.
• Do not place originals before any correction fluid and toner has completely dried. Doing so may
make marks on the exposure glass that will appear on copies.
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
• Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
1. Lift the ADF.
2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be aligned to the
rear left corner.
DUE232
3. Lower the ADF.
Hold down the ADF with your hands when using thick, folded, or bound originals and when the
ADF cannot be lowered completely.
Placing Originals in the Auto Document Feeder
By using the ADF, you can scan multiple pages at once.
• Do not place different size originals in the ADF at once.
• Straighten curls in the originals before placing them in the ADF.
77
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the pages of your original before placing
them in the ADF.
• Place the original squarely.
1. Open the cover of the input tray for the ADF and adjust the guides according to the size of
the original.
DUE233
2. Place the aligned originals face up in the ADF. The last page should be on the bottom.
DUE234
• When placing originals longer than A4 or 81/2 × 11, pull out the ADF tray's extenders.
About Originals
This section describes the types of originals that can be placed and the parts of the original that are
unscannable.
Recommended size of originals
This section describes the recommended size of the original.
Exposure glass
Up to 216 mm (8.5 inches) in width, up to 297 mm (11.7 inches) in length
78
Placing Originals
ADF
• Paper size: 140 to 216 mm (51/2 to 81/2 inches) in width, 140 to 356 mm (51/2 to 14
inches) in length
• Paper weight: 52 to 105 g/m2 (13.8 to 28.0 lb.)
• Only 1 sheet of an original can be placed on the exposure glass at a time.
• In the ADF for SP C260SFNw, up to 35 sheets of originals can be placed at once (when using
paper weighing 80 g/m2, 20 lb.).
• In the ADF for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw, up to 50 sheets of originals can be placed at once
(when using paper weighing 80 g/m2, 20 lb.).
Types of originals not supported by the Auto Document Feeder
If placed in the ADF, the following types of original might be damaged or become jammed, or result in
gray or black lines appearing on prints:
• Originals larger or heavier than recommended
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon
paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with perforated lines
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin, highly flexible originals
• Thick originals such as postcards
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• Originals that are wet with toner or white out
Unscannable image area
Even if you correctly place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass, margins of a few millimeters on
all four sides of the original might not be scanned.
79
2. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
DAC579
Margins when using exposure glass
In copier mode
In scanner mode
In fax mode
Top
4 mm (0.2 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
1 mm (0.05 inches)
Right
3 mm (0.1 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
1 mm (0.05 inches)
Left
3 mm (0.1 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
1 mm (0.05 inches)
Bottom
4 mm (0.2 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
2 mm (0.08 inches)
Margins when using ADF
In copier mode
In scanner mode
In fax mode
Top
4 mm (0.2 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
Right
3 mm (0.1 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
1 mm (0.05 inches)
(Letter, Legal)
0 mm (0 inches) (other
sizes)
Left
3 mm (0.1 inches)
0 mm (0 inches)
1 mm (0.05 inches)
(Letter, Legal)
0 mm (0 inches) (other
sizes)
Bottom
80
4 mm (0.2 inches)
2 mm (0.08 inches)
2 mm (0.08 inches)
3. Printing Documents
This chapter describes how to configure settings on the printer driver and print documents.
What You Can Do with the Printer Function
Duplex printing
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For details, see the printer driver Help.
DSG261
Combined printing
You can combine multiple pages and print them on a single sheet of paper. For details, see the
printer driver Help.
1
2
3
DSG262
81
3. Printing Documents
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer
When bidirectional communication works correctly, your computer obtains information about option,
paper size and paper feed direction settings from the machine automatically. Bidirectional
communication also allows you to monitor machine status.
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication
To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:
When connected with the network
• The Standard TCP/IP port must be used.
• In addition to the above, one of the following conditions must also be met:
• The TCP/IP protocol or the IPP protocol is used. (When using the IPP protocol, the IPP
port name must include the IP address.)
When connected with USB
• The machine must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the printer driver.
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled
This section describes how to set up option and setting of paper size for each tray on your computer
manually.
• Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties. Log on as an
Administrators group member.
When Using Windows
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 7.
1. On the [Start] menu, select [Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Accessories] tab.
4. Select options installed from the [Options] area, and then make the necessary settings.
5. Click [Paper Size Settings] tab.
82
Configuring Option Settings for the Printer
6. In [Input Tray:] select which trays to use, and then, in [Paper Size:] select the size of the
paper that you want to load in each tray.
Click [Update] to apply the setting for each tray.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Click [OK] to close the printer properties window.
When Using OS X
The following procedure is explained using OS X 10.11 as an example.
1. Start System Preferences.
2. Click [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the printer you are using, and then click [Options & Supplies...].
4. Click [Options], and then configure settings as needed.
5. Click [OK].
6. Quit System Preferences.
83
3. Printing Documents
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box
To change the default settings of the printer driver, configure settings in the [Printing Preferences] dialog
box.
To change the default settings of all applications, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from the
OS. For details, see page 84 "Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box from the [Start] Menu".
To change the default settings of a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from
that application. For details, see page 84 "Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box in an
Application".
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box from the [Start] Menu
This section explains how to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from [Devices and Printers].
• When the printer driver is distributed from the print server, the setting values specified by the server
are displayed as the default for [Printing Defaults...].
• You cannot configure different print settings for each user. The settings configured in this dialog box
are used as the default.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Printing Preferences].
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box in an Application
You can make printer settings for a specific application. To make printer settings for a specific
application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that application.
The settings displayed in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box opened from the [Devices and Printers]
window are applied as the default in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box opened in an application.
When printing from an application, modify the settings as required.
The screens displayed may differ depending on the application. The following procedure explains how
to print documents from an application using WordPad in Windows 7 as an example.
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box in an Application When Using
Windows
1. Click the WordPad menu button in the upper left corner of the window, and then click
[Print].
84
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box
2. In the [Select Printer] list, select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
• Procedures for opening the [Printing Preferences] dialog box vary depending on the application.
For details, see the printer driver Help or the manuals provided with the application.
Displaying the Printing Preferences Dialog Box in an Application When Using OS X
The following procedure is explained using OS X 10.11 as an example.
1. Open the document to print.
2. Select [Print...] on the [File] menu.
3. Check that the machine name or IP address you are using is selected in the [Printer:]
popup menu.
If the machine name or IP address you are using is not selected in the [Printer:] list, click the list, and
then select the machine.
85
3. Printing Documents
Basic Operation of Printing
The following procedure explains how to perform basic printing.
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 7. The actual procedure may vary
depending on the operating system you are using.
For details of printing options, see the printer driver Help.
1. Open the printer properties dialog box in your document's application.
For details about each setting, click [Help]. You can also click the information icons to show
configuration information.
2. Set printing options as necessary, and then click [OK].
The printer properties dialog box closes.
3. Click [Print].
• When printing a job (Color/B&W or B&W only) is restricted, specify the user code in the printer
properties of the printer driver before printing. For details about user code, see page 289
"Restricting Machine Functions According to User".
• You can specify which paper tray is selected first in [Paper Tray Priority] under [Paper Settings]
when the trays are automatically selected while you are printing. For details about [Paper Tray
Priority], see page 250 "Paper Settings".
• If a paper jam occurs, printing stops after the current page has been printed out. After the jammed
paper is removed, printing restarts from the jammed page automatically. For details about how to
remove the jammed paper, see page 351 "Removing Paper Jams".
86
Basic Operation of Printing
• After printing on envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers for printing on envelopes back to their
original positions. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes. For details about the levers for printing on envelopes, see page 48
"Loading Paper".
If a Paper Mismatch Occurs
The machine reports an error if:
• The paper type does not match the print job's settings when [Input Tray:] is set to [Auto Tray Select].
There are two ways to resolve these errors:
Continue printing using mismatched paper
Ignore the error and print using mismatched paper.
Cancel the print job
Cancel printing.
• If [Auto Continue] under [System Settings] is enabled, the machine ignores the paper type and size
settings and prints on whatever paper is loaded. Printing stops temporarily when the error is
detected, and restarts automatically after about ten seconds using the settings made on the control
panel. For details about [Auto Continue], see page 238 "System Settings".
Continuing printing using mismatched paper
If the paper is too small for the print job, the printed image will be cropped.
1. Press [FormFeed] while the error message is being displayed.
Canceling a Print Job
You can cancel print jobs using either the machine's control panel or your computer, depending on the
status of the job.
Canceling a print job before printing has started
• Windows
1. Double-click the printer icon on the task tray of your computer.
2. Select the print job you want to cancel, click the [Document] menu, and then click
[Cancel].
87
3. Printing Documents
3. Click [Yes].
• If you cancel a print job that has already been processed, printing may continue for a few pages
before being canceled.
• It may take a while to cancel a large print job.
Canceling a print job while printing
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
DUE308
2. Press [Print Jobs] on the [Cancel Jobs] screen.
88
Printing Confidential Documents
Printing Confidential Documents
By the Locked Print function, you can password-protect print jobs.
This means that your job is printed only after you enter the password using the machine's control panel.
This function prevents unauthorized users from seeing sensitive documents at the machine.
• This function is available for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw only.
• This function is only available when using the PCL printer driver, and printing from a computer
running a Windows operating system.
• The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 7.
Storing a Locked Print file
This section explains how to store a Locked Print file in the machine using the printer driver.
1. Open the file you want to print on your computer.
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
3. In the [Select Printer] area, select the name of this machine, and then click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Setup] tab, and then select the [Locked Print] check box.
The [Password:] and [User ID:] text boxes become available.
The [User ID:] text box contains the login user name of your computer account or the user code
used for the previous Locked Print job.
5. Type the password (containing 4 to 8 digits) and user ID (containing 1 to 9 alphanumeric
characters), and then click [OK].
The user code will be used to identify your Locked Print file on the machine's control panel.
6. Execute a print command.
The print job is stored in the machine as a Locked Print file. You can print the file by entering the
password using the control panel.
• The Locked Print file is automatically erased from the machine's memory when it is printed out, or
when the machine's power is turned off.
• The machine can store up to 5 jobs or 5 MB of Locked Print data at a time.
• Even if the machine cannot store any more Locked Print files, the machine holds a new Locked Print
file for the period of time specified in [Locked Print] under system settings before canceling the job.
Within this time, you can print or delete the new Locked Print file. You can also print or delete an
existing Locked Print file so that the new Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.
89
3. Printing Documents
Printing a Locked Print file
When there is a Locked Print file stored in the machine, “Locked Print Job” appears on the machine's
control panel display when the machine is in the copier, fax, scanner, or ID card copy mode.
Also, "Locked Print Job" appears on the [Status] screen.
Use the following procedure to unlock and print the Locked Print file.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press the [Locked Print] tab.
4. Select the file you want to print.
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.
5. Press [Print Jobs].
6. Press the [Locked Print Password:] box.
90
Printing Confidential Documents
7. Enter the password, and then press [OK].
8. Press [OK].
• You cannot print a Locked Print file while the machine is currently printing. The machine beeps if
you try to do so.
• While entering a password using the control panel, the machine cannot process other print jobs.
• The Locked Print file is automatically erased from the machine's memory when it is printed out, or
when the machine's power is turned off.
Deleting a Locked Print file
When there is a Locked Print file stored in the machine, “Locked Print Job” appears on the machine's
control panel display when the machine is in the copier, fax, scanner, or ID card copy mode.
Also, "Locked Print Job" appears on the [Status] screen.
Use the following procedure to delete a Locked Print file. You do not need to enter a password to delete
a Locked Print file.
91
3. Printing Documents
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press the [Locked Print] tab.
4. Select the file you want to delete.
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.
5. Press [Delete Jobs].
The Locked Print file is deleted.
• You can also display the Locked Print file list by pressing [Check] on the [Status] tab in Step 3.
92
Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)
Direct Printing from a Digital Camera
(PictBridge)
What Is PictBridge?
You can connect a PictBridge-compatible digital camera to this machine using a USB cable. This allows
you to directly print photographs by operating the digital camera.
• Check that your digital camera is PictBridge-compatible.
• Up to 999 images can be sent from the digital camera to the machine during one print transaction.
If an attempt is made to send more images, an error message is sent to the camera and printing
fails.
• Since printing conditions are specified on the digital camera, specifiable parameters depend on
the digital camera. For details, see the manuals provided with the digital camera.
• This function is compatible with USB 2.0.
PictBridge Printing
Use the following procedure to start PictBridge printing on this machine.
• Memory overflow errors can occur during printing a high-resolution image. If this happens, reduce
the size of the data, and then try the operation again.
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while data is being sent. If you do, printing will fail.
1. Make sure that both the machine and the digital camera are turned on.
2. Open the cover of the USB flash disk port, connect the USB cable, and then connect the
other end of the cable to your digital camera.
2
1
DUE235
93
3. Printing Documents
When the machine recognizes the digital camera as a PictBridge device, "PictBridge
Connecting...", then "Ready" will appear on the machine’s control panel.
3. On your digital camera, select the images you want to print, and then specify the printing
conditions.
4. The machine receives the specified data from the digital camera and starts printing.
• Some digital cameras require specifying settings manually for PictBridge operation. For details, see
the manual provided with the digital camera.
• Some digital cameras require manually operating a switch for PictBridge operation. For details, see
the manual provided with the digital camera.
• Some digital cameras need to be switched off when connecting to the printer. For details, see the
manual provided with the digital camera.
What Can Be Done on this Machine
This machine can perform the following functions using its PictBridge feature.
The settings available for these functions are as follows:
• Single image printing
• Selected image printing
• All image printing
• Index printing
• Copies
• Paper size
• N-up layout
• The setting parameters and their names may vary depending on the digital camera. For details, see
the manuals provided with the digital camera.
Exiting PictBridge
Use the following procedure to quit the PictBridge mode.
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while data is being sent to the machine. If you do, printing will
fail.
1. Check that "Ready" appears on the screen.
94
Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)
2. Disconnect the USB cable from the machine.
Make sure to close the cover of the USB flash disk port after use.
When PictBridge Printing Does Not Work
This section explains likely causes and possible solutions for problems that can occur during PictBridge
printing.
Problem
PictBridge is not available.
Cause
Solution
There is a problem with the USB
connection or the PictBridge
settings.
Use the following procedure to
check the connection and
settings:
1. Disconnect and then
reconnect the USB cable.
2. Check the PictBridge
settings are enabled.
3. Disconnect the USB cable,
and then turn off the
machine. Turn the machine
back on. When the
machine has fully booted
up, reconnect the USB
cable.
When two or more digital
cameras are connected, the
second and subsequent
cameras are not recognized.
You have connected multiple
digital cameras.
Cannot print.
The specified number of prints
exceeds the maximum number
that can be printed at a time.
Connect one digital camera
only.
Do not connect multiple
cameras.
The maximum specifiable print
quantity at a time is 999.
Change the quantity to 999 or
less, and then retry printing.
95
3. Printing Documents
Problem
Cannot print.
Cause
The specified type of paper is
not loaded.
Solution
The specified type of paper is
not loaded.
If you have to use paper that is
not of the specified size,
perform continue printing using
mismatched paper or cancel the
print job. For details, see
page 87 "If a Paper Mismatch
Occurs".
Cannot print.
96
The specified paper size is not
supported by this machine.
Select the paper with the size
that can be printed on the
machine.
Printing with Mopria
Printing with Mopria
This machine supports Mopria.
For more information about Mopria, please visit: http://mopria.org/how-to-print.
97
3. Printing Documents
Using Various Print Functions
This section briefly describes various print functions that you can configure with the printer driver to make
printouts appropriate for your purposes.
Print Quality Functions
Print quality and color tone can be adjusted to suit the print data. Some of the print quality settings you
can configure are described below.
Printing color documents in black and white
The black produced in black and white printing is a more distinct black than that produced in color
printing.
Separating the print data into CMYK and printing in designated color only
Normally, all four colors (CMYK) are used for color printing. If you do not want to use certain
colors, you can disable the use of those colors and print using other colors only.
Saving toner when printing (Economy Color printing)
You can save toner by printing with lower toner consumption. The amount of toner that will be used
depends on the object, such as text, line, or image.
Changing the image printing method
You can select to print with priority on print quality or print speed. When printing images, the higher
the resolution of images is, the longer the time is required for printing.
Changing the dither pattern
A dither pattern is a pattern of dots used to simulate a color or shade of an image. If the pattern is
changed, the characteristics of the image will also change. You can select a pattern suitable for the
image to be printed.
Changing the color profiling pattern
You can select a color profiling pattern to adjust the tone of colors according to the colors
displayed on the computer screen.
Because colors on the computer screen are created using the three RGB colors while colors for
printing are composed of the four CMYK colors, colors need to be converted during the printing
process. Therefore, images on the printed paper may look different from those on the computer
screen if adjustment is not performed.
Printing grayscale images using black or CMYK
You can print black or gray sections of an image using black toner only, instead of using all CMYK
toners. Compared to the black printed with CMYK toner, this results in a black that is flatter and
purer.
98
Using Various Print Functions
Using ICM (Image Color Matching)
You can use Windows ICM function to reproduce colors that appear on the computer screen as
close as they are on printed paper.
To use this function, the color profile must be added to the computer. You can find the color profile
in the ICM folder stored on the provided printer driver CD-ROM. For information about adding a
color profile, search Windows Help for "color profile", and then see the appropriate topic.
• Some of the functions described above might not be available depending on the printer driver or
operating system. For details, see the printer driver Help.
Print Output Functions
You can specify the form of print outputs according to your purposes. This section briefly describes some
of the settings that you can specify.
Printing multiple sets of a document
You can print multiple sets of the same document.
Collating the output in document batches
You can print complete sets of a multiple-page document one set at a time (P1, P2, P1, P2 ...). If this
function is not used when printing multiple sets, prints will be output in page batches (P1, P1, P2,
P2 ...). This function is useful when, for example, making presentation materials.
Changing orientation or rotating the image
You can change the orientation of an image to portrait or landscape. You can also rotate the
image by 180 degrees. Use rotation to prevent an image from being printed upside down when
using paper with a predefined top and bottom (such as letterhead paper).
Printing multiple pages per sheet
You can print multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.
When using this function, a suitable reduction ratio is selected automatically based on the paper
size and the number of pages you want to fit on each sheet.
Printing on both sides of paper (duplex printing)
You can print on both sides of paper.
Reducing or enlarging the document
You can reduce or enlarge documents by a specific ratio, from 25% to 400% in 1% increments.
You can also reduce or enlarge documents automatically to fit a specific paper size. This function is
useful, for example, when printing Web pages.
If the [Enable Large Papers] option is selected, A3/11 × 17/B4/8K documents can be scaled to
a size that the machine supports, so that it can then be printed out.
99
3. Printing Documents
Not printing of blank pages
If a print job contains blank pages, they can be prevented from being printed.
Note that this setting has higher priority than [Blank Page Print] under printer feature settings of the
control panel.
Printing with a cover page
You can add a cover page to the print job.
You can select to leave the cover page blank, or print the first page of the document on the cover
page. If a cover page is inserted into a duplex job, you can print on its back side also.
Paper for the cover page can either be the same as or different from the remaining pages.
Printing on custom size paper
You can print using non-standard size paper by specifying the size of the paper as custom size.
To specify the custom paper size, select [Custom Paper Size] from the [Document Size:] list, and
then click the [Custom Paper Size...] button in the lower part of the dialog box to configure the
paper size.
Superimposing text on prints (watermark)
You can superimpose watermark text on prints. Various predefined watermarks are provided. You
can also create your own watermarks.
• Some of the functions described above might not be available depending on the printer driver or
operating system. For details, see the printer driver Help.
100
4. Copying Originals
This chapter describes the basic and advanced procedures for making copies and how to specify
settings.
What You Can Do with the Copier Function
Duplex copying
You can copy two pages onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. For details about the settings,
see page 109 "Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing" and
page 114 "Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing".
DUE293
Combined copying
You can copy multiple pages onto a single sheet of paper. For details about the settings, see
page 109 "Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing" and page 114
"Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing".
1
2
3
DUE294
ID card copying
ID card copying allows you to copy the front and back sides of an ID card or passport onto one
side of a sheet of paper. For details, see page 119 "Copying an ID Card".
1
2
DUE295
101
4. Copying Originals
Copier Mode Screen
This section provides information about the screen when the machine is in copier mode.
Screen in standby mode
1
2
3
4
9
5
6
8
7
DUE311
1. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
2. Paper tray status indicators
Displays paper tray settings.
3. Favorite item icon
Press to register current settings to a favorite item.
4. Copy quantity
Displays the numbers of copies set and copies made. You can change the copy quantity using the
number keys.
5. Reduce/Enlarge ratio
You can specify the enlargement and reduction ratios if [Reduce/Enlarge] is pressed.
6. [Other Settings]
Press to display the functions you can use.
7. [Sort]
Configures the machine to sort the output pages into sets when making multiple copies of a multipage
document.
8. Original and scanning settings
Press to specify the original type and image density level.
9. [Dup to Dup], [Sim to Dup]
Press to set the duplex function.
102
Copier Mode Screen
• The start-up mode can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under [Administrator Tools]. For
details, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
103
4. Copying Originals
Basic Operation of Copying
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 77 "Placing Originals". If necessary, configure advanced
photocopy settings.
4. To make multiple copies, enter the number of copies using the number keys.
5. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.
DUE312
To make black-and-white photocopies, press the [B&W Start] key.
To make color photocopies, press the [Color Start] key.
• The maximum number of copies is 99.
104
Basic Operation of Copying
• You can change the paper tray for the current job. If tray 2 is installed, you can select to change
the paper tray automatically according to the paper size (A4 or Letter).
• You can select the paper tray for printing out copies in [Select Paper] under copy settings. If you set
the machine to switch between Tray 1 and 2 automatically depending on the paper size in this
setting, you can also specify the tray the machine uses first in [Paper Tray Priority] under [Paper
Settings]. For [Select Paper], see page 221 "Copier Features Settings". For [Paper Tray Priority],
see page 250 "Paper Settings".
• When making multiple copies of a multi-page document, you can select whether copies are output
in collated sets, or in page batches in the [Sort] setting under copy settings. [Sort] cannot be used
with the bypass tray. For [Sort], see page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
• If a paper jam occurs, printing stops after the current page has been printed out. After the jammed
paper is removed, printing restarts from the jammed page automatically.
• If a scanning jam occurs in the ADF, copying is canceled immediately. In this case, copy the
originals again starting from the jammed page. For the direction to remove the jammed paper, see
page 351 "Removing Paper Jams".
Canceling a Copy
While scanning the original
If copying is canceled while the machine is scanning the original, copying is cancelled immediately
and there is no printout.
When the original is set in the ADF, scanning stops immediately but pages that have already been
scanned completely will be copied.
While printing
If copying is canceled during printing, the photocopy process is canceled after the current page
has been printed out.
Follow the procedure below to cancel copying.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
105
4. Copying Originals
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
DUE308
When the [Cancel Jobs] screen appears, proceed to Step 4.
4. Press [Copy Jobs].
106
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies
There are two ways to set the scaling ratio: using a preset ratio or manually specifying a customized
ratio.
Preset ratio
CES103
•
(mainly Europe and Asia)
50%, 71%, 82%, 93%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
•
(mainly North America)
50%, 65%, 78%, 93%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%
Custom ratio
CES106
25% to 400% in 1% increments.
107
4. Copying Originals
Specifying Reduce/Enlarge
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Reduce/Enlarge].
4. For [Reduce] and [Enlarge], select the ratio you require. For [Zoom], press [+] or [-] to
specify the ratio.
5. Press [OK].
• You can change the machine's default [Reduce/Enlarge] setting to always make photocopies in
the specified ratio. For details, see page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] while the
initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
108
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided
and Combined Printing
This section explains how to combine and print a multiple pages (two or four pages) on one side or both
sides of paper.
• This function is only available when the original is set in the ADF, not when it is set on the exposure
glass.
• To use this function, the paper size used for printing copies must be set to A4, Letter or Legal.
• To use 2-sided copy, the paper size used for printing copies must be set to A4, B5 JIS, Legal,
Letter, Executive, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13, Folio, or 16K.
• The paper for 2-sided copy is fed from Tray 1 or 2, but not from the bypass tray.
• The types of paper that can be used for 2-sided copy are plain, thin, middle thick, recycled, color,
preprinted, and prepunched.
There are following copy modes. Select a copy mode according to your original and how you want the
copy outputs to appear.
Combined copy on one side
In this mode, a two or four-page original is combined and printed on one side of paper.
1S 2Org->Cmb 2on1 1S
Copy
Landscape
Portrait
Original
CMF250
109
4. Copying Originals
1S 4Org->Cmb 4on1 1S
Original
Copy
Top to Bottom
Left to Right
Top to Bottom
Landscape
Portrait
Left to Right
CMF251
Combined copy on both sides
In this mode, a multiple-page original is combined and printed on both sides of paper.
1S 4Org->Cmb 2on1 2S
Original
Copy
Top to Bottom
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Landscape
Portrait
Top to Top
DUE331
110
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing
1S 8Org->Cmb 4on1 2S
Copy
8
6
5
5
7
7
Portrait
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom
6
7
8
8
Top to Bottom, Top to Top
5
5
6
6
Left to Right, Top to Bottom
7
Left to Right, Top to Top
8
Original
CMF255
Copy
5
8
6
5
7
Landscape
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom
7
Top to Bottom, Top to Top
6
7
8
8
5
5
6
6
Left to Right, Top to Bottom
7
Left to Right, Top to Top
8
Original
DCT004
1S Orig->2S Copy
In this mode, one-sided pages are printed on the front and back sides of paper without being
combined.
111
4. Copying Originals
Original
Copy
Top to Bottom
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Landscape
Portrait
Top to Top
CMF260
Specifying Combined and 2-sided Copies
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Other Settings].
4. Press [Simplex to Duplex].
5. Select the desired copy mode, and then press [OK].
6. Press [OK].
• Setting combined and 2-sided copying automatically disables the [ID Card Copy] setting.
112
Copying Single-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing
• You can change the machine's default [Duplex/Combine] setting to always make photocopies in
the specified ratio. For details, see page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] while the
initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
113
4. Copying Originals
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and
Combined Printing
This section explains how to make 2-sided copies of 2-sided originals, or copy two original pages to
one sheet, or copy four original pages to one sheet with two pages per side.
DAC602
DAC603
DAC603
• [2S 1Org->Cmb 2on1 1S], [2S 2Org->Cmb 4on1 1S], [2S Orig->2S Copy], [2S 2Org->Cmb
2on1 2S], or [2S 4Org->Cmb 4on1 2S] is available for copying using the ADF, but not using the
exposure glass.
• Copy to the front and back of the sheet in the same color mode. If you try to copy in a different
mode, an alarm sounds.
• Make sure the same number of pages will be printed on the front and back of all sheets.
Otherwise, the job will be reset.
The following five types of manual 2-sided copying are available.
2S 1Org->Cmb 2on1 1S
Copies one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet.
2S 2Org->Cmb 4on1 1S
Copies two 2-sided originals to one side of a sheet.
114
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing
2S Orig->2S Copy
Makes 2-sided copies of 2-sided originals.
2S 2Org->Cmb 2on1 2S
Copies both sides of one 2-sided original to one side of a sheet, and both sides of another 2-sided
original to the other side of the sheet.
2S 4Org->Cmb 4on1 2S
Copies four 2-sided originals to one sheet with four pages per side.
Manual 2Sd Scan Mode
Select this mode to make 2-sided copies using the exposure glass.
Duplex Copying Using the ADF
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Other Settings].
4. Press [Duplex to Duplex].
5. Select the desired copy mode, and then press [OK].
6. Press [OK].
115
4. Copying Originals
7. Place all 2-sided originals into the ADF with their fronts facing up.
DUE237
DUE238
8. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.
DUE312
To make black-and-white photocopies, press the [B&W Start] key.
To make color photocopies, press the [Color Start] key.
When using SP C260SFNw, proceed to Step 9.
116
Copying 2-Sided Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing
9. After all originals are delivered, place them into the ADF again with their fronts facing
down.
DUE239
DUE240
10. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key again.
Use the same mode (color or black-and-white) for both sides.
After all pages have been scanned, copying starts.
• After you place the originals, press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key within the time
specified in [System Reset Timer]. Otherwise, the job is canceled. For details, see page 255
"Administrator Tools Settings".
• If the memory becomes full while originals are being scanned, the job is canceled.
Duplex Copying Manually Using the Exposure Glass
• When printing odd pages in [Manual 2Sd Scan Mode], the last page cannot be printed. Before
printing the last page, set the [Duplex/Combine] to [Off].
117
4. Copying Originals
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Copier Features].
4. Press [ ].
5. Press [Duplex/Combine].
6. Press [ ].
7. Press [Manual 2Sd Scan Mode].
8. Press the [Home] key.
9. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
10. Place the original on the exposure glass front side down and with the top to the rear of
the machine.
Place the originals one by one.
11. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.
A message prompting you to place the original back side down on the exposure glass appears on
the display.
12. Place the original on the exposure glass with the back side faced down and with the top
to the rear of the machine.
13. Press [Start].
Use the same mode (color or black-and-white) for both sides.
When all originals have been scanned, press [Job Finished].
• After you load the original, press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key within the time specified
in [System Reset Timer]. Otherwise, the job is canceled. For details, see page 255 "Administrator
Tools Settings".
• Sort is not available.
118
Copying an ID Card
Copying an ID Card
This section describes how to copy the front and back sides of an ID card or other small documents onto
one side of a sheet of paper.
• This function is available only when the original is set on the exposure glass, not when it is set in the
ADF.
• To use this function, the paper size used for printing copies must be set to A6, A5, A4, or Letter.
Printed paper size
Scanned paper size
A4
A5 (148×210 mm)
Letter
Half Letter (140×216 mm)
A5
A6 (105×148 mm)
A6
A7 (74×105 mm)
DUE332
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Card] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. To make multiple copies, enter the number of copies using the number keys.
119
4. Copying Originals
4. Place the original in the upper-left corner of the exposure glass.
DUE241
5. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.
DUE312
A message prompting you to place the original back side down on the exposure glass appears on
the display.
6. Place the original on the exposure glass with the back side faced down and with the top
to the rear of the machine within the time specified in [System Reset Timer], and then
press [Start].
Use the same mode (color or black-and-white) for both sides.
• For the ID card copy function, you can set the machine to print a line in the middle of the printed
paper. Specify [ID Card Center Line] under [Copier Features].
• You can change the scanning size for the ID card function. Specify [ID Card Size] under [Copier
Features].
• After you load the originals, press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key within the time specified
in [System Reset Timer]. Otherwise, the job is canceled. For details, see page 255 "Administrator
Tools Settings".
• Regardless of the machine's reduction or enlargement ratio setting, an ID card copy will always be
made at 100%.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
120
Copying an ID Card
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] while the
initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
121
4. Copying Originals
Specifying Scan Settings for Copying
This section describes how to specify image density and scan quality for the current job.
Adjusting Image Density
There are five image density levels. The higher the density level, the darker the printout.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Text/Photo].
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the desired density level, and then press [OK].
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always make copies with a specific
density level. For details, see page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] while the
initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Selecting the Document Type According to Original
There are three document types:
122
Specifying Scan Settings for Copying
Text/Photo
Select this when the original contains both text and photographs or pictures.
Text
Select this when the original contains only text and no photographs or pictures.
Photo
Select this when the original contains only photographs or pictures. Use this mode for the following
types of original:
• Photographs
• Pages that are entirely or mainly photographs or pictures, such as magazine pages.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Copier] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Text/Photo].
4. Select the desired document type, and then press [OK].
• You can change the machine's default [Original Type] setting to always make copies with a
specific document type. For details, see page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] while the
initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
123
4. Copying Originals
124
5. Scanning Originals
This chapter describes how to specify settings and use the scanner function.
What You Can Do with the Scanner Function
Send Scanned Documents to a Folder on a Client Computer
For details, see "Basic Operation of Scan to Folder".
Documents
Specify a destination
and start scanning
Files are sent directly
to shared folders
Send Scanned Documents by E-mail
For details, see "Basic Operation of Scan to E-mail".
Documents
Specify a e-mail address
and start scanning
Distribute the document as a file
attached to an e-mail
Scanning Documents from RICOH Scan Utility
For details, see "Basic Operation for RICOH Scan Utility".
Specify scan settings and start scanning
Scanned data is displayed on RICOH Scan Utility screen
Scanning Documents from a Client Computer
For details, see "Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning".
Specify scan settings and start scanning
Scanned data is displayed on the computer screen
Saving Scan Files on a USB Flash Memory Device
For details, see "Basic Procedures for Saving Scan Files on a USB Flash Memory Device".
Documents
Specify scan settings
and start scanning
Scanned files are saved in the
USB flash memory device
125
5. Scanning Originals
Scanner Mode Screen
This section provides information about the screen in scanner mode.
Screen in standby mode
1
2
3
4
8
5
7
6
DUE313
1. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
2. Email / Folder / FTP / USB
Press these tabs to switch between the [Email] screen, [Scan to Folder] screen, [Scan to FTP] screen, and
[Scan to USB] screen.
• When [Email] is selected, you can specify e-mail destinations.
• When [Folder] is selected, you can specify folder destinations.
• When [FTP] is selected, you can send scanned documents to an FTP server.
• When [USB] is selected, you can save scanned files to the USB flash memory device inserted into
the machine.
3. Favorite item icon
Press to register current settings to a favorite item.
4. Original Settings
Allows you to specify original settings.
5. Scan Settings
Allows you to specify scan settings.
6. Resend
Press this to specify the last used destination as the destination for the current job.
7. Address Book
Allows you to recall destinations registered in the machine.
126
Scanner Mode Screen
8. E-mail icon
Indicates that the [Email] screen is displayed.
• The machine's default mode at power on can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under
[Administrator Tools] For [Function Priority], see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
127
5. Scanning Originals
Registering Scan Destinations
This section describes how to register scan destinations in the Address Book. To send scanned files to an
e-mail address (Scan to E-mail), FTP server (Scan to FTP), or a shared folder on a network computer
(Scan to Folder), you must first register the destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor.
• The Address Book data could be damaged or lost unexpectedly. The manufacturer shall not be
responsible for any damages resulting from such data loss. Be sure to create backup files of the
Address Book data periodically.
• Depending on your network environment, the Scan to FTP and Scan to Folder functions may
require a user name and password to be correctly entered in the destination information. In such
cases, after registering destinations, check that the user name and password are correctly entered
by sending test documents to those destinations.
The Address Book can contain up to 100 entries, including 20 Quick Dial entries.
Destinations registered as Quick Dial entries can be selected by pressing the corresponding button in the
Address Book.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Scan Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [E-mail Address], [FTP], or [Folder].
4. Register information as necessary.
The information you must register varies depending on the destination type. For details, see the
tables below.
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [Apply].
7. Close the web browser.
128
Registering Scan Destinations
Scan to E-mail Settings
Item
Setting
Description
Quick Dial Number
Optional
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial
entry.
Name
Required
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Destination E-mail Address
Required
E-mail address of the destination. Can contain up to
64 characters.
Notification E-mail Address
Optional
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Subject
Required
Subject of the e-mail. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Sender's Name
Optional
Name of e-mail sender. The name specified here will
be shown under "From" or a similar field of the
recipient's email application. Can contain up to 32
characters.
File Format (Color/Gray
Scale)
Required
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.
File Format (Black & White)
Required
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats
support multiple pages in a document.
129
5. Scanning Originals
Item
Original
Setting
Optional
Scan Size
Optional
Description
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to
scan according to the page and binding orientation.
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,
A4, 71/4 × 101/2, 81/2 × 51/2, 81/2 × 11, 81/2 ×
14, or custom size.
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and
then specify the width and length.
Resolution
Optional
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.
Density
Optional
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left
button.
is the lightest, and
is
the darkest.
Scan to FTP Settings
Item
130
Setting
Description
Quick Dial Number
Optional
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial
entry.
Name
Required
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Hostname or IP Address
Required
Name or IP address of the FTP server. Can contain up
to 64 characters.
Registering Scan Destinations
Item
Setting
Description
Required
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.
File Format (Black & White)
Required
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats
support multiple pages in a document.
FTP User Name
Optional
User name for logging in to the FTP server. Can
contain up to 32 characters.
FTP Password
Optional
Password for logging in to the FTP server. Can contain
up to 32 characters.
Directory
Optional
Name of the FTP server directory where scanned files
are stored. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Notification E-mail Address
Optional
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Original
Optional
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to
scan according to the page and binding orientation.
File Format (Color/Gray
Scale)
Scan Size
Optional
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,
A4, 71/4 × 101/2, 81/2 × 51/2, 81/2 × 11, 81/2 ×
14, or custom size.
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and
then specify the width and length.
Resolution
Optional
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.
Density
Optional
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left
button.
is the lightest, and
is
the darkest.
Connection Test
-
A connection test is performed to check whether the
specified FTP server exists.
131
5. Scanning Originals
Scan to Folder Settings
Item
132
Setting
Description
Quick Dial Number
Optional
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial
entry.
Name
Required
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Service Name
Required
Path to the directory where scanned files will be stored.
Consists of the IP address or name of the destination
computer (can contain up to 64 characters), and name
of the shared folder (can contain up to 32 characters).
Domain
Optional
Specify the name of the domain to which the computer
belongs. Can contain up to 15 characters.
Login User Name
Optional
User name for logging in to the destination computer.
Can contain up to 32 characters.
Login Password
Optional
Password for logging in to the destination computer.
Can contain up to 32 characters.
Directory
Optional
Directory within the shared folder for storing scanned
files. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Notification E-mail Address
Optional
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Registering Scan Destinations
Item
Setting
Description
Required
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.
File Format (Black & White)
Required
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats
support multiple pages in a document.
Original
Optional
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to
scan according to the page and binding orientation.
File Format (Color/Gray
Scale)
Scan Size
Optional
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,
A4, 71/4 × 101/2, 81/2 × 51/2, 81/2 × 11, 81/2 ×
14, or custom size.
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and
then specify the width and length.
Resolution
Optional
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.
Density
Optional
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left
button.
is the lightest, and
is
the darkest.
Connection Test
-
A connection test is performed to check whether the
specified FTP server exists.
• To send files via e-mail, SMTP and DNS settings must be configured properly.
• If you are using the Scan to E-mail function, select a time zone according to your geographic
location to send email with correct transmission date and time.
• To send files to an FTP server or computer, the user name, password, and directory must be
configured properly.
• On a network that uses a DNS server, specify a computer name in [Service Name] and the name
of the domain to which the computer belongs in [Domain]. In this case, also configure the DNS
related settings using Web Image Monitor.
• The Scan to Folder destination must operate on one of the following operating systems: Windows
Vista/7/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016, or OS X 10.9 or
later.
• Scan destinations cannot be registered using the control panel.
133
5. Scanning Originals
Modifying Scan Destinations
This section describes how to modify the information of registered destinations.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Scan Destination].
3. Click the [E-mail Address], [FTP], or [Folder] tab.
4. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].
5. Modify settings as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the web browser.
• You can unassign a Quick Dial entry from the [Quick Dial Destination] page. To do this, select the
desired entry, click [Delete], and then click [Apply] again on a confirmation page.
• The machine will notify you if the destination you want to modify is set as a forwarding destination
of received faxes. For details about fax forwarding settings, see page 282 "Fax Tab".
Deleting Scan Destinations
This section describes how to delete registered destinations.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Scan Destination].
3. Click the [E-mail Address], [FTP], or [Folder] tab.
4. Select the entry to delete, and then click [Delete].
5. Confirm that the entry you have selected is the entry that you want to delete.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the web browser.
• The machine will notify you if the destination you want to delete is set as a forwarding destination of
received faxes. If you delete the destination anyway, reconfigure the fax forwarding setting. For
details about fax forwarding settings, see page 282 "Fax Tab".
134
Registering Scan Destinations
Testing Transmission
• When a USB flash memory device is inserted into the machine, scanned documents will be stored
in the USB flash memory device. Confirm that there are no USB flash memory devices inserted into
the machine.
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
2. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
3. Press the [Scanner] icon on the Home screen.
4. Press [Address Book].
5. Select the desired destination, and then press [OK].
When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according
to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary, you can change
the scan settings using the control panel. For scan settings, see page 170 "Specifying Scan
Settings for Scanning".
6. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.
DUE312
To scan in black and white, press the [B&W Start] key.
To scan in color, press the [Color Start] key.
135
5. Scanning Originals
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
7. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass, and
then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
8. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
Scanning starts and scanned documents will be stored in a shared folder.
• If the machine fails to transmit the file, confirm the following items.
• The destination is registered to the Address Book correctly.
• Disable the security software or firewall of the destination computer and try the job again. For
details about security software of the firewall settings, contact your network administrator.
• If there are several destination computers, test the job with other computers. Compare the
settings with the computer the file was transmitted from. For details, contact your network
administrator.
• There is enough disk space on the destination computer.
136
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
This section explains the preparations and procedures to send scanned documents to a folder on a client
computer.
After following the procedures below, you can send scanned documents from the machine to a shared
folder on a client computer.
Print the check sheet.
Confirm the user name and computer name.
Create a shared folder on a computer.
Specify access privileges for the created shared
folder. *1
Register the shared folder to the machine's
Address Book.
Send a file to the shared folder.
*1 only Windows
• You can create the shared folder under Windows Vista or later, Windows Server 2008 or later,
and OS X 10.9 or later.
• Files can be sent via SMB using the SMB (139/TCP, 137/UDP) or CIFS (445/TCP) protocol.
• Files can be sent via SMB (139/TCP, 137/UDP) in a NetBIOS over TCP/IP environment only.
• Files cannot be sent via SMB in a NetBEUI environment.
Printing the Check Sheet
Print out the following check sheet. Write on the check sheet the settings for the computer to which you
will send documents.
For details about how to use the check sheet to make a list of the setting values, see page 138 "
Confirming the User Name and Computer Name" and page 140 " Creating a Shared Folder on a
Computer".
137
5. Scanning Originals
• After registering scan destinations to the Address Book, discard the completed check sheet to
prevent leakage of personal information.
Check Sheet
No.
Check Item (Entry Example)
Entry Column
Computer name
(ex. YamadaPC)
[1]
Active settings of DHCP server
([Yes] or [No])
Computer's IP address
(ex. 192.168.0.152)
[2]
Domain Name/Working
Group Name
(ex. ABCD-NET)
USERDNSDOMAIN
USERDOMAIN
Computer's user name
(ex. TYamada)
[3]
Computer's login password
(ex. Administrator)
[4]
Computer's shared folder name
(ex. scan)
• Depending on the network environment, USERDNSDOMAIN or USERDOMAIN may not be
displayed. Write the domain name or working group name in the check sheet.
Confirming the User Name and Computer Name
Confirming the User Name and Computer Name When Running Microsoft Windows
Confirm the user name and the name of the computer you will send scanned documents to.
138
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], click [Accessories], and then click
[Command Prompt].
2. Enter the command "ipconfig /all", and then press the [Enter] key.
3. Confirm the name of the computer, the active settings of the DHCP server, and the IPv4
address, and then write them in [1] on the check sheet.
The computer's name is displayed under [Host Name].
The address displayed under [IPv4 Address] is the IPv4 address of the computer.
Active settings of DHCP server are displayed under [DHCP Enabled].
4. Next, enter the command "set user", and then press the [Enter] key.
Be sure to put a space between "set" and "user".
5. Confirm the domain name/working group name and the user name, and then write them
in [2] on the check sheet.
The user name is displayed under [USERNAME].
Confirm the computer's login password and write it in [3] on the check sheet.
Next, create a shared folder on a computer. For details about creating a shared folder, see page 140
" Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer".
• Depending on the operating system or security settings, it might be possible to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that for greater security you
select a user name that has a password.
Confirming the User Name and Computer Name When Running OS X
Confirm the user name and the name of the computer you will send scanned documents to. Confirm the
values, and then write them on the check sheet.
1. On the Apple menu, click [About This Mac].
The computer's information screen appears.
2. Click [System Report...].
3. In the left pane, click [Software], and then confirm the computer name and user name
under "System Software Overview:".
The computer name is displayed next to [Computer Name].
The user name is displayed next to [User Name].
On the check sheet, write the computer name in [1] and the user name in [2].
Next, create a shared folder on a computer. For details about creating a shared folder, see page 140
" Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer".
139
5. Scanning Originals
• Depending on the operating system or security settings, you might be able to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that you select a user name
that has a password.
• To confirm the IP address on the Apple menu, click [System Preferences...], and then click
[Network] on the System Preferences window. Then click [Ethernet]. The address displayed in the IP
address field is the IP address of the computer.
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer Running Microsoft Windows
Create a shared destination folder in Windows and enable sharing. In the following procedure, a
computer which is running under Windows 7 Ultimate and participating in a domain is used as an
example.
• You must log in as an Administrators group member to create a shared folder.
• If "Everyone" is left selected in Step 6, the created shared folder will be accessible by all users. This
is a security risk, so we recommend that you give access rights only to specific users. Use the
following procedure to remove "Everyone" and specify user access rights.
1. Create a folder, just as you would create a normal folder, in a location of your choice on
the computer. Write the folder name in [4] on the check sheet.
2. Right-click the folder, and then click [Properties].
3. On the [Sharing] tab, select [Advanced Sharing...].
4. Select the [Share this folder] check box.
5. Click [Permissions].
6. In the [Group or user names:] list, select "Everyone", and then click [Remove].
7. Click [Add...].
In the [Select Users of Groups] window, add groups or users to whom you want to grant access. In
the following procedure, the procedure to give access privileges to users that you wrote on the
check sheet is used as an example.
8. In the [Select Users of Groups] window, click [Advanced...].
9. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
10. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to (the name
you wrote in [2] on the check sheet), and then click [OK].
11. In the [Select Users of Groups] window, click [OK].
140
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
12. In the [Group or user names:] list, select a group or user (the name you wrote in [2] on
the check sheet), and then, in the [Allow] column of the permissions list, select either the
[Full Control] or [Change] check box.
Configure the access permissions for each group and user.
13. Click [OK] 2 times.
14. Click [Close].
If you want to specify access privileges for the created folder to allow other users or groups to access it,
proceed to page 142 " Specifying Access Privileges for the Created Shared Folder".
If not, proceed to page 142 "
Registering a Shared Folder in the Machine's Address Book".
Creating a Shared Folder on a Computer Running OS X
The following procedures explain how to create a shared folder on a computer running OS X, and how
to confirm the computer's information. OS X 10.11 is used in these examples.
• You must log in as an administrator to create a shared folder.
1. Create the folder that you want to send scan files to.
Write the folder name into [4] in the check sheet.
2. On the Apple menu, click [System Preferences...].
3. Click [Sharing].
4. Select the [File Sharing] check box.
5. Click [Options...].
6. Select the [Share files and folders using SMB] check box.
7. Select the account that will be used to access the shared folder.
8. If the [Authenticate] screen appears, enter the password for the account, click [OK], and
then click [Done].
9. Under the [Shared Folders:] list, click [ ].
10. Select the folder you have created, and then click [Add].
11. Make sure that the permissions for the user who will access this folder are set to [Read
&Write].
Next, register scan destinations. For details about registering scan destinations, see page 142 "
Registering a Shared Folder in the Machine's Address Book".
141
5. Scanning Originals
Specifying Access Privileges for the Created Shared Folder
If you want to specify access privileges for the created folder to allow other users or groups to access
the folder, configure the folder as follows:
1. Right-click the folder created in Step 3, and then click [Properties].
2. On the [Security] tab, click [Edit...].
3. Click [Add...].
4. In the [Select Users of Groups] window, click [Advanced...].
5. Specify one or more object types, select a location, and then click [Find Now].
6. From the list of results, select the groups and users you want to grant access to, and then
click [OK].
7. In the [Select Users of Groups] window, click [OK].
8. In the [Groups or user names:] list, select a group or user, and then, in the [Allow] column
of the permissions list, select either the [Full control] or [Modify] check box.
9. Click [OK] twice.
Next, register scan destinations. For details about registering scan destinations, see page 142 "
Registering a Shared Folder in the Machine's Address Book".
• If you are creating a shared folder for the first time on this computer, you must enable the file
sharing function. For details, see Windows Help.
Registering a Shared Folder in the Machine's Address Book
Register scan destinations using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Scan Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [Folder].
4. Register information as necessary.
The information you must register are the following items. For details, see page 128 "Registering
Scan Destinations".
• Name
• Service Name
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [Apply].
7. Close the web browser.
142
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
Preparations for Scan to Folder are complete.
For details about sending scanned files to the destination you registered to the Address Book, see
page 143 " Send Scanned Files to a Shared Folder".
• If the machine fails to transfer the file, confirm the following items.
• Destination is registered to the Address Book correctly.
• Set the security software or firewall of the destination computer to off and try the job again.
For details about security software of the firewall settings, contact your network administrator.
• If there is more than one destination computer, test the job with other computers. Compare the
settings with the computer which succeeded to transfer the file. For details, contact your
network administrator.
• When there is not enough disk space on the destination computer, the machine may fail to
transfer the file.
Send Scanned Files to a Shared Folder
Send scanned files to the shared folder registered in Step 5.
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
• Register the scan destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor. For details, see
page 128 "Registering Scan Destinations".
• When a USB flash memory device is inserted into the machine, scanned documents will be stored
in the USB flash memory device. Confirm that there are no USB flash memory devices inserted into
the machine.
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 77 "Placing Originals".
143
5. Scanning Originals
2. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
3. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press the [Folder] tab.
5. Press [Address Book].
6. Select the desired destination, and then press [OK].
7. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.
DUE312
To scan in black and white, press the [B&W Start] key.
To scan in color, press the [Color Start] key.
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
144
Basic Operation of Scan to Folder
8. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass, and
then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
9. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files are discarded.
• You can also specify a destination using [Resend]. For details, see page 153 "Specifying the Scan
Destination Using [Resend]".
145
5. Scanning Originals
Basic Operation of Scan to E-mail
This section explains the preparations and procedures to send scanned documents as a file attached to
an e-mail.
After following the procedures below, you can send scanned documents to the specified e-mail address.
Configure SMTP server and DNS settings.
Register the destination e-mail address in the Address Book.
Send scanned files by e-mail.
Configuring SMTP and DNS Settings
To send files via e-mail, SMTP and DNS settings must be configured properly.
For details about SMTP server information, contact the network administrator of your Internet service
provider.
Configure SMTP and DNS information using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Network Settings].
3. Click the [DNS] tab.
4. Register information as necessary.
For details, see page 295 "Configuring the Network Settings".
5. Click [OK].
6. Click the [SMTP] tab.
7. Register information as necessary.
For details, see page 295 "Configuring the Network Settings".
8. Click [OK].
9. Close the web browser.
Next, register the destination e-mail address to the Address Book. For details, see page 147 "
Registering Destination E-mail Addresses to the Address Book".
146
Basic Operation of Scan to E-mail
Registering Destination E-mail Addresses to the Address Book
Configure the destination information using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Scan Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [E-mail Address].
4. Register information as necessary.
The information you must register are the following items. For details, see page 128 "Registering
Scan Destinations".
• Name
• Destination E-mail Address
• Subject
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [Apply].
7. Close the web browser.
Preparations for Scan to E-mail are complete.
For details about sending files to the registered destinations, see page 147 " Sending Scanned Files
by E-mail".
Sending Scanned Files by E-mail
This section explains how to send scanned files to the destinations registered in Step 2.
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
• Register the scan destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor. For details, see
page 128 "Registering Scan Destinations".
• When a USB flash memory device is inserted into the machine, scanned documents will be stored
in the USB flash memory device. Confirm that there are no USB flash memory devices inserted into
the machine.
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 77 "Placing Originals".
147
5. Scanning Originals
2. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
3. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press the [Email] tab.
5. Press [Address Book].
6. Select the desired destination, and then press [OK].
7. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.
DUE312
To scan in black and white, press the [B&W Start] key.
To scan in color, press the [Color Start] key.
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
148
Basic Operation of Scan to E-mail
8. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass, and
then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
9. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files are discarded.
• You can also specify a destination using [Resend]. For details, see page 153 "Specifying the Scan
Destination Using [Resend]".
149
5. Scanning Originals
Basic Operation of Scan to FTP
This section explains the preparations and instructions to send scanned documents to an FTP server.
After following the procedures below, you can send scanned documents to an FTP server.
Configure FTP server settings.
Send scanned files to the FTP server.
Configuring FTP Server Settings
To send files to an FTP server, configure FTP server settings properly. For details about FTP servers,
contact your network administrator.
Configure FTP server settings using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Scan Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [FTP].
4. Register information as necessary.
The information you must register are the following items. For details, see page 128 "Registering
Scan Destinations".
• Name
• Hostname or IP Address
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [Apply].
7. Close the web browser.
Preparations for Scan to FTP are complete.
For details about sending files to the registered destinations, see page 150 " Sending Scanned Files
to an FTP Server".
Sending Scanned Files to an FTP Server
This section explains how to send scanned files to the destinations registered in Step 1.
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
150
Basic Operation of Scan to FTP
• Register the scan destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor. For details, see
page 128 "Registering Scan Destinations".
• When a USB flash memory device is inserted into the machine, scanned documents will be stored
in the USB flash memory device. Confirm that there are no USB flash memory devices inserted into
the machine.
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 77 "Placing Originals".
2. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
3. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press the [FTP] tab.
5. Press [Address Book].
6. Select the desired destination, and then press [OK].
7. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.
DUE312
To scan in black and white, press the [B&W Start] key.
To scan in color, press the [Color Start] key.
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
151
5. Scanning Originals
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
8. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass, and
then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
9. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files are discarded.
• You can also specify a destination using [Resend]. For details, see page 153 "Specifying the Scan
Destination Using [Resend]".
152
Specifying the Scan Destination Using [Resend]
Specifying the Scan Destination Using [Resend]
This section describes how to specify a destination using [Resend].
Using [Resend]
Press [Resend] to select the last used destination.
• When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according
to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary, you can change
the scan settings using the control panel. For details, see page 170 "Specifying Scan Settings for
Scanning".
• [Resend] is not effective for the first scan job after the machine is turned on.
• You can press the [Clear/Stop] key to clear the destination.
153
5. Scanning Originals
Basic Procedures for Saving Scan Files on a
USB Flash Memory Device
This section explains basic operations of Scan to USB. Files are saved to the USB flash memory device
inserted into the machine.
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
• This machine does not support the use of external USB hubs.
• Not all types of USB flash memory devices are supported.
• When using Scan to USB, set [Save Scn Data to USB] to [Active]. For details, see page 255
"Administrator Tools Settings".
1. Insert the USB flash memory device into the USB port.
2
1
DUE242
2. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
3. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press the [USB] tab.
154
Basic Procedures for Saving Scan Files on a USB Flash Memory Device
5. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the original, see page 77 "Placing Originals".
Specify the scanning settings as necessary. For details of specifying the scanning settings, see
page 170 "Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning".
6. Press the [B&W Start] key or [Color Start] key.
DUE312
To scan in black and white, press the [B&W Start] key.
To scan in color, press the [Color Start] key.
Depending on the machine's setting, you will see the following screen on the display.
• When in halftone black-and-white scanning mode:
• When in color or gray scale black-and-white scanning mode:
155
5. Scanning Originals
7. Press the appropriate selection key according to the desired file format, and then press
[OK].
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
8. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass, and
then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
9. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
10. Wait until "Completed the Process" is displayed on the screen.
Scanned files are saved in the root directory of the USB flash memory device.
11. Remove the USB flash memory device from the machine.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files are discarded.
• You can configure the machine to perform black-and-white scanning in halftone or grayscale by
changing [B&W Scanning Mode] setting under [Scanner Features]. For details about [B&W
Scanning Mode], see page 226 "Scanner Features Settings".
• If the [Limitless Scan] setting under [Scanner Features] is enabled, you can place originals on the
exposure glass repeatedly in a single scan procedure. For details about [Limitless Scan], see
page 226 "Scanner Features Settings".
• If the [Single/ Multi Page] setting under scanner settings is set to [Multi-page], you can scan
multiple pages to create a single PDF or TIFF file containing all pages. However, if the file format is
JPEG, a single-page file will be created for every page scanned. For details about [Single/ Multi
Page], see page 226 "Scanner Features Settings".
• If paper is jammed in the ADF, the scan job will be put on hold. To resume the current job, remove
the jammed paper and scan the originals again starting from the jammed page. For details about
how to remove the paper jammed in the ADF, see page 359 "Removing Scanning Jams".
156
Basic Operation for RICOH Scan Utility
Basic Operation for RICOH Scan Utility
DUE297
1. Your Computer (RICOH Scan Utility already installed)
Instruct the machine to start scanning the original that is set on the machine.
2. This Machine
The original that is set on the machine is scanned, and its data is sent to a client computer.
Preparations for Using RICOH Scan Utility
This section describes the preparations needed for scanning from RICOH Scan Utility.
To use RICOH Scan Utility:
• Make sure that the machine connects to the network environment
• Configure the network settings under [Network Settings]
• Install RICOH Scan Utility.
To use the USB port, install the TWAIN driver and WIA driver first, which are on the supplied CD-ROM.
Using Ricoh Scan Utility to Scan to a Computer
1. Place originals.
2. On the [Start] menu, click [All Programs].
3. Click [SP 260 Series Software Utilities].
4. Click [RICOH Scan Utility for SP 260 Series].
RICOH Scan Utility starts.
5. Click [Select Machine], and then select the scanner you want to use.
Select the scanner by specifying the IP address or pressing [Search Network Scanner], and then
select from the list displayed.
157
5. Scanning Originals
6. On the [General] tab, specify settings according to the types of originals and scanning,
and the orientation of the original.
7. On the [Options] tab, specify the file format and the directory to save the file.
8. Click [Scan].
9. After all originals are scanned, click [Exit].
Settings you can configure in the RICOH Scan Utility dialog box
[General] tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DUE340
1. Scanner:
Select the scanner you want to use.
2. Original:
Select [Exposure Glass] to scan from the exposure glass, or [Automatic Document Feeder ]to scan from
the ADF.
3. Original type
According to your original, select a setting from the list of options detailed below, or select [Custom...] to
configure your own scan settings. [Scn. Mode:], [Resolution:], and [Size:] under [Scan Configuration]
will change according to the original type setting you selected here.
• When using the exposure glass:
[Editing Text (OCR)]
[Faxing, Filing, or Copying]
158
Basic Operation for RICOH Scan Utility
[Black and White Photo]
[Color Document-Faster]
[Color Document-Better Quality]
[Custom...]
• When using the ADF:
[ADF-Faster]
[ADF-Better]
[ADF-Gray]
[Custom...]
4. Scn. Mode:
Select from color, grayscale, or black-and-white.
5. Resolution:
Select a resolution from the list.
100, 200, 300, 600 dpi
6. Size:
Select the scanning size. If you select [User defined], enter the scanning size directly in the edit box.
Also, you can change the scanning size with your mouse in the preview area. You can select the unit of
measure from [cm], [inches], or [pixels].
7. Duplex
Select the check box when scanning both sides of the original, and then specify the orientation.
This function is available when you set the original in the ADF for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
159
5. Scanning Originals
[Options] tab
1
2
3
DUE342
1. Scan To:
Specify the directory to save the file.
2. File Name Prefix:
Specify the file name prefix. Numbers are consecutively assigned after the prefix.
For example, if [File Name Prefix:] is “Scan”, file names will be “Scan001”, “Scan002”, and so on.
3. Format:
Select the file format of the scanned document from JPEG, TIFF, or PDF.
Using RICOH SP C260 series Scan to Scan from a Smart Device
RICOH SP C260 series Scan is an application that allows you to use the Ricoh Scan Utility function from
a smart device such as a smartphone or tablet.
By using the RICOH SP C260 series Scan application, you can specify scan settings and start scanning
from your smart device. Also, you can send data scanned on the machine to your smart device.
The RICOH SP C260 series Scan application can connect to a machine easily by using a smart device
to read an NFC tag (Android smart devices only) or QR code.
160
Basic Operation for RICOH Scan Utility
Settings you can configure in the RICOH SP C260 series Scan dialog box
• Original
Select [Exposure Glass] to scan from the exposure glass.
Select [ADF] (when using SP C260SFNw) or [DADF] (when using SP C261SFNw/SP
C262SFNw) to scan from the ADF.
• Mode
Select from color or grayscale.
• Resolution
Select a resolution from the list.
200, 300, 600 dpi
• Size
Select the scanning size.
A4, Letter, A5, A6 (when using the exposure glass), Legal (when using the ADF).
• Duplex
Specify the orientation when scanning both sides of the original.
This function is available when you set the original in the ADF for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
• File Format
Select the file format of the scanned document from JPEG, TIFF, or PDF.
• Scanned files are saved to the following places:
• Android smart device: internal storage of the device
• iOS smart device:
• JPEG/TIFF: [Photo] folder
• PDF: You need to select the application to open the file.
• For details about how to connect a smart device to the machine using NFC, see page 46
"Connecting a Smart Device to the Machine Using NFC".
161
5. Scanning Originals
Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning
This section describes the basic TWAIN scanning operation.
TWAIN scanning is possible if a TWAIN-compatible application is running on your computer.
DUE297
1. Your Computer (TWAIN driver already installed)
Instruct the machine to start scanning the original that is set on the machine.
2. This Machine
The original that is set on the machine is scanned, and its data is sent to a client computer.
Using TWAIN scanner
This section describes the preparations for using the TWAIN scanner.
• To use the TWAIN scanner, you must install the TWAIN driver, which is on the supplied CD-ROM.
• To use the TWAIN scanner, a TWAIN-compliant application must be installed.
To use the machine as a TWAIN scanner, first do the following:
• Install the TWAIN driver.
• Install a TWAIN-compliant application.
TWAIN scanning
TWAIN scanning is possible if your computer is running a TWAIN-compatible application.
The following is a general scan procedure with the TWAIN driver, so the actual operation may differ
depending on the applications you use. For details, see the application's Help.
1. Start a TWAIN-compliant application.
2. Place originals.
162
Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning
3. Open the Scanner Control dialog box.
The Scanner Control dialog box is used to control the scanner using the TWAIN driver. To open the
Scanner Control dialog box, select the correct TWAIN scanner using the TWAIN-compliant
application. For details, see the application's Help.
4. Make settings according to such factors as the type of original, type of scanning, and
orientation of the original.
For details, see the TWAIN driver Help.
5. In the Scanner Control dialog box, click [Scan].
Depending on the security setting, if you press [Scan], a dialog box for entering the user name and
password may appear.
If there are more originals to be scanned, place the next original, and then click [Continue].
If there are no more originals to be scanned, click [Complete].
Settings you can configure in the TWAIN dialog box
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DUE341
1. Scanner:
Select the scanner you want to use. The scanner you select becomes the default scanner. Click [Refresh] to
discover all available scanners connected via USB or the network.
2. Original:
Select [Reflective] to scan from the exposure glass, or [Automatic Document Feeder] to scan from the ADF.
163
5. Scanning Originals
3. Original type
According to your original, select a setting from the list of options detailed below, or select [Custom...] to
configure your own scan settings. [Mode], [Resolution], and [Size] under [Scan Configuration] will change
according to the original type setting you selected here.
• When using the exposure glass:
[Editing Text(OCR)]
[Faxing, Filing, or Copying]
[Black and White Photo]
[Color Document-Fast]
[Color Document-Better Quality]
[Custom...]
• When using the ADF:
[ADF-Faster]
[ADF-Better]
[ADF - Gray]
[Custom...]
4. Mode:
Select from color, grayscale, or black-and-white.
5. Resolution:
Select a resolution from the list. If you select [User defined], enter a resolution value directly in the edit box.
Note that increasing the resolution also increases the file size and scanning time.
Selectable resolutions vary depending on where the original is set.
• When using the exposure glass:
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 dpi, User defined
• When using the ADF:
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600 dpi, User defined
6. Size:
Select the scanning size. If you select [User defined], enter the scanning size directly in the edit box. Also, you
can change the scanning size with your mouse in the preview area. You can select the unit of measure from
[cm], [inches], or [pixels]. Selectable resolutions vary depending on where the original is set. For details, see
the TWAIN Help.
7. Scan task: (when using the exposure glass)
Displays up to 10 previously used scan areas. To remove a scan task, select the number of the task, and then
click [Remove]. You can select [AutoCrop] to let the scanner automatically detect the size of your original.
• If the scan data is larger than the memory capacity, an error message appears and scanning is
canceled. If this happens, specify a lower resolution and scan the original again.
164
Basic Operation for WIA Scanning
Basic Operation for WIA Scanning
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
2. On the [Start] menu on your computer, click [Devices and Printers].
3. Right-click the icon of the printer model you want to use, and then click [Start scan] to
open the dialog box for the scan settings.
4. In the dialog box, configure the scan settings as required, and then click [Scan].
5. Click [Import].
165
5. Scanning Originals
Basic Operation for ICA Scanning
This section describes the basic ICA scanning operation.
You can use the ICA scanner over both USB and network connections.
Installing the ICA Driver
1. Download the driver from the web site.
2. Open the package file.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Using ICA Scanner
This section describes the preparations and procedure for using the ICA scanner.
To use the network connection, configure the network setting.
Install an ICA-compliant application.
ICA Scanning
Setting procedures using OS X 10.11 are shown as an example. The actual procedure may differ
depending on the OS X version you are using.
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
2. Start System Preferences.
3. Click [Printers & Scanners].
4. Select the scanner you want to use from the list.
5. Select [Open Scanner] in the [Scan] button.
166
Basic Operation for ICA Scanning
Settings you can configure in the ICA dialog box
1 2
3
45
7
11
12
13
6
8
9
10
DQT003
1. Scan Mode:
Select where the original is placed.
• Flatbed
If the original is placed on the exposure glass, select [Flatbed].
• Document Feeder
If the original is placed in the ADF, select [Document Feeder].
2. Kind:
Set the type of original to [Text], [Black & White], or [Color].
[Text] is suitable for scanning originals containing mainly text.
3. Resolution:
Select a resolution from the list.
Note that increasing the resolution also increases the file size and scanning time.
Selectable resolutions vary depending on where the original is set.
• When using the exposure glass:
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 dpi
• When using the ADF:
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600 dpi
4. Size:
Specify the original paper size.
If [Use Custom Size] is selected, you can specify the width and height of the original to be scanned in [Size].
You can specify these dimensions in pixels, inches, or centimeters.
If [Use Custom Size] is not selected, select the original size and orientation.
5. Rotation Angle:
You can specify how many degrees to rotate the scan image clockwise.
167
5. Scanning Originals
6. Auto Selection:
• Detect Separate Items
You can scan multiple originals together and store each scan image as a separate file.
• Detect Enclosing Box
You can scan multiple originals placed on the exposure glass and store their scan images as a single file.
7. Scan to:
Select where to store the scan data.
8. Name:
Name the scan data.
9. Format:
Select the format of the scan data.
• TIFF
• PNG
• PDF
• JPEG
• JPEG 2000
• BMP
10. Image Correction:
By selecting [Manual], [Threshold] appears and you can adjust settings such as brightness and contrast.
11. Hide Details
Click to hide the settings.
12. Overview
Click to preview the scan image.
13. Scan
Click to start scanning.
• If the scan data is larger than the memory capacity, an error message appears and scanning is
canceled. If this happens, specify a lower resolution and scan the original again.
168
Using SANE scanning
Using SANE scanning
This driver allows you to scan images and edit them using SANE compatible software.
169
5. Scanning Originals
Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning
When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according to the
information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary, you can change the scan
settings for the current job using the control panel.
• The machine maintains the preset scan settings for the current destination until the machine returns
to standby mode.
• Changing the preset scan settings for the current destination does not change the information
registered in the Address Book.
• If you specify the last used destination, the preset scan settings become effective again, even if you
have changed the settings for the previous job.
Specifying the Scanning Size According to the Size of the Original
This section describes how to specify the scanning size according to the size of the current original.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Select the desired destination tab.
4. Press [Address Book].
5. Select the desired destination, and then press [OK].
6. Press [Scan Setting].
7. Press [Scan Size...].
8. Select the size of the original, and then press [OK].
If you selected anything other than [Custom Size], you do not need to perform the remaining steps
of the procedure.
9. Select [mm] or [inch].
170
Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning
10. Press [Set Width...].
11. Enter the width, and then press [OK].
12. Press [Set Length...].
13. Enter the length, and then press [OK].
14. Confirm the scan size you entered is displayed, and then press [OK].
• You can change the machine's default [Scan Size] setting to always scan originals with a specific
scanning size. For details, see page 226 "Scanner Features Settings".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] while the
initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Adjusting Image Density
This section describes how to adjust image density for the current job.
There are five image density levels. The higher the density level, the darker the scanned image.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Select the desired destination tab.
4. Press [Address Book].
5. Select the desired destination, and then press [OK].
6. Press [Scan Setting].
171
5. Scanning Originals
7. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the desired density level, and then press [OK].
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always scan with a specific density level.
For details, see page 226 "Scanner Features Settings".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] while the
initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Specifying Resolution
This section describes how to specify the scan resolution for the current job.
There are six resolution settings. The higher the resolution, the higher the quality but greater the file size.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Scanner] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Select the desired destination tab.
4. Press [Address Book].
5. Select the desired destination, and then press [OK].
6. Press [Scan Setting].
7. Press [Resolution...].
8. Select the desired resolution, and then press [OK].
9. Confirm the resolution you selected is displayed, and then press [OK].
172
Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning
• You can change the machine's default [Resolution] setting to always scan with a specific resolution
level. For details, see page 226 "Scanner Features Settings".
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Reset Timer] while the
initial screen is displayed. For details, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
173
5. Scanning Originals
174
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
This chapter describes how to use the fax function and specify the settings.
What You Can Do with the Fax Function
Forward received faxes to receive them wherever you are
By forwarding received faxes to an e-mail address or a folder, you can receive them anytime,
anywhere you are.
For details, see page 212 "Forwarding or Storing Faxes in Memory".
DUE299
Send faxes by data to save paper
By using a LAN-Fax Driver, you can send documents from your computer without printing them.
For details, see page 200 "Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)".
DUE300
Send faxes via the Internet
The machine converts scanned documents to TIFF files and sends them as e-mail attachments to email addresses.
This function is available for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw only.
For details, see page 187 "Internet Fax Transmission".
175
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Fax Setting Workflows
This section explains the preparations and procedures to send fax documents to a folder on a client
computer.
After following the procedures below, you can send fax documents from the machine to a shared folder
on a client computer.
Connect the machine to a telephone line.
Set the date and time.
Specify the telephone line type.
Select either an external line or extension line.
Specify the number of the external line. *1
Specify the reception mode.
*1 Specify when using an extension line or a PBX.
Procedure
Reference
See Setup Guide.
For details about selecting reception modes, see page 206 "Selecting
Reception Mode".
176
Fax Mode Screen
Fax Mode Screen
This section provides information about the screen in fax mode.
Screen in standby mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
13
8
9
11
12
10
DUE314
1. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
2. Fax and Internet Fax
Press a tab to switch the transmission type between the [Fax] (
When the [Fax] (
) screen and [Internet Fax] (
) screen.
) tab is selected, you can specify fax destinations.
When the [Internet Fax] (
) tab is selected, you can specify Internet Fax destinations.
3. [On Hook]
Allows you to dial while listening to the tone from the internal speaker. You can send a fax checking the
connection.
4. [Immed. TX]
Press to select Immediate Transmission mode. For details, see page 186 "Selecting Transmission Mode".
5. Favorite item icon
Press to register current settings to a favorite item.
6. [TX File]
Press to display the list of transmission files in memory.
7. [Rx File]
Press to display the list of received files in memory.
8. Current settings
Displays the current duplex, resolution, and density settings.
177
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
9. [TX Settings]
Press to specify scan settings.
10. [Redial]
Press to select destinations from recent destinations.
While entering a destination, press this key to insert a pause.
11. [Manual Entry]
Press to specify destinations manually.
12. [Address Book]
Press to select destinations registered in the machine.
13. Entered number
Displays the entered number of a destination.
• The machine's default mode at power on can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under
[Administrator Tools]. For [Function Priority], see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• The display format for time and date can be specified in [Set Date/Time] under [Administrator
Tools]. For setting the date and time, see page 179 "Setting the Date and Time".
• If the Alert indicator flashes on the initial fax display, press the [Home] key, press the [Status] icon,
and check the displayed message.
178
Setting the Date and Time
Setting the Date and Time
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
5. Press [Set Date/Time].
6. Press [Set Date].
7. Press the box.
8. Enter the current date, and then press [OK].
9. Confirm the date you entered is displayed, and then press [OK].
10. Press [Set Time].
11. Press the box.
12. Enter the current time, and then press [OK].
13. Confirm the time you entered is displayed, and then press [OK].
14. Press the [Home] key.
• A password for accessing the [Administrator Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
For [Admin. Tools Lock], see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
179
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Registering Fax Destinations
This section describes how to register fax destinations in the Address Book using the control panel. For
entering characters, see page 42 "Entering Characters".
The Address Book can also be edited using Web Image Monitor.
• The Address Book data could be damaged or lost unexpectedly. The manufacturer shall not be
responsible for any damages resulting from such data loss. Be sure to create backup files of the
Address Book data periodically. For details about creating backup files, see page 310
"Configuring the Administrator Settings".
The Address Book can contain up to 220 entries (20 Quick Dial entries and 200 Speed Dial entries).
Registering Fax Destinations Using the Control Panel
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Address Book].
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
5. Select [Quick Dial List] or [Speed Dial List].
6. Select the number of Quick Dial List or Speed Dial List you want to register.
7. Press the box next to [Name:].
8. Enter the fax name, and then press [OK].
9. Press the box next to [Number:].
10. Enter the fax number, and then press [OK].
11. Confirm the setting, and then press [OK].
12. Press the [Home] key.
180
Registering Fax Destinations
• For details about entering characters, see page 42 "Entering Characters".
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, pause, " ", " ", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in the fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
[Transmission Setting]. For [Pause Time], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in the fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• If the machine is connected to the telephone network through a PBX, make sure to enter the outside
line access number specified in [PBX Access Number] before the fax number. For [PBX Access
Number], see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• Use Web Image Monitor to register an Internet Fax destination (an e-mail address). For details
about registering an Internet Fax destination, see page 180 "Registering Fax Destinations".
• A password for accessing the [Address Book] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]. For
[Admin. Tools Lock], see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
Modifying or deleting fax destinations
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Address Book].
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
5. Select [Quick Dial List] or [Speed Dial List].
6. Select the number of Quick Dial List or Speed Dial List you want to modify or delete.
7. Press the box next to [Name:].
181
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
8. Enter the fax name, and then press [OK].
If you want to delete the fax name, press [ ] or [C] until the current name is deleted.
9. Press the box next to [Number:].
10. Enter the fax number, and then press [OK].
If you want to delete the fax number, press [ ] or [C] until the current number is deleted.
11. Confirm the setting, and then press [OK].
12. Press the [Home] key.
• For details about entering characters, see page 42 "Entering Characters".
Registering Fax Destinations Using Web Image Monitor
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Fax Speed Dial Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [Fax].
4. Select [Quick Dial Number] or [Speed Dial Number], and then select the registration
number from the list.
5. Register information as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the web browser.
Fax destination settings
Item
Quick Dial Number /
Speed Dial Number
182
Setting
Required
Description
Select the number to which you want to register Quick
Dial or Speed Dial destination.
Registering Fax Destinations
Item
Name
Setting
Optional
Description
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a fax
destination. Can contain up to 20 characters.
Fax number of the destination. Can contain up to 40
characters.
Fax Number
Required
If the machine is connected to the telephone network
through a PBX, make sure to enter the outside line
access number specified in [PBX Access Number]
before the fax number. For [PBX Access Number], see
page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
E-mail address of the destination of the Internet Fax.
E-mail Address
Optional
Can contain up to 64 characters.
This setting appears only for SP C261SFNw/SP
C262SFNw.
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", "-", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in the fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
[Transmission Setting]. For [Pause Time], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
• For details about using Web Image Monitor, see page 269 "Configuring the Machine Using
Utilities".
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in the fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
Modifying fax destinations
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Fax Speed Dial Destination].
If you modify the Speed Dial entry, proceed to Step 4.
3. Click [Fax Quick Dial Destination].
4. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].
If you want to delete the entry, click [Delete].
5. Modify settings as necessary.
To delete the entry, confirm the entry you have selected.
183
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the web browser.
Preventing Transmission to the Wrong Destination
If you want to prevent documents being sent to the wrong destination, you can configure the machine to
prompt users twice for the destination, or to display the entered destination prior to transmission.
Re-entering a fax number to confirm destination
Enter the fax number again to confirm the destination is correct.
Transmission is disabled if the confirmation fax number does not match the first fax number. This function
helps prevent users accidentally sending faxes to the wrong destination.
• This function is available only when an administrator password is specified.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
5. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password, and then press [OK] twice.
6. Press [ ] twice.
7. Press [Fax No. Confirmation].
8. Select [On] or [Off].
9. Press the [Home] key.
184
Registering Fax Destinations
• A password for accessing the [Administrator Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
For [Admin. Tools Lock], see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
185
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Sending a Fax
• It is recommended that you call the receiver and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
Selecting Transmission Mode
The following explains the transmission modes of the fax function and how to select them.
Types of transmission modes
There are two types of transmission:
• Memory transmission
• Immediate transmission
Selecting the transmission mode
Which mode has priority?
Remove the original
quickly from the machine.
Send documents
immediately.
How many fax numbers
does the destination
have?
Memory Transmission
Immediate Transmission
Multiple
Memory Transmission
Single
Immediate Transmission
Description of transmission modes
• Memory transmission
In this mode, the machine scans several originals into memory and sends them all at once. This
is convenient when you are in a hurry and want to remove the document from the machine. In
this mode, you can send a fax to multiple destinations. If the [Auto Redial] under [Transmission
Setting] is enabled, the machine redials the fax destination automatically when the line is busy
or a transmission error occurs. The number of redial attempts is set to two or three in fiveminute intervals, depending on the [Country] setting under [Administrator Tools]. You can
disable [Auto Redial] under [Fax Features]. For details, see page 228 "Fax Features
Settings".
• Immediate transmission
In this mode, the machine scans the original and faxes it simultaneously. This is convenient
when you want to send an original quickly or when you want to check the destination you are
186
Sending a Fax
sending to. The original is not stored in memory. You can only specify one destination. If fax is
not received normally, an error message appears on the control panel.
Configuring the transmission mode
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Fax Features].
4. Press [ ].
5. Select [Transmission Setting].
6. Press [Immediate TX].
7. Select [Off], [On], or [Next Fax Only].
For Memory Transmission, select [Off].
For Immediate Transmission, select [On] or [Next Fax Only].
8. Press the [Home] key.
Internet Fax Transmission
You can send faxes over the Internet. When you send faxes to Internet Fax destinations, the machine
converts scanned images to TIFF-F format files and send them as attachments to e-mail.
• The level of security for Internet communications is low. It is recommended that you use the
telephone network for confidential communications.
• Internet Fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use a telephone line if the fax
needs to be delivered in a timely manner.
• This function is available for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw only.
187
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
• The Internet Fax function supported by this machine is compliant with ITU-T Recommendation T.37
(Simple Mode).
• To use the Internet Fax function, network settings must be configured properly. For details about
network settings, see page 295 "Configuring the Network Settings".
• Internet Fax transmission may take some time before it starts. The machine needs a certain amount
of time to convert data in memory prior to transmission.
• Depending on e-mail environment conditions, you may not be able to fax large images.
• The "Photo" resolution is not available for Internet Faxes. Faxes will be sent using "Detail" resolution
if "Photo" resolution has been specified.
• If the faxes are received on a computer, a viewer application needs to be installed in order to view
the documents.
Basic Operation for Sending a Fax
• The original in the ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you place
originals both in the ADF and on the exposure glass.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ADF.
To place the originals, see page 77 "Placing Originals".
4. Select the [Fax] (
) tab or [Internet Fax] (
) tab.
5. Select [Address Book], [Manual Entry], or [Redial].
6. Enter the fax number (up to 40 characters), or specify a destination.
• For details about entering characters, see page 42 "Entering Characters".
188
Sending a Fax
• For details about specifying destinations, see page 192 "Specifying the Fax Destination".
• If the machine is connected to the telephone network through a PBX, make sure to enter the
outside line access number specified in [PBX Access Number] before the fax number. For [PBX
Access Number], see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
7. Press [OK].
8. Press the [B&W Start] key.
DUE315
• Depending on the machine's settings, you may be prompted to enter the fax number again if
you manually entered the destination fax number. In this case, re-enter the number within 60
seconds, and then press the [B&W Start] key. If the fax numbers do not match, go back to
Step 6. For [Fax No. Confirmation], see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• When using the exposure glass in Memory Transmission mode, you will be prompted to place
another original. In this case, proceed to the next step.
9. If you have more originals to scan, press [Yes] within 60 seconds, place the next original
on the exposure glass, and then press [OK]. Repeat this step until all originals are
scanned.
If you do not press [Yes] within 60 seconds, the machine will start to dial the destination.
10. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] or the [B&W Start] key to start sending
the fax.
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, pause, " ", " ", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in a fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
[Transmission Setting]. For [Pause Time], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in a fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• You can specify multiple destinations and broadcast the fax you are sending. For sending a fax
using the broadcast function, see page 192 "Specifying the Fax Destination".
189
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
• When [Fax No. Confirmation] is set to [On], the machine prompts you to enter the fax number
twice only when you dial the destination manually. Destinations specified using the Speed Dial
function or [Redial] need not be confirmed. For details about [Fax No. Confirmation], see
page 184 "Preventing Transmission to the Wrong Destination".
• When in Memory Transmission mode, you can enable the [Auto Redial] setting under [Transmission
Setting] to set the machine to automatically redial the destination if the line is busy or an error
occurs during transmission. For [Auto Redial], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
• When in Memory Transmission mode, the machine's memory may become full while scanning the
originals. In this case, the screen prompts you to cancel the transmission or to send only the pages
that have been scanned successfully.
• You can scan 2-sided originals from the ADF in Memory Transmission mode. Specify how to scan
2-sided originals in the [Fax Original] setting under [Transmission Setting]. For [Fax Original], see
page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
• If paper is jammed in the ADF, the jammed page has not been scanned properly. When the
machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, resend the fax starting from the jammed page. When
in Memory Transmission mode, scan the entire originals again. For details about removing paper
jammed in the ADF, see page 351 "Removing Paper Jams".
• The machine can store up to 5 unsent fax jobs.
Canceling a Transmission
This section explains how to cancel a fax transmission.
Canceling a Transmission Before the Original Is Scanned
Use this procedure to cancel a transmission before pressing the [B&W Start] key.
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
DUE308
190
Sending a Fax
Canceling a Transmission While the Original Is Being Scanned
Use this procedure to cancel scanning or transmitting of the original while it is being scanned.
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
DUE308
2. Press [Fax Job] on the [Cancel Jobs] screen.
Canceling a Transmission After the Original Is Scanned (While a Transmission Is in
Progress)
Use this procedure to delete a file that is being sent after the original is scanned.
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key while "Transmitting..." is displayed on the display.
DUE308
2. Press [Fax Job] on the [Cancel Jobs] screen.
• If you cancel a document while it is being sent, the transmission is halted as soon as you finish the
cancellation procedure. However, some pages of the document may already have been sent and
received at the other end.
• If the transmission finishes while this procedure is being processed, the transmission is not canceled.
Note that the transmission duration is short if an Internet Fax is being executed.
191
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
• If you cancel sending a fax while broadcasting, only the fax to the current destination is canceled.
The fax will be sent to the subsequent destinations as normal. For details about sending a fax using
the broadcast function, see page 192 "Specifying the Fax Destination".
Canceling a Transmission After the Original Is Scanned (Before a Transmission Starts)
Use this procedure to delete a file stored in memory before its transmission starts.
Use the following procedure to delete a file stored in memory (such as automatic redial) before its
transmission starts.
1. Confirm that the initial screen for Fax settings is shown on the display.
For details about the initial screen, see page 177 "Fax Mode Screen".
2. Press [Tx File].
3. Select the file you want to delete.
4. Press [Delete] or [Delete All].
• [Delete]
To delete a fax job, select the desired job, and then select [Yes]. Selecting [No] exits to the
previous level of the menu tree without deleting the fax job.
• [Delete All]
To delete the fax jobs, select [Yes]. Selecting [No] exits to the previous level of the menu tree
without deleting the fax job.
5. Press [Exit].
• You cannot view files that are in the process of being sent.
• If you specify a broadcast task, all the unsent destinations are canceled.
Specifying the Fax Destination
Other than entering the destination fax number using the number keys, you can specify destinations
using the following functions:
• Quick Dial
• Speed Dial
• Broadcast function
• Redial function
192
Sending a Fax
Specifying the destination using Quick Dial
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Address Book].
4. Press the [Quick Dial] tab.
5. Select the desired Quick Dial entry, and then press [OK].
For registering the Quick Dial entries, see page 180 "Registering Fax Destinations".
• You can check the registered names and fax numbers by printing a report. For printing the Quick
Dial list, see page 263 "Printing Lists/Reports".
Specifying the destination using Speed Dial
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Address Book].
4. Press the [Speed Dial] tab.
193
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
5. Select the desired Speed Dial entry, and then press [OK].
For registering the Speed Dial entries, see page 180 "Registering Fax Destinations".
• You can check the registered names and fax numbers by printing a report. For printing the Speed
Dial list, see page 263 "Printing Lists/Reports".
Specifying the destination using the broadcast function
You can send a fax to multiple destinations (up to 100 destinations) simultaneously.
Faxes are sent to destinations in the order they were specified.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Add a destination by using one of the following methods:
• To add a Quick Dial destination: press [Address Book], press the [Quick Dial List] tab, select a
destination, and then press [OK].
• To add a Speed Dial destination: press [Address Book], press the [Speed Dial List] tab, select
a destination, and then press [OK].
• To add a manually-specified destination: press [Manual Entry], press the box, enter the
destination fax number, and then press [OK] twice.
• While specifying multiple destinations, you can press the [Clear/Stop] key to clear all destinations.
• If you specify multiple destinations in Immediate Transmission mode, the mode switches to Memory
Transmission mode temporarily.
• While broadcasting, pressing [Clear] cancels the fax to the current destination only.
• If the destinations contain both normal fax destinations and Internet Fax destinations, the fax will be
sent to the Internet Fax destinations first (SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw only).
194
Sending a Fax
Specifying the destination using the redial function
You can specify the last used destination as the destination for the current job.
This function saves time when you are sending to the same destination repeatedly, as you do not have to
enter the destination each time.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Redial].
4. Specify the destination, and then press [OK].
Useful Sending Functions
You can check the status of the other party's machine easily before sending a fax by using the On Hook
Dial function. Using an external telephone, you can talk and send a fax in one call.
• This function is not available with Internet Fax.
Sending a fax using On Hook Dial
The On Hook Dial function allows you to check the destination's status while listening to the tone from the
internal speaker. This function is useful when you want to ensure that the fax will be received.
• The On Hook Dial function cannot be used when [Fax No. Confirmation] under [Administrator
Tools] is enabled.
1. Place the original.
195
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
2. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
3. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press [On Hook].
[On Hook] appears on the screen.
5. Specify the destination using the number keys.
6. If you hear a high pitched tone, press the [B&W Start] key.
DUE315
7. If the original is placed on the exposure glass, press [TX], and then press the [B&W Start]
key.
• For details about selecting the transmission mode, see page 186 "Selecting Transmission Mode".
• For details about [Fax No. Confirmation], see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
Sending a fax after a conversation
An external telephone allows you to send a fax after finishing your conversation without having to
disconnect and redial. This function is useful when you want to ensure that the fax has been received.
1. Place the original.
196
Sending a Fax
2. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
3. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Pick up the handset of the external telephone.
5. Specify the destination using the external telephone.
6. When the other party answers, tell the receiver that you want to send them a fax
document (ask them to switch to facsimile mode).
7. If you hear a high pitched tone, press the [B&W Start] key.
DUE315
8. If the original is placed on the exposure glass, press [TX], and then press the [B&W Start]
key.
9. Replace the handset.
Specifying Scan Settings for Faxing
Adjusting image density
This section describes how to adjust image density for the current job.
There are three image density levels. The darker the density level, the darker the printout.
197
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [TX Settings].
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the desired density level, and then press [OK].
5. Press [OK].
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always scan with a specific density level.
For [Density], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
Specifying the resolution
This section describes how to specify the scan resolution for the current job.
There are three resolution settings:
Standard
Select this when the original is a printed or typewritten document with normal-sized characters.
Detail
Select this when the original is a document with small print.
Photo
Select this when the original contains images such as photographs or shaded drawings.
198
Sending a Fax
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [TX Settings].
4. Press [Resolution].
5. Select the desired resolution, and then press [OK].
6. Confirm the resolution you selected is displayed, and then press [OK].
• You can change the machine's default [Resolution] setting to always scan with a specific resolution
level. For [Resolution], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
199
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LANFax)
This section describes how to use the fax function of the machine from a computer.
You can send a document directly from a computer through this machine to another fax machine,
without printing the document.
Basic Operation for Sending Faxes from a Computer
This section describes the basic operation for sending faxes from a computer.
You can select a destination from the LAN-Fax address book or enter a fax number manually. You can
send faxes to up to 100 destinations at one time.
The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 7.
• Using LAN-Fax, you can send up to 10 pages (including the cover sheet) at a time.
• Before sending a fax, the machine stores all the fax data in memory. If the machine's memory
becomes full while storing this data, the fax transmission will be canceled. If this happens, lower the
resolution or reduce the number of pages and try again.
1. Open the file you want to send.
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
3. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click [Print].
4. Specify a destination.
• To specify a destination from the LAN-Fax address book:
Select a destination from [User List:], and then click [Add to List].
Repeat this step to add more destinations.
• To enter a fax number directly:
Click the [Specify Destination] tab, and enter a fax number (up to 40 digits) in [Fax Number:],
and then click [Add to List].
Repeat this step to add more destinations.
5. To attach a cover sheet, click [Edit Cover Sheet] on the [Specify Destination] tab, and then
select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check box.
Edit the cover sheet as necessary, and then click [OK].
For details about editing a fax cover sheet, see page 205 "Editing a Fax Cover Sheet".
6. Click [Send].
200
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
• For details, see the LAN-Fax driver help.
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", "-", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in a fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
[Transmission Setting]. For [Pause Time], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in a fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• To delete an entered destination, select the destination in the [Destination List:], and then click
[Delete from List].
• You can register the fax number you entered in the [Specify Destination] tab in the LAN-Fax
Address Book. Click [Save to Address Book] to open the dialog box for registering a destination.
• From the [View:] list, you can select the types of destinations to display.
• [All]: Displays all destinations.
• [Group]: Displays groups only.
• [User]: Displays individual destinations only.
• If sending faxes via LAN-Fax is restricted, you must enter a user code in the LAN-Fax driver's
property before sending a fax. For details about entering a user code, see page 293 "When
Machine Functions are Restricted".
Canceling a fax
You can cancel sending a fax using either the machine's control panel or your computer, depending on
the status of the job.
Canceling while the machine is receiving a fax from the computer
If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to cancel the fax of another user.
1. Double-click the printer icon on the task bar of your computer.
2. Select the print job you want to cancel, click the [Document] menu, and then click
[Cancel].
3. Click [Yes].
Canceling while sending a fax
Cancel the fax using the control panel.
201
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
Configuring Transmission Settings
This section describes how to configure transmission settings in the LAN-Fax driver's properties.
Properties are set separately for each application.
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
2. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click a button such as [Preferences].
LAN-Fax driver properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the [Setup] tab.
4. Configure settings as necessary, and then click [OK].
For details about the settings, see the LAN-Fax driver help.
Configuring the LAN-Fax Address Book
This section describes the LAN-Fax address book. Configure the LAN-Fax address book on the
computer. The LAN-Fax address book allows you to specify LAN-Fax destinations quickly and easily.
The LAN-Fax address book can contain up to 1000 entries, including individual destinations and
groups of destinations.
Opening the LAN-Fax address book
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the LAN-Fax driver icon, and then click [Printing preferences].
202
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
3. Click the [Address Book] tab.
Registering destinations
1. Open the LAN-Fax address book, and then click [Add User].
2. Enter the destination information, and then click [OK].
You must enter a contact name and fax number.
3. Confirm the setting, and then click [OK].
Modifying destinations
1. Open the LAN-Fax address Book, select the destination you want to modify from the
[User List:], and then click [Edit].
2. Modify information as necessary, and then click [OK].
Click [Save as new User] if you want to register a new destination with similar information. This is
useful when you want to register a series of destinations that contain similar information. To close
the dialog box without modifying the original destination, click [Cancel].
3. Confirm the setting, and then click [OK].
Registering groups
1. Open the LAN-Fax address Book, and then click [Add to Group].
2. Enter the group name in [Group Name].
3. Select the destination you want to include in the group from [User List:], and then click
[Add].
To delete a destination from a group, select the destination you want to delete from [List of Group
Members:], and then click [Delete from List].
4. Click [OK].
5. Confirm the setting, and then click [OK].
• A group must contain at least one destination.
• A group name must be specified for a group. No two groups can have the same group name.
• A single destination can be included in more than one group.
203
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Modifying groups
1. Open the LAN-Fax address Book, select the group you want to modify from the [User
List:], and then click [Edit].
2. To add a destination to the group, select the destination you want to add from [User List:]
and click [Add].
3. To delete a destination from the group, select the destination you want to delete from [List
of Group Members:], and then click [Delete from List].
4. Click [OK].
5. Confirm the setting, and then click [OK].
• A message appears if the name you specified already exists in the LAN-Fax Address Book. Click
[OK] and register it under a different name.
Deleting individual destinations or groups
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, select the destination you want to delete from [User
List:], and then click [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
2. Click [Yes].
3. Confirm the setting, and then click [OK].
• A destination is automatically deleted from a group if that destination is deleted from the LAN-Fax
Address Book. If you are deleting the last destination from a group, a message asking you to
confirm the deletion appears. Click [OK] if you want to delete the group.
• Deleting a group does not delete the destinations it contains from the LAN-Fax Address Book.
Exporting/Importing LAN-Fax Address Book data
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
Exporting LAN-Fax Address Book data
LAN-Fax Address Book data can be exported to a file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Follow this procedure to export LAN-Fax Address Book data.
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, and then click [Export].
204
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
2. Navigate to the location to save the LAN-Fax Address Book data, specify a name for
the file, and then click [Save].
Importing LAN-Fax Address Book data
LAN-Fax Address Book data can be imported from files in CSV format. You can import address
book data from other applications if the data is saved as a CSV file.
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, and then click [Import].
2. Select the file containing the address book data, and then click [Open].
A dialog box for selecting the items to import appears.
3. For each field, select an appropriate item from the list.
Select [*empty*] for fields for which there is no data to import. Note that [*empty*] cannot
be selected for [Name] and [Fax].
4. Click [OK].
For details about the settings, see the LAN-Fax driver help.
• CSV files are exported using Unicode encoding.
• LAN-Fax Address Book data can be imported from CSV files whose character encoding is Unicode
or ASCII.
• Group data cannot be exported or imported.
• Up to 1000 destinations can be registered in the LAN-Fax Address Book. If this limit is exceeded
during importing, the remaining destinations will not be imported.
Editing a Fax Cover Sheet
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
2. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click [Print].
3. Click the [Specify Destination] tab, and then click [Edit Cover Sheet].
4. Configure settings as necessary, and then click [OK].
For details about the settings, see the LAN-Fax driver help.
205
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Receiving a Fax
• When receiving an important fax, we recommend you confirm the contents of the received fax with
the sender.
• The machine may not be able to receive faxes when the amount of free memory space is low.
• You can use an external telephone to use this machine as a telephone.
• Only A4, Letter, or Legal size paper can be used for printing faxes.
Selecting Reception Mode
The following explains the reception modes of the fax function and how to select them.
• In FAX/TAD mode, the machine receives the fax automatically after the external telephone
answering device rings the number of times specified in [No. of Rings (TAD)]. Set the external
telephone answering device to ring before receiving a fax. For details about [No. of Rings (TAD)],
see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
Types of reception mode
There are four types of reception:
• Fax Only mode
• FAX/TEL Manual mode
• FAX/TEL Auto mode
• FAX/TAD mode
206
Receiving a Fax
Selecting the reception modes
Is an external telephone
connected to the machine?
No
Yes
Do you want to use
an external answering
device?
Fax Only mode
Yes
FAX/TAD mode
Yes
FAX/TEL Auto mode
No
FAX/TEL Manual mode
No
Do you want to receive
faxes automatically?
Description of reception modes
• Fax Only mode (auto reception)
• When an external telephone is not connected
The machine automatically answers all incoming calls in fax reception mode.
• When an external telephone is connected
The machine automatically answers all incoming calls in fax reception mode after the
external telephone rings the number of times specified. It is convenient for those who only
use telephones for outgoing calls.
• FAX/TAD mode (auto reception)
In this mode, the external telephone answering device answers and records messages when
the machine receives telephone calls. If the incoming call is a fax call, the machine receives
the fax automatically. For details, see page 209 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TAD mode".
• FAX/TEL Auto mode (auto reception)
In this mode, the machine receives faxes automatically if a fax calling tone is detected from an
incoming call. For details, see page 209 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Auto mode".
• FAX/TEL Manual mode (manual reception)
207
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
In this mode, you must answer calls with the handset or an external telephone. If a call is a fax
call, you must start the fax reception manually. For details, see page 208 "Receiving a fax in
FAX/TEL Manual mode".
Configuring the reception mode
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Fax Features].
4. Press [Reception Settings].
5. Press [Switch Recep. Mode].
6. Select the desired reception mode.
7. Press the [Home] key.
• In FAX/TAD mode, the machine automatically starts to receive faxes after the external
telephone answering device rings the number of times specified in [No. of Rings (TAD)] under
[Fax Features]. Make sure to set the external telephone answering device to answer calls
before the machine starts to receive faxes. For [No. of Rings (TAD)], see page 228 "Fax
Features Settings".
• An external telephone is required to use this machine as a telephone. For details about
connecting an external telephone to the machine, see Setup Guide.
Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Manual mode
• To receive faxes, be sure to first remove any originals loaded in the ADF.
1. Pick up the handset of the external telephone to answer the call.
A normal telephone call starts.
208
Receiving a Fax
2. When you hear a fax calling tone or no sound, press the [Home] key, press the [Fax]
icon, and then press the [B&W Start] key.
3. Press [RX].
4. Press the [B&W Start] key.
5. Replace the handset.
Receiving a fax in Fax Only mode
When the reception mode is set to Fax Only mode, the machine automatically answers all incoming
calls in fax reception mode.
• You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering a call in the [Number of
Rings] setting under [Fax Features]. For [Number of Rings], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
• If you answer a call with the external telephone while the machine is ringing, a normal telephone
call starts. If you hear a fax calling tone or no sound, receive the fax manually. To receive the fax
manually, see page 208 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Manual mode".
Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Auto mode
When the reception mode is set to FAX/TEL Auto mode, the machine receives faxes automatically if a
fax calling tone is detected from an incoming call.
If you answer a call with the external telephone while the machine is ringing, a normal telephone call
starts. If you hear a fax calling tone, receive the fax manually. To receive the fax manually, see
page 208 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Manual mode".
• You can specify how long the machine rings before it receives faxes in the [RX Mode Switch Time]
setting under [Fax Features]. For [RX Mode Switch Time], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
Receiving a fax in FAX/TAD mode
When the reception mode is set to FAX/TAD mode, the external telephone answering device answers
and records messages when the machine receives telephone calls. If the incoming call is a fax call, the
machine receives the fax automatically.
1. When there is an incoming call, the external telephone answering device rings the
number of times specified in [No. of Rings (TAD)] under [Fax Features].
For [No. of Rings (TAD)], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
If the external telephone answering device does not answer, the machine starts to receive the fax
automatically.
209
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
2. If the external telephone answering device answers, the machine monitors silence on the
line for 30 seconds (silence detection).
• If a fax calling tone or no sound is detected, the machine starts to receive the fax
automatically.
• If a voice is detected, a normal telephone call starts. The external telephone answering device
records messages.
• You can manually receive a fax during silence detection. To receive the fax manually, see
page 208 "Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Manual mode".
• Silence detection does not terminate for 30 seconds even if the external telephone answering
device goes on-hook, unless you press the [Clear/Stop] key and disconnect the call.
Receiving an Internet Fax
You can set the machine to periodically check for e-mails (Internet Faxes) and receive them
automatically, or you can manually check and receive them.
• Specify the e-mail address of this machine for receiving Internet Faxes in User Account under POP3
settings of Web Image Monitor.
• This machine may not be able to receive e-mails in HTML format.
• This function is available for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw only.
Automatic reception
When [Automatic POP] under Internet Fax settings of Web Image Monitor is enabled, the machine
periodically connects to the POP3 server, as specified in [POP Interval (minutes)], to check for new
e-mails. The machine will download them if there are any.
Manual reception
When [Automatic POP] is disabled, use the control panel to manually connect to the POP3 server
and check for new e-mails.
210
Receiving a Fax
Receiving a fax using the control panel
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Fax Features].
4. Press [Reception Settings].
5. Press [ ] twice.
6. Press [Manual POP].
7. In the confirmation screen, press [Yes].
The machine checks for new e-mails and downloads them if there is any.
Receiving a fax using Web Image Monitor
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Network Settings].
3. Click the [Internet Fax] tab.
4. Select "Automatic POP" to [Active] or [Inactive].
[Active]: Automatic reception
[Inactive]: Manual reception
5. Click [OK].
6. Close the Web browser.
For details about using Web Image Monitor, see page 270 "Using Web Image Monitor".
• If the e-mail reception fails and [Error Notification E-mail] under Internet Fax settings of Web Image
Monitor is enabled, an error notification e-mail will be sent to the original sender. For details about
settings of Web Image Monitor, see page 301 "Internet Fax Tab".
211
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
• If [Error Notification E-mail] is disabled or the error notification e-mail failed, the machine will print
out an error report.
Forwarding or Storing Faxes in Memory
To prevent unauthorized users from seeing sensitive faxes, you can set the machine to forward received
faxes to a preset destination, or store them in memory without printing them out.
• This function is available for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw only.
• The table below shows what happens after forwarding succeeds or fails depending on the
machine’s configuration.
Forwarding
[Print
Forwarded
File]
[Print
Received File]
Results
Success
Off
Not
applicable
The machine deletes the fax from memory.
Success
On
On
The machine prints out the fax and deletes it
from memory.
Success
On
Off
The machine stores the fax in memory for later
manual printing.
Failure
Off
Not
applicable
The machine prints out a forwarding failure
report and deletes the fax from memory.
Failure
On
On
The machine prints out a forwarding failure
report, prints out the fax, and then deletes it
from memory.
Failure
On
Off
The machine prints out a forwarding failure
report and stores the fax in memory for later
manual printing.
• If the machine is unable to print out a fax due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a
paper jam, the fax will remain in memory and the Fax Received indicator will flash. The remaining
pages will start printing as soon as the problem is resolved.
212
Receiving a Fax
• The number of forwarding attempts and the attempt interval time can be specified using Web
Image Monitor. For details about the forwarding destination, forwarding trials and interval settings,
see page 278 "Configuring the System Settings".
Forwarding settings
To specify the forwarding conditions for received faxes, configure the machine as follows:
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Fax Features].
4. Press [Reception Settings].
5. Press [ ].
6. Press [Reception File Sett.].
7. Select [Forward].
To send e-mail notifications after faxes are forwarded, proceed to Step 8.
8. Press [Notify Forwarding].
9. Press [Active].
• [Active]: Send an e-mail notification after forwarding. E-mail notification destination depends
on how the forwarding destination is configured.
• [Inactive]: An e-mail notification is not sent.
10. Press the [Home] key.
Specifying the forwarding destination using Web Image Monitor
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [System Settings].
3. Click the [Fax] tab.
213
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
4. Specify the forwarding destination in [Forwarding Destination].
• [E-mail Address]: Enter a destination e-mail address.
• [Scan Destination]: Select a scan destination as a forwarding destination.
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [OK].
7. Close the web browser.
For details about using Web Image Monitor, see page 278 "Configuring the System Settings".
Configuring the storing conditions
To specify the storing conditions for received faxes, configure the machine as follows:
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Fax Features].
4. Press [Reception Settings].
5. Press [ ].
6. Press [Reception File Sett.].
7. Select [Print] or [Forward].
8. Press [Print Received File].
9. Select [On] or [Off].
• [On]: Automatically print out the received faxes and delete from memory.
• [Off]: Store the received faxes in memory for later manual printing.
If you select [On], proceed to the next step. If you select [Off], press [OK], and then proceed to
Step 11.
10. Enter the start time and the end time, and then press [OK].
The machine prints out the received faxes and delete from memory within the specified time.
214
Receiving a Fax
11. Press the [Home] key.
• When the fax is successfully printed out, it will be deleted from memory.
• If the machine is unable to print out a fax due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a
paper jam, the fax will remain in memory. The remaining pages will start printing as soon as the
problem is resolved.
Printing Out Faxes Stored in Memory
This section explains how to print out received faxes stored in the machine's memory.
If the Data-In indicator is flashing, there is a fax in machine's memory. Follow the procedure below to
print the fax.
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Fax] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [RX File].
4. Select the file, and then press [Print].
5. Press [Yes].
The machine prints out the stored fax and deletes it from memory.
6. Press the [Home] key.
• Selecting [On] here will enable [Print Received File] under fax feature settings. If you do not want to
print out subsequent faxes automatically, set it back to [Off]. For details, see page 228 "Fax
Features Settings".
• If tray 2 is installed, you can select which tray to feed paper from in [Select Paper Tray] under fax
feature settings. If you set the machine to switch between Tray 1 and 2 automatically in this setting,
you can also specify the tray the machine uses first in [Paper Tray Priority] under [Paper Settings].
For details about [Select Paper Tray], see page 228 "Fax Features Settings" and [Paper Tray
Priority], see page 250 "Paper Settings".
215
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
• If the Fax Received indicator is flashing, there is a received fax in the machine's memory that could
not be printed out due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a paper jam. The printing
will start as soon as the problem is resolved.
Receiving or Rejecting Faxes from Special Senders
You can set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from the registered Special Senders. This helps
you screen out unwanted documents, such as junk faxes, and prevents the wasting of fax paper.
To use this function, you must first register Special Senders using Web Image Monitor, and then select
whether to accept or reject faxes from them.
• This function is not available with Internet Fax.
Registering the Special Senders
This section explains how to register Special Senders.
Up to 30 Special Senders can be registered.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Special Sender].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [Special Sender].
216
Receiving a Fax
4. Select the Special Sender number from the list (1 to 30).
5. Enter the Special Sender’s fax number (up to 20 characters).
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [OK].
8. Close the Web browser.
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, , and space.
Limiting the incoming faxes
This section explains how to set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from the programmed
Special Senders.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [System Settings].
3. Click the [Fax] tab.
4. For [Authorized Reception], click [Active].
5. For [Receive Conditions], click [Special Sender] or [Other Than Special Sender].
• Special Sender
Select this to receive faxes from the Special Senders and reject faxes from all other senders.
• Other Than Special Sender
Select this to reject faxes from the Special Senders and receive faxes from all other senders.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [OK].
8. Close the Web browser.
217
6. Sending and Receiving a Fax
Lists/Reports Related to Fax
The lists and reports related to the fax function are as follow:
• Configuration Page
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.
• Fax Journal
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs.
• TX/RX Standby Files
Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed, sent, or forwarded.
• Quick Dial Dest.
Prints a list of scan and fax Quick Dial entries.
• Fax Speed Dial Dest.
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.
• By Speed Dial No.
Prints the list with the entries sorted by Speed Dial registration number.
• By Name
Prints the list with the entries sorted by name.
• Special Sender List
Prints a list of fax Special Senders.
• Power Failure Report
Prints a report when the machine's power has been interrupted while sending or receiving a fax, or
images stored in the machine's memory have been lost due to the machine being turned off for a
prolonged period of time.
• For more information on Fax Journal and Print TX Status, see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
• Repots will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray
before printing reports. For details about loading paper, see page 48 "Loading Paper".
218
7. Configuring the Machine Using the
Control Panel
This chapter describes how to configure the machine using the control panel.
Basic Operation
Use the following procedure to access the machine settings.
To check which category the function you want to configure belongs to, see page 220 "Menu Chart".
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Select the settings you want to use.
For a list of available items, see page 220 "Menu Chart".
If you select [Address Book], [Network Settings], or [Administrator Tools] menu, you might be
requested to enter a password. Enter the four-digit password, and then press [OK]. For details
about the password, see [Admin. Tools Lock] on page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
4. To confirm setting items and values displayed, press [OK].
5. To go back to the previous item, press [Exit].
219
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Menu Chart
This section lists the parameters included in each menu.
For details about configuring the machine using Web Image Monitor, see page 269 "Configuring the
Machine Using Utilities".
• Some items might not appear depending on the model type or machine's configuration.
• Some items can also be configured using Web Image Monitor.
Copier Features
For details, see page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
Scanner Features
For details, see page 226 "Scanner Features Settings".
Fax Features
For details, see page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
Address Book
For details, see page 237 "Address Book Settings".
System Settings
For details, see page 238 "System Settings".
Paper Settings
For details, see page 250 "Paper Settings".
Network Settings
For details, see page 265 "Network Settings".
Print List/Report
For details, see page 263 "Printing Lists/Reports".
Administrator Tools
For details, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
Printer Features
For details, see page 246 "Printer Features Settings".
220
Copier Features Settings
Copier Features Settings
Item
Select Paper
Description
Value
Specifies the paper size used for printing copies.
• Tray 1
When a tray is selected, the machine prints from
that tray only.
• Tray 2
When a paper size is selected, the machine
prints from the trays that contain the paper of the
specified size, except the bypass tray. If Tray 1
and tray 2 both contain the paper of the
specified size, the machine starts to print from the
tray specified as the priority tray in [Paper Tray
Priority] under [Paper Settings]. If that tray runs
out of paper, the machine automatically switches
to the other tray to continue printing.
• A4
• Bypass Tray
• 8 1/2 × 11
Default: [Tray 1]
If Tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1] and
[Bypass Tray] appear.
Sort
Configures the machine to sort the output pages
into sets when making multiple copies of a multipage document (P1, P2, P1, P2...).
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
221
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Original Type
Description
Specifies the content of originals, to optimize
copy quality.
Value
• Text/Photo
Select this when the
original contains both
text and photographs
or pictures.
• Text
Select this when the
original contains only
text and no
photographs or
pictures.
• Photo
Select this when the
original contains
photographs or
pictures. Use this mode
for the following types
of original:
• Photographs
• Pages that are
entirely or mainly
photographs or
pictures, such as
magazine pages.
Default: [Text/Photo]
Density
Specifies the image density for photocopying.
Increase the level (black
squares) to increase the
density.
Default: The default setting
is the middle of 5
adjustment levels.
222
Copier Features Settings
Item
Reduce/Enlarge
Description
Specifies the percentage by which copies are
enlarged or reduced.
Value
• 50%
• 71% (A4->A5 B5>B6)
• 82%(8x13->A4)
• 93%
• 100%
• 122%(A5->B5J)
• 141% (A5->A4 B6>B5)
• 200% (A6->A4)
• 400%
• 50%
• 65%
• 78%
• 93%
• 100%
• 129%
• 155%
• 200%
• 400%
• Zoom 25-400%
Default: [100%]
Color Adjustment
Specify the color balance of red, green and
blue.
Increase the level (black squares) to increase the
color brightness.
Default: The default setting
is the middle of 5
adjustment levels.
223
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Duplex/Combine
Description
Value
Specifies combined copying. Select a copy
mode according to your original and how you
want the copy outputs to appear. For more
details, see page 109 "Copying Single-Sided
Originals with 2-Sided and Combined Printing"
and page 114 "Copying 2-Sided Originals with
2-Sided and Combined Printing".
• Off
Note that enabling combined copying
automatically disables ID card copying.
• 1S 4Org->Cmb 2on1
2S
• 1S 2Org->Cmb 2on1
1S
• 1S 4Org->Cmb 4on1
1S
• 1S Org->2S Copy
• 1S 8Org->Cmb 4on1
2S
• 2S 1Org->Cmb 2on1
1S
• 2S 2Org->Cmb 4on1
1S
• 2S Orig->2S Copy
• 2S 2Org->Cmb 2on1
2S
• 2S 4Org->Cmb 4on1
2S
• Manual 2Sd Scan
Mode
Default: [Off]
B&W Quality
Setting
224
Specify an image quality for black-and-white
printing. The scanning speed using [Fine] is
slower than that using [Speed].
• Speed
• Fine
Default: [Speed]
Copier Features Settings
Item
ID Card Settings
Description
Specifies the ID Card Copy setting.
Value
• Card Size
You can change the ID
card copy scanning
size.
• Vertical: 50 to
148mm (1.90 to
5.83 inches)
• Horizontal: 50 to
216mm (1.90 to
8.50 inches)
Default(horizontal ×
vertical): 96×64mm
(3.78×2.52inches)
• ID Card Center Line
Specify whether to
draw a center line
when making ID card
copy.
• Print
• Do not Print
Default: [Do not Print]
225
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Scanner Features Settings
Item
Scan Size
Description
Value
Specifies the scanning size according to
the size of the original.
8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8
1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, A4, B5JIS, A5,
Custom Size
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
B&W scanning
mode
Specifies the scanning mode for blackand-white scanning using the control
panel.
• Halftone
The machine creates 1-bit blackand-white images. Images contain
only black and white colors.
• Gray Scale
The machine creates 8-bit blackand-white images. Images contain
black and white, and intermediate
gray colors.
Default: [Halftone]
Maximum Email Specifies the maximum size of a file that
Size
can be sent by e-mail.
• 1 MB
• 2 MB
• 3 MB
• 4 MB
• 5 MB
• No Limit
Default: [1 MB]
Density
Specifies the image density for scanning
originals.
Increase the level (black squares) to
increase the density.
Default: The default setting is the middle
of 5 adjustment levels.
226
Scanner Features Settings
Item
Resolution
Description
Specifies the resolution for scanning the
original.
Value
• 100 × 100dpi
• 150 × 150dpi
• 200 × 200dpi
• 300 × 300dpi
• 400 × 400dpi
• 600 × 600dpi
Default: [300 × 300dpi]
Compression
(Color)
Limitless Scan
Specifies the color compression ratio for
JPEG files. The lower the compression
ratio, the higher the quality but greater
the file size.
Sets the machine to request next originals
when scanning with the exposure glass.
• Low
• Medium
• High
Default: [Medium]
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
Single/ Multi
Page
Specifies whether to create a multi-page
file containing all pages or separate
single-page files when scanning multiple
pages.
• Multi-page
• Single Page
Default: [Multi-page]
Note that a scanned file can contain
multiple pages only when the file format
is PDF or TIFF. If the file format is JPEG, a
single-page file is created for each
scanned page.
Scan Original
Specifies the orientation to scan and
whether to have scanned in double side.
• Simplex Portrait
• Dup. Portrait: Top to Top
• Dup. Portrait: Top to Btm
• Dup. Landscape: Top to Top
• Dup. Landscape: Top to Btm
Default: [Simplex Portrait]
227
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Fax Features Settings
Reception Settings
Specifies the settings for receiving a fax.
Item
Switch Recep.
Mode
Description
Specifies the reception mode.
Value
• Fax Only
The machine automatically answers
all incoming calls in fax reception
mode.
• FAX/TEL(Manually)
The machine rings when it receives
incoming calls. The machine receives
faxes only when you manually
receive faxes.
• FAX/TAD
The machine receives faxes
automatically when a fax call is
received. Otherwise, the connected
telephone answering device answers
the call.
• FAX/TEL(Auto)
The machine receives faxes
automatically if a fax calling tone is
detected from an incoming call.
If you answer the call with the
external telephone while the machine
is ringing, a normal telephone call
starts. If you hear a fax calling tone,
receive the fax manually.
Default: [Fax Only]
228
Fax Features Settings
Item
Description
Auto Reduction Sets the machine to reduce the size of
a received fax if it is too large to print
on a single sheet of paper.
Note that the machine only reduces
the size down to 74%. If further
reduction is required to fit the fax on a
single sheet, it will be printed on
separate sheets without being
reduced.
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [On]
Default may be [Off] depending on
the [Country] setting under
[Administrator Tools].
No. of Rings
(TAD)
Specifies the number of times the
external telephone answering device
rings before the machine starts to
receive faxes in FAX/TAD mode.
Number of
Rings
Specifies the number of times the
3 to 5 times
machine rings before it starts to receive Default: 3 times
faxes in Fax Only mode.
RX Mode
Switch Time
Specifies how long the machine rings
before it starts to receive faxes in FAX/
TEL(Auto) mode.
Authorized
Reception
Sets the machine to receive (or reject)
faxes only from the programmed
Special Senders. This helps you screen
out unwanted documents, such as junk
faxes, and prevents the wasting of fax
paper.
Auth.RX:
Conditions
Specifies whether to receive or reject
faxes from the programmed Special
Senders.
This setting is available when
[Authorized Reception] is enabled.
1 to 20 times, in increments of 1
Default: 5 times
5 to 99 seconds
Default: 15 seconds
• Active
• Inactive
Default: [Inactive]
• Special Sender
Receive faxes from the Special
Senders and reject faxes from
all other senders.
• Not Special Sender
Reject faxes from the Special
Senders and receive faxes from
all other senders.
Default: [Special Sender]
229
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Reception File
Sett.
Description
Sets the machine to store received
faxes into memory for printing or
forward them to a preset destination.
Use Web Image Monitor to specify the
forwarding destination (for details, see
page 278 "Configuring the System
Settings").
Value
• Print
• Forward
Default: [Print]
This setting appears only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
Print Received
File
Sets the machine to automatically print
the faxes received into memory or
store them for later manual printing.
This setting appears only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
• On
Automatically print out the
received faxes and delete from
memory.
The machine prints out the
received faxes and deletes them
from memory within the
specified time.
• Off
Store the received faxes in
memory for manual printing
specified time.
Default:[ On]
Print
Sets the machine to store the faxes in
Forwarded File memory for printing or delete them
after forwarding.
This setting appears only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
• On
Store the faxes in memory for
printing after forwarding.
• Off
Delete the faxes from memory
after forwarding.
Default: [Off]
230
Fax Features Settings
Item
Notify
Forwarding
Description
Sets the machine to send e-mail
notifications after faxes are forwarded.
The e-mail notification destination
depends on how the forwarding
destination is configured using Web
Image Monitor (for details, see
page 278 "Configuring the System
Settings").
Value
• Inactive
• Active
Default: Inactive
This setting appears only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
Manual POP
Connects to the POP3 server to receive e-mail messages manually.
Press [Yes] to connect to the POP3
server and receive e-mail messages.
Press [No] to exit to the previous level
of the menu tree without connecting to
the POP3 server.
This setting appears only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
231
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Select Paper Tray
Item
Select Paper
Tray
Description
Specifies the tray for printing received
faxes.
Note that only A4, Letter, or Legal size
paper can be used for printing faxes.
Make sure to select a tray that contains
paper of the valid size.
If Tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1]
appears.
Value
• Auto
The machine uses Tray 1 and
Tray 2 if they contain paper of
the same size. In this case, the
machine starts to print from the
tray specified as the priority
tray in [Paper Tray Priority]
under [Paper Settings]. If that
tray runs out of paper, the
machine automatically
switches to the other tray to
continue printing.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
Default: [Auto]
Delete TX Stand.File
Deletes unsent fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory. The machine can store up to 5 unsent
fax jobs. This function is only performed when selected.
Item
232
Description
Delete
Selected File
To delete a fax job, select the desired
job, press [Delete], and then press
[Yes]. Pressing [Exit] without pressing
[Delete] exits to the previous level of
the menu tree without deleting the fax
job.
Delete All Files
To delete the fax jobs, press [Delete
All], and then press [Yes]. Pressing
[Exit] without pressing [Delete All] exits
to the previous level of the menu tree
without deleting the fax jobs.
Value
Fax Features Settings
Communication Sett.
Item
ECM
Transmission
ECM
Reception
Dial Tone
Detect
Transmission
Speed
Description
Sets the machine to automatically
resend parts of the data that are lost
during transmission.
Sets the machine to automatically
receive parts of the data that are lost
during reception.
Sets the machine to detect a dial tone
before the machine begins to dial the
destination automatically.
Specifies the transmission speed for the
fax modem.
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [On]
• Off
• On
Default: [On]
• Detect
• Not Detect
Default: [Detect]
• 33.6 Kbps
• 14.4 Kbps
• 9.6 Kbps
• 7.2 Kbps
• 4.8 Kbps
• 2.4 Kbps
Default: [33.6 Kbps]
Reception
Speed
Specifies the reception speed for the
fax modem.
• 33.6 Kbps
• 14.4 Kbps
• 9.6 Kbps
• 7.2 Kbps
• 4.8 Kbps
• 2.4 Kbps
Default: [33.6 Kbps]
JBIG
Enables transmission and reception of
JBIG-compressed images.
Note that to use this function, [ECM]
[Transmission] and [ECM Reception]
must also be enabled.
• Active
• Inactive
Default: [Active]
This function is not available with
Internet Fax.
233
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Report Print Setting
Item
Description
Print TX Status
Sets the machine to print a transmission
report automatically after a fax
transmission.
• Error Only
When the machine is in Immediate
Transmission mode, the image of the
original will not be reproduced on the
report, even if [Error Only(Image)] or
[Every TX (Image)] is selected.
• Error Only(Image)
Note that if a memory error occurs for
LAN-Fax transmission, a transmission
report will always be printed
regardless of this setting.
The transmission report will be printed
on A4 or Letter size paper.
Value
Prints a report when a
transmission error occurs.
Prints a report with an image of
the original when transmission
error occurs.
• Every TX
Prints a report for every fax
transmission.
• Every TX (Image)
Prints a report with an image of
the original for every fax
transmission.
• Do not Print
Default: [Every TX (Image)]
Print Fax
Journal
Sets the machine to print a fax journal
automatically for every 50 fax jobs
(both sent and received).
The fax journal will be printed using
the tray set for [Facsimile] under
[Paper Tray Priority] in [Paper
Settings], on A4 or Letter size paper.
234
• Auto Print
• Do not Auto Print
Default: [Auto Print]
Fax Features Settings
Transmission Setting
Item
Immediate TX
Description
Sets the machine to send a fax
immediately when the original is
scanned.
Value
• Off
Select this when using Memory
Transmission.
• On
Select this when using
Immediate Transmission.
• Next Fax Only
Select this when using
Immediate Transmission for the
next transmission only.
Default: [Off]
Resolution
Specifies the resolution to use for
scanning originals.
"Photo" resolution is not available for
Internet Faxes. Faxes will be sent using
"Detail" resolution if "Photo" resolution
has been specified.
• Standard
Select this when the original is a
printed or typewritten document
with normal-sized characters.
• Detail
Select this when the original is a
document with small print.
• Photo
Select this when the original
contains images such as
photographs or shaded
drawings.
Default: [Standard]
Density
Pause Time
Specifies the image density to use for
scanning originals.
Press [ ] to increase the density.
Specifies the length of pause time
when a pause is inserted between the
digits of a fax number.
1 to 15 seconds
Default: The default setting is the
middle of 3 adjustment levels.
Default: 3 seconds
235
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Description
Value
Auto Redial
Sets the machine to redial the fax
• Off
destination automatically when the line
• On
is busy or a transmission error occurs, if
Default: [On]
the machine is in Memory Transmission
mode. The number of redial attempts is
preset to two or three times, depending
on the [Country] setting under
[Administrator Tools], in five-minute
intervals.
Print Fax
Header
Sets the machine to add a header to
• Off
every fax you send. The header
• On
includes the current date and time, user
Default: [On]
fax name and fax number of the
machine, job ID, and page
information.
Fax Original
Specifies the orientation to fax and
whether to have faxes printed in both
sides.
• Simplex Portrait
• Dup. Portrait: Top to Top
• Dup. Portrait: Top to Btm
• Dup. Landscape: Top to Top
• Dup. Landscape: Top to Btm
Default: [Simplex Portrait]
236
Address Book Settings
Address Book Settings
Item
Quick Dial List
Description
Specifies the fax number and name for
Quick Dial entries. You can register up to
20 Quick Dial entries.
Value
• No.
Specifies the Quick Dial number.
• Number:
Specifies the fax number for Quick
Dial entries. The fax number can
contain up to 40 characters,
including 0 to 9, pause, " ",
" ", and space.
• Name
Specifies the name for Quick Dial
entries. The name can contain up
to 20 characters.
Speed Dial List
Specifies the fax number and name for
Speed Dial entries. You can register up
to 200 Speed Dial entries.
• No.
Specifies the Speed Dial number.
• Number:
Specifies the fax number for
Speed Dial entries. The fax
number can contain up to 40
characters, including 0 to 9,
pause, " ", " ", and space.
• Name
Specifies the name for Speed Dial
entries. The name can contain up
to 20 characters.
237
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
System Settings
Adjust Sound Volume
Specifies the volume of the sounds produced by the machine.
Item
Panel Key
Sound
Description
Specifies the volume of the beep that
sounds when a key is pressed.
Value
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Low]
Ring Volume
Specifies the volume of the ringing
tone.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Middle]
On Hook
Mode
Specifies the volume of the sound from
the speaker during on hook mode.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Middle]
Job End Tone
Specifies the volume of the beep that
sounds when a job is complete.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Middle]
Job Error Tone
Specifies the volume of the beep that
sounds when a fax transmission error
occurs.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Middle]
238
System Settings
Item
Alarm Volume
Description
Specifies the volume of the alarm that
sounds when an operation error
occurs.
Value
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
Default: [Middle]
I/O Timeout
Item
USB
Network
Description
Specifies how many seconds the
machine waits for print data, if the
data is interrupted while it is being sent
from the computer via USB. If the
machine does not receive any more
data within the time specified here, the
machine only prints the data it has
received. If printing is frequently
interrupted by data from other ports,
increase the timeout period.
Specifies how many seconds the
machine waits for print data, if the
data is interrupted while it is being sent
from the computer via network. If the
machine does not receive any more
data within the time specified here, the
machine only prints the data it has
received. If printing is frequently
interrupted by data from other ports,
increase the timeout period.
Value
• 15 sec.
• 60 sec.
• 300 sec.
Default: [60 sec.]
• 15 sec.
• 60 sec.
• 300 sec.
Default: [60 sec.]
239
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Locked Print
Description
Value
Specifies how many seconds the
machine holds a new Locked Print file,
when the machine cannot store any
more Locked Print files. Within this
time, you can print or delete the new
Locked Print file. You can also print or
delete an existing Locked Print file so
that the new Locked Print file can be
stored in the machine.
• 0 to 300 seconds, in increments
of 1 second
Default: [60 seconds]
This setting appears only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
User Auth.
(Copy)
Specifies how many seconds a user
stays authenticated after paper is
output when copying with the
exposure glass. Note that
authentication for other functions will
expire immediately after using that
function.
This setting appears only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw (when
the user restriction function is enabled
via Web Image Monitor).
240
• 5 to 60 seconds, in increments
of 1 second
Default: [30 seconds]
System Settings
Item
Fixed USB Port
Description
Specifies whether the same printer/
LAN-Fax driver can be used for
multiple machines or not under USB
connection.
Value
• Off
You must install the printer/
LAN-Fax driver separately for
individual machines, because
the machine other than the
original will be recognized as a
new device upon USB
connection.
• On
The same printer/LAN-Fax
driver you have installed in your
computer can be used with any
machine other than the one
originally used for installation, if
the machine is of the same
model.
Default: [Off]
Auto Continue
Item
Description
Auto Continue
Sets the machine to ignore an error
with paper size or type and continue
printing. The printing stops temporarily
when an error is detected, and restarts
automatically after about ten seconds
using the settings made on the control
panel.
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
However, if the size of paper specified
on the control panel and that of the
paper loaded in the paper tray or the
paper size specified for the print job
do not match when printing restarts, it
may cause a paper jam.
241
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Toner Saving
Item
Description
Toner Saving
Sets the machine to print using a
reduced amount of toner (for prints
made by the copier function only).
Value
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
Anti-Humidity Level
Item
Anti-Humidity Level
Description
Sets the machine to produce
prints in consistent quality
even when humidity is high.
Note that the default value for
this setting will not be restored
by performing [Reset All
Settings] under [Administrator
Tools] or [Reset Menu
Settings] under [Administrator
Tools] of Web Image Monitor.
Value
• Off
• Level 1: Weak
Select this mode if
printouts are blurred.
• Level 2: Medium
Select this mode if
printouts are curled
and/or blurred. Note
that if you select this
mode, the first print takes
longer than subsequent
prints to be complete.
• Level 3: Strong
Select this mode if
printouts are still curled
and/or blurred even
when prints are made in
[Level 2: Medium]. Note
that this mode requires
more time to produce the
first print than [Level 2:
Medium].
Default: [Off]
242
System Settings
Color Registration
Item
Color Registration
Description
Adjusts color registration as necessary. (This
adjustment is usually executed by the machine
automatically.)
Press [Yes] to execute color registration
adjustment.
Press [No] to exit to the previous level of the
menu tree without adjusting color registration.
Auto Cleaning
Item
Auto Cleaning
Description
Sets the machine to execute
periodic cleaning of the
interior. You may hear some
noise while cleaning is being
executed. This
Value
• On
• Off
Default: [On]
noise does not indicate a
malfunction.
243
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
B&W Print Priority
Item
B&W Print Priority
Description
Sets the machine to suppress
• On
the consumption of color toner
• Off
when printing black-and-white
Default: [Off]
pages.
Also, the amount of color
toner consumed during warmup time for maintenance will
also be lowered. Note that the
default value for this setting
will not be restored by
performing [Reset All Settings]
under [Administrator Tools] or
[Reset Settings] under
[Administrator Tools] of Web
Image Monitor.
244
Value
System Settings
Toner Almost Empty
Item
Toner Almost Empty
Description
Specifies the low toner level
notification timing.
Note that the default value for
this setting will not be restored
by performing [Reset All
Settings] under [Administrator
Tools] or [Reset Menu
Settings] under [Administrator
Tools] of Web Image Monitor.
Value
• Sooner
Low toner level
notification will be made
when the number of
pages that can be
printed with the
remaining toner is
approximately 300.
• Normal
Low toner level
notification will be made
when the number of
pages that can be
printed with the
remaining toner is
approximately 200.
• Later
Low toner level
notification will be made
when the number of
pages that can be
printed with the
remaining toner is
approximately 100.
Default: [Normal]
(mainly Europe)
Auto Power Off
The machine shuts down
automatically if it remains in
energy saver mode and does
not connect to the host for 2
hours or more.
• Off
• On
Default: [On]
245
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Printer Features Settings
List/Test Print
Prints lists showing configurations on the machine.
The lists will be printed using the tray set for [Printer] under [Paper Tray Priority] in [Paper Settings]
on A4 or Letter size paper.
Item
Description
Configuration
Page
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.
Menu List
Prints the machine's function menus.
Test Page
Prints a test page for checking the single-sided printing condition. The test page
contains network settings.
PCL Font List
Prints installed PCL font list.
PS Font List
Prints installed PostScript font list.
System
Item
Copies
Description
Sets the machine to print the specified
number of sets.
Value
1 to 999
Default: 1
This setting is disabled if the number of
pages to print is specified by the
printer driver.
Sub Paper
Size
246
Sets the machine to print onto paper of
another size if the specified paper is
not loaded in any tray. Alternative
sizes are preset to A4 and Letter.
• Auto
• Off
Default: [Off]
Printer Features Settings
Item
Default Page
Size
Description
Specifies the paper size to be used
when the paper size is not specified in
the print job.
Value
A4, A5, A6, 8 1/2 × 11,
7 1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 1/2 × 13, 16K,
3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C6 Env, B5 JIS, B6
JIS, 8 1/2 × 14, 51/2 × 8 1/2, 8 ×
13, 8 1/4 × 13, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, C5
Env, DL Env
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
Duplex
Sets the machine to print on both sides
of paper according to the specified
binding method.
• None
• Long Edge Bind
• Short Edge Bind
Default: [None]
Blank Page
Print
Sets the machine to print blank pages.
• On
When cover sheet printing is enabled
from the printer driver, cover sheets
are inserted even if you select [Off].
• Off
Default: [On]
Note that this setting has lower priority
than the printer driver's blank page
setting.
B&W Page
Detect
Print Error
Report
Sets the machine to print all
monochrome pages in monochrome
mode even if color printing is specified.
Sets the machine to print an error page
when the machine detects a printer or
memory error.
• On
• Off
Default: [On]
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
PCL Menu
Specifies conditions when using PCL for printing.
247
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Orientation
Description
Specifies the page orientation.
Value
• Portrait
• Landscape
Default: [Portrait]
Form Lines
Specifies the number of lines per page. 5 to 128
Default: 64
Default: 60
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Specifies the ID of the default font you
want to use.
0 to 89
Specifies the point size for the default
font.
4.00 to 999.75
This setting is effective only for a
variable-space font.
You can change the value in 0.25
increments.
Specifies the number of characters per
inch for the default font.
0.44 to 99.99
Default: 0
Default: 12.00 points
Default: 10.00 pitch
This setting is effective only for fixedspace fonts.
Symbol Set
Specifies the character set for the
default font. The following sets are
available:
Roman-8, Roman-9, ISO L1, ISO L2,
ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850,
PC-852, PC-858, PC8-TK, Win L1,
Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text,
VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math-8,
PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal,
ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO
17, ISO 21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win
3.0, MC Text, ISO L6, ISO L9,
PC-775, PC-1004, Win Baltic
Default: [PC-8]
Courier Font
Specifies a courier-type font.
• Regular
• Dark
Default: [Regular]
248
Printer Features Settings
Item
Extend A4
Width
Append CR to
LF
PCL Resolution
Description
Sets the machine to extend the width of
the printable area of A4 size paper,
reducing side margin width.
Sets the machine to append a CR code
to each LF code to print text data
clearly.
Specifies the print resolution in dots per
inch.
Value
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
• 600 × 600 1bit
• 600 × 600 2bit
• 600 × 600 4bit
Default: [600 × 600 1bit]
PS Menu
Specifies conditions when using PostScript for printing.
Item
PS Resolution
Description
Specifies the print resolution in dots
per inch.
Value
• 600 × 600 1bit
• 600 × 600 2bit
• 600 × 600 4bit
Default: [600 × 600 1bit]]
Color Profile
Specifies the color profile.
• Solid Color
• Presentation
• Photographic
• Off
Default: [Solid Color]
249
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Paper Settings
Item
Description
Paper
Size: Tray
1
Value
A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 ×
11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2,
8 × 13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 16K,
4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL
Env, A5 LEF, 8 1/2 × 13 2/5, 8 1/2 × 13 3/5,
Custom Size
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
Paper
Size: Tray
2
Specifies the paper size for
Tray 2.
This setting appears only when
the optional paper feed unit is
installed.
• A4
• 8 1/2 x 11
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
Paper
Size:
Bypass
A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 ×
11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2,
8 × 13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 16K,
4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL
Env, A5 LEF, 8 1/2 × 13 2/5, 8 1/2 × 13 3/5,
Custom Size
Default: [A4]
Default: [8 1/2 × 11]
250
Paper Settings
Item
Paper
Type: Tray
1
Description
Specifies the paper type for
tray 1.
Value
• Thin Paper
• Plain Paper
• Middle Thick Paper
• Thick Paper 1
• Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Prepunched Paper
• Label Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Envelope
• Thick Paper 2
Default: [Middle Thick Paper]
Paper
Type: Tray
2
Specifies the paper type for
Tray 2.
• Thin Paper
This setting appears only when
the optional paper feed unit is
installed.
• Middle Thick Paper
• Plain Paper
• Thick Paper 1
• Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Prepunched Paper
Default: [Middle Thick Paper]
251
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Paper
Type:
Bypass
Description
Specifies the paper type for
bypass tray.
Value
• Thin Paper
• Plain Paper
• Middle Thick Paper
• Thick Paper 1
• Recycled Paper
• Color Paper
• Letterhead
• Prepunched Paper
• Label Paper
• Bond Paper
• Cardstock
• Envelope
• Thick Paper 2
Default: [Middle Thick Paper]
Tray 1
Priority
Specifies how print jobs using
Tray 1 are handled.
• Machine Setting(s)
The paper settings configured on the machine's
control panel are applied to all print jobs. An
error occurs when the paper settings specified
by the printer driver or the print command do not
match the machine's settings.
• Driver/Command
When executing a print job specifying the paper
tray, the paper settings specified in the printer
driver or in the print command are applied
regardless of the machine's settings.
Default: [Machine Setting(s)]
252
Paper Settings
Item
Bypass
Tray
Priority
Description
Specifies how print jobs using
the bypass tray are handled.
Value
• Machine Setting(s)
The machine prints all print jobs according to the
machine’s settings.
An error will occur if the paper size/type
settings of the machine and printer driver do not
match.
• Driver/Command
When executing a print job specifying the paper
tray, the paper settings specified in the printer
driver or in the print command are applied
regardless of the machine's settings.
• Any Size/Type
The machine prints all print jobs according to the
printer driver’s settings.
Printing proceeds even if the paper size/type
settings of the machine and printer driver do not
match. However, if the paper is too small for the
print job, the printed image will be cropped.
• Any Custom Size/Type
The machine prints custom size print jobs
according to the printer driver’s settings and
prints standard size print jobs according to the
machine’s settings.
For custom size print jobs, printing proceeds
even if the paper size/type settings of the
machine and printer driver do not match.
However, if the paper is too small for the print
job, the printed image will be cropped.
For standard size print jobs, an error will occur if
the paper size/type settings of the machine and
printer driver do not match.
Default: [Driver/Command]
253
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Description
Paper Tray
Priority
Specifies the tray that the
machine uses first for print jobs,
printing out copies, or printing
out faxes, from Tray 1 or Tray
2.
If multiple trays contain valid
paper, the first tray the machine
finds will be used for printing;
when that tray runs out of
paper, the machine
automatically switches to the
next tray to continue printing.
If Tray 2 is not installed, [Tray
2] does not appear.
Value
• Printer
If automatic tray selection is specified for the
print job and both tray 1 and tray 2 contain
paper that matches the print job, the machine
starts to print from the specified tray.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Copier
Selects a tray to check first when [A4], or [8
1/2 × 11] is selected for [Select Paper] under
copy settings and both tray 1 and tray 2 contain
paper of that size, the machine starts to print
from the specified tray.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Facsimile
[Auto] is selected for [Select Paper Tray] under
fax feature settings, and both Tray 1 and Tray 2
contain paper of the same size, the machine
starts to print from the specified tray.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
Default: [Tray 1]
254
Administrator Tools Settings
Administrator Tools Settings
Item
Description
Set Date/Time
Sets the date and time of the
machine’s internal clock.
(Default may differ
depending on the [Country]
setting under [Administrator
Tools].)
Value
• Set Date
Specifies the date of the machine’s internal
clock.
Only dates that correspond with the year and
month can be set. Incompatible dates will be
refused.
Default date format: [Year/Month/Day]
• Date format: Month/Day/Year, Day/
Month/Year, or Year/Month/Day
Year: 2000 to 2099
Month: 1 to 12
Day: 1 to 31
• Set Time
Sets the time of the machine’s internal clock.
Default date format: [24-hour Format]
• Time format: 12-hour Format, 24-hour
Format
AM/PM stamp: AM, PM (for 12-hour
Format)
Hour: 0 to 23 (for 24-hour Format), or 1
to 12 (for 12-hour Format)
Minute: 0 to 59
Program Fax
Info.
Specifies the fax name and
fax number of the machine.
• Number:
Specifies the fax number of the machine using
up to 20 characters, including 0 to 9, space,
and "+".
• Name:
Specifies the fax name of the machine using
up to 20 alphanumeric characters and
symbols.
255
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Dial/Push
Phone
Description
Value
Specifies the line type of the
telephone line.
• Push Phone
To configure this setting,
contact your telephone
company and select the
setting based on your
telephone line. Selecting a
wrong setting may cause
failures in fax transmissions.
• Dial Phone (20PPS)
• Dial Phone (10PPS)
Default: [Push Phone]
[Dial Phone (20PPS)] may
not appear depending on
the country setting of the
machine.
PSTN / PBX
PBX Access
Number
Sets the machine to connect
to the public switched
telephone network (PSTN) or
a private branch exchange
(PBX).
Specifies the dial number to
access the outside line when
the machine is connected to
a PBX.
• PSTN
• PBX
Default: [PSTN]
0 to 999
Default: 9
Make sure that this setting
matches the setting of your
PBX. Otherwise, you may not
be able to send faxes to
outside destinations.
Function Priority
256
Specifies the mode that is
activated when the power is
turned on, or if the time
specified for [System Reset
Timer] elapses without
activity while the initial
screen of the current mode is
displayed.
• Home
• Copier
• Facsimile
• Scanner
Default: [Home]
Administrator Tools Settings
Item
System Reset
Timer
Description
Sets the machine to return to
the mode specified in
[Function Priority].
This setting is also applied to
the timeout for copying the
next document while ID card
copy and manual 2-sided
copy is performed.
Value
• 30 sec.
• 1 min.
• 2 min.
• 3 min.
• 5 min.
• 10 min.
• Off
Default: [1 min.]
Energy Saver
Mode
Sets the machine to enter
Energy Saver mode, Energy
Saver mode 1 or Energy
Saver mode 2, to reduce
power consumption. The
machine recovers from
Energy Saver mode when it
receives a print job, prints a
received fax, or one of the
keys on the control panel is
pressed.
Regardless of the settings for
EnergySaverMode 1 or
EnergySaverMode 2, the
machine enters
EnergySaverMode 1 after
being idle for 10 minutes.
• EnergySaverMode 1
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 1 if
the machine has been idle for about 30
seconds. It takes less time to recover from
Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off
state or Energy Saver mode 2, but power
consumption is higher in Energy Saver mode 1
than in Energy Saver mode 2.
• Off
• On
Default: [Off]
257
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Energy Saver
Mode
Description
Sets the machine to enter
Energy Saver mode, Energy
Saver mode 1 or Energy
Saver mode 2, to reduce
power consumption. The
machine recovers from
Energy Saver mode when it
receives a print job, prints a
received fax, or one of the
keys on the control panel is
pressed.
Regardless of the settings for
EnergySaverMode 1 or
EnergySaverMode 2, the
machine enters
EnergySaverMode 1 after
being idle for 10 minutes.
258
Value
• EnergySaverMode 2
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 2
after the period of time specified for this setting
is passed. The machine consumes less power
in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy Saver
mode 1, but it takes longer to recover from
Energy Saver mode 2 than from Energy Saver
mode 1.
• On (1 to 240 minutes)
• Off
Default: [On] (1 minute)
Administrator Tools Settings
Item
Language
Description
Value
Specifies the language used
on the screen and in reports.
• English
The default value for this
setting is the language you
have specified during the
Initial Setup, which is
required after turning on the
machine for the first time.
• French
• German
• Italian
• Spanish
• Dutch
• Swedish
• Norwegian
• Danish
• Finnish
• Portuguese
• Czech
• Hungarian
• Polish
• Russian
• Brazilian Portuguese
• Turkish
• Arabic
• Thai
259
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
Country
Description
Selects the country in which
the machine is used. The
country code you specify
determines the time and date
display format and the
default values of the fax
transmission-related settings.
Algeria, Argentina, Australia, Austria,
Make sure to select the
country code correctly.
Selecting a wrong country
code may cause failures in
fax transmissions.
Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Guam,
Guatemala,
The default value for this
setting is the country code
you have specified during
the Initial Setup, which is
required after turning on the
machine for the first time.
Country
Selects the country in which
the machine is used. The
country code you specify
determines the time and date
display format and the
default values of the fax
transmission-related settings.
Make sure to select the
country code correctly.
Selecting a wrong country
code may cause failures in
fax transmissions.
The default value for this
setting is the country code
you have specified during
the Initial Setup, which is
required after turning on the
machine for the first time.
260
Value
Belgium, Bolivia, Brazil, Bulgaria,
Canada, Chile, China, Colombia, Costa Rica,
Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic,
Denmark, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, Egypt, El
Salvador, Estonia,
Honduras, Hong Kong, Hungary, Iceland, India,
Ireland, Israel, Italy,
Japan, Jordan, Kuwait,
Latvia, Lebanon, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,
Luxembourg,
Malaysia, Malta, Mexico, Montenegro, Morocco,
Netherlands, New Zealand, Nicaragua, Nigeria,
Norway,
Oman, Panama, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines,
Poland, Portugal, Puerto Rico,
Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Senegal, Serbia,
Singapore, Slovakia, Slovenia, South Africa,
Spain, Sri Lanka, Sweden, Switzerland,
Taiwan, Thailand, Trinidad and Tobago, Tunisia,
Turkey,
UAE, UK, Uruguay, USA, Venezuela, Vietnam,
Virgin Islands, Yemen
Administrator Tools Settings
Item
Reset Settings
Description
Be sure not to clear the
settings by mistake.
Value
• Reset All Settings
Resets the machine's settings to their defaults
except the following:
• Language settings
• Country settings
• Network settings
• Fax destinations
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the
previous level of the menu tree without
clearing the settings.
• Reset Network Sett.
Resets the network settings to their defaults.
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the
previous level of the menu tree without
clearing the settings.
• Clear Address Book
Clears the fax Quick Dial/Speed Dial
destinations.
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the
previous level of the menu tree without
clearing the destinations.
PCL6 Mode
Admin. Tools
Lock
Set this to [Universal] when
using the Universal Driver
and to [SP C262] when
using the normal driver.
Specifies a four-digit
password for accessing the
[Address Book], [Network
Settings], [Setup Wizard],
and [Administrator Tools]
menus.
• Universal
• SP C262
Default: [SP C262]
• On (0000 to 9999)
• Off
Default: [Off]
Do not forget this password.
261
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Item
IPsec
Description
Selects whether to enable or
disable IPsec.
This function appears only
when a password is
specified under [Admin.
Tools Lock].
Fax No.
Confirmation
Sets the machine to require a
fax number to be entered
twice when specifying a
destination manually.
Value
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Inactive]
• On
• Off
Default: [Off]
When this function is
enabled, you cannot use the
On Hook Dial function.
This function appears only
when a password is
specified under [Admin.
Tools Lock].
Save Scn Data
to USB
Specify whether to enable or
disable Scan to USB.
This function appears only
when a password is
specified under [Admin.
Tools Lock].
262
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Active]
Printing Lists/Reports
Printing Lists/Reports
Printing the Configuration Page
1. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
2. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
3. Press [Print List/Report].
4. Press [Configuration Page].
5. Press [Yes].
Types of Lists/Reports
• Reports will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray
before printing reports.
Configuration Page
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.
Fax Journal
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs.
TX/RX Standby Files
Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed, sent, or forwarded.
Quick Dial Dest.
Prints a list of scan and fax Quick Dial entries.
Fax Speed Dial Dest.
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.
263
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
• By Speed Dial No.
Prints the list with the entries sorted by Speed Dial registration number.
• By Name
Prints the list with the entries sorted by name.
Scanner Dest. List
Prints a list of scan destinations.
Scanner Journal
Prints a scanner journal for the last 100 Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Folder
transmissions.
Maintenance Page
Prints the maintenance page.
Special Sender List
Prints a list of fax Special Senders.
264
Network Settings
Network Settings
• Depending on the settings you change, the machine might need to be restarted.
• Depending on the model you are using, some items might not appear.
Wi-Fi Enable
Item
Wi-Fi Enable
Description
Value
Select whether to enable or disable
Wireless LAN.
If [Disable] is set, [Wi-Fi
Configuration] and [Wi-Fi Direct
SSID] are not displayed.
• Disable
• Enable
Default: [Disable]
Ethernet
Item
Description
MAC Address
Displays the machine's MAC address.
Ethernet Speed Displays the current Ethernet speed
setting.
Value
–
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
• No Ethernet Connection
Appears when a network cable
is not connected.
Set Ethernet
Speed
Specifies the speed for Ethernet
communication. Select a speed that
matches your network environment.
For most networks, the default setting is
the optimum setting.
• Auto Select
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
Default: [Auto Select]
265
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
IPV4 Configuration
Item
IPV4 DHCP
IP Address
Description
Sets the machine to receive its IPv4
address, subnet mask, and default
gateway address automatically from a
DHCP server.
Specifies the machine's IPv4 address
when DHCP is not used.
Use this menu to check the current IP
address when DHCP is used.
Subnet Mask
Specifies the machine's subnet mask
when DHCP is not used.
Use this menu to check the current
subnet mask when DHCP is used.
Gateway
Address
Specifies the machine's default
gateway address when DHCP is not
used.
Use this menu to check the current
default gateway address when DHCP
is used.
IP Address
Method
Value
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Active]
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary
according to your network
environment.
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary
according to your network
environment.
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary
according to your network
environment.
Displays the IP address acquisition
method.
• IP not Ready
• DHCP
• Manual Configuration
• Default IP
Wi-Fi Direct IP
Addr
Displays the IP address of Wi-Fi Direct.
–
IPV6 Configuration
Item
IPV6
Description
Select whether to enable or disable
IPv6.
Value
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Inactive]
266
Network Settings
Item
IPV6 DHCP
Description
Value
Sets the machine to receive its IPv6
address from a DHCP server.
• Inactive
• Active
Default: [Active]
Manual
Config.
Address
Specifies the machine's IPv6 settings.
• Manual Config. Address
Specifies the machine's IPv6
address when DHCP is not used.
Can contain up to 46
characters.
For details about entering
characters, see page 42
"Entering Characters".
• Prefix Length
Specifies the prefix length, using
a value between 0 and 128.
• Gateway Address
Specifies the IPv6 address of the
default gateway. Can contain
up to 46 characters.
For details about entering
characters, see page 42
"Entering Characters".
IP Address
(DHCP)
Displays the IPv6 address obtained
from a DHCP server.
Stateless
Address
Displays the IPv6 stateless addresses
obtained from a Router Advertisement.
–
• Stateless Address 1
• Stateless Address 2
• Stateless Address 3
• Stateless Address 4
Link-local
Address
Displays the IPv6 link local address.
–
267
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Wi-Fi Configuration
Item
Description
Value
Connection
Mode
Displays the current connection mode.
Wi-Fi Direct
Enables devices to communicate
directly with each other without using a
central access point.
Wi-Fi Status
• Ethernet
• Wi-Fi
• Status
-
Displays the current connection
status.
• Mac Address
Displays the machine's MAC
address.
• SSID
Displays detailed information
about the SSID.
Setup Wizard
Displays the procedure for manually
connecting to a wireless LAN. It leads
you step-by-step through configuring
the settings for connecting with a
wireless LAN.
WPS
Connects with one touch using WPS
(Wi-Fi Protected Setup). For details,
see Setup Guide.
Wi-Fi Direct
SSID
• Name
-
• PBC
• PIN
-
Displays the current SSID of the
machine.
• PassWord
Specify the password for Wi-Fi
Direct connection.
• Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.
268
8. Configuring the Machine Using
Utilities
This chapter describes how to configure the machine using utilities.
Available Setting Functions Using Web Image
Monitor
Use Web Image Monitor to change the configuration of the machine from a computer.
Available operations for Web Image Monitor is as follows:
The following operations can be performed remotely using Web Image Monitor on a computer:
• Displaying the machine’s status or settings
• Configuring the machine's settings
• Registering the scan and fax destinations
• Registering the fax Special Senders
• Configuring the user restriction settings
• Configuring the network settings
• Configuring the IPsec settings
• Printing reports
• Setting the administrator password and e-mail address
• Resetting the machine's configuration to the factory default
• Creating backup files of the machine's configuration
• Restoring the machine's configuration from backup files
• Configuring the machine's date and time
• Configuring the machine's Energy Saver mode setting
269
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Using Web Image Monitor
• Some items might not appear, depending on the model type you are using.
• Some items can also be configured using the control panel.
Recommended web browsers
• Internet Explorer 6 or later
• Firefox 3.0 or later
• Safari 3.0 or later
• To operate the machine via Web Image Monitor, you must first configure the machine's TCP/IP or
wireless LAN settings. For details, see page 265 "Network Settings" or see page 295
"Configuring the Network Settings".
270
Displaying Top Page
Displaying Top Page
When you access the machine using Web Image Monitor, the top page appears in your browser's
window.
1. Launch the Web browser.
2. In the Web browser's address bar, enter "http://(machine’s IP address)/" to access the
machine.
If a DNS server is used and the machine’s host name has been specified, you can enter the host
name instead of the IP address.
The top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
Top page
Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:
2
3
1
4
DUE316
1. Menu area
Clicking a menu shows its contents in the main area.
2. Tab area
Contains tabs for switching between information and settings you want to see or configure.
3. FAQs/Knowledge Base
Provides answers to frequently asked questions and other useful information about using this
machine.
An internet connection is required to view this information.
271
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
4. Main area
Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.
Information in the main area is not automatically updated. Click [Refresh] at the upper-right in
the main area to update the information. Click the Web browser's [Refresh] button to refresh
the entire browser screen.
• If you use an older version of a supported Web browser or the Web browser has JavaScript and
cookies disabled, display and operation problems may occur.
• If you are using a proxy server, configure the Web browser settings as necessary. For details about
the settings, contact your network administrator.
• The previous page may not appear even if the back button of the Web browser is clicked. If this
happens, click the refresh button of the Web browser.
• The FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)/Knowledge Base are not available in certain languages.
Changing the Interface Language
Select the desired interface language from the [Language] list.
272
Checking the System Information
Checking the System Information
Click [Home] to display the main page of Web Image Monitor. You can check the current system
information on this page.
This page contains three tabs: [Status], [Counter], and [Machine Information].
Status Tab
Item
Description
Model Name
Shows the name of the machine.
Location
Shows the location of the machine as registered on the [SNMP] page.
Contact
Shows the contact information of the machine as registered on the [SNMP]
page.
Host Name
Shows the host name specified in [Host Name] on the [DNS] page.
Device Status
Shows the current messages on the machine's display.
Toner
Item
Description
Black
Shows the amount of black toner remaining.
Magenta
Shows the amount of magenta toner remaining.
Yellow
Shows the amount of yellow toner remaining.
Cyan
Shows the amount of cyan toner remaining.
Waste Toner Bottle
Shows the remaining life of the waste toner bottle, as "Status OK", "Almost
Full" or "Full".
Intermediate Transfer
Unit
Shows the remaining life of the intermediate transfer unit, as "Status OK",
"Replacement Required Soon" or "Replacement Required".
For replacing, contact your sales or service representative.
Fusing Unit
Shows the remaining life of the fusing unit, as "Status OK", "Replacement
Required Soon" or "Replacement Required".
For replacing, contact your sales or service representative.
273
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Transfer Roller
Description
Shows the remaining life of the transfer roller, as "Status OK", "Replacement
Required Soon" or "Replacement Required".
For replacing, contact your sales or service representative.
Paper Tray
Item
Description
Tray 1
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of Tray 1.
Tray 2
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of Tray 2.
Bypass Tray
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of the bypass tray.
• If a non-genuine print cartridge is installed, toner life cannot be reliably indicated.
• The information about intermediate transfer unit, fusing unit, and transfer roller appear only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
Counter Tab
Page Counter
Item
Printer
Description
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer function:
• Total number of pages printed using the printer function, and lists/
reports printed from the [List/Test Print] menu under [Printer Features]
• Number of color pages
• Number of black-and-white pages printed using the printer function
Scanner
Shows the following for pages scanned using the scanner function:
• Total number of pages
• Number of color pages
• Number of black-and-white pages
274
Checking the System Information
Item
Copier
Description
Shows the following for pages printed using the copier function:
• Total number of pages
• Number of color pages
• Number of black-and-white pages
Fax
Shows the following for telephone line faxes:
• Total number of pages sent and received
• Number of pages sent
• Number of pages received
Machine Counter
Item
Machine Counter
Description
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer, copier, and fax
functions, and lists/reports:
• Total number of pages
• Number of color pages
• Number of black-and-white pages
Black
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer, copier, and fax
functions, and lists/reports:
• Accumulated value of black toner A4 page coverage (in percent)
• Accumulated value of black toner consumption (converted into fullycovered A4 pages)
Cyan
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer, copier, and fax
functions, and lists/reports:
• Accumulated value of cyan toner A4 page coverage (in percent)
• Accumulated value of cyan toner consumption (converted into fullycovered A4 pages)
Magenta
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer, copier, and fax
functions, and lists/reports:
• Accumulated value of magenta toner A4 page coverage (in percent)
• Accumulated value of magenta toner consumption (converted into
fully-covered A4 pages)
275
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Yellow
Description
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer, copier, and fax
functions, and lists/reports:
• Accumulated value of yellow toner A4 page coverage (in percent)
• Accumulated value of yellow toner consumption (converted into fullycovered A4 pages)
Economy Color Prints
Item
Description
Economy Color Prints
(Color)
Shows the number of pages printed in Economy Color Printing mode using
the printer function.
Black
Shows the following for pages printed in Economy Color Printing mode
using the printer function:
• Accumulated value of black toner A4 page coverage (in percent)
• Accumulated value of black toner consumption (converted into fullycovered A4 pages)
Cyan
Shows the following for pages printed in Economy Color Printing mode
using the printer function:
• Accumulated value of cyan toner A4 page coverage (in percent)
• Accumulated value of cyan toner consumption (converted into fullycovered A4 pages)
Magenta
Shows the following for pages printed in Economy Color Printing mode
using the printer function:
• Accumulated value of magenta toner A4 page coverage (in percent)
• Accumulated value of magenta toner consumption (converted into
fully-covered A4 pages)
Yellow
Shows the following for pages printed in Economy Color Printing mode
using the printer function:
• Accumulated value of yellow toner A4 page coverage (in percent)
• Accumulated value of yellow toner consumption (converted into fullycovered A4 pages)
276
Checking the System Information
Duplex
Item
Duplex Total Page
Description
Shows the total number of sheets printed on both sides.
• A sheet printed on both sides counts as two printed pages.
Machine Information Tab
Machine Information
Item
Description
Firmware Version
Shows the version of firmware installed on the machine.
Engine FW Version
Shows the version of firmware for the machine engine.
PCL Version
Shows the version of the PCL interpreter.
PS Version
Shows the version of the PS interpreter.
Machine ID
Shows the identification number of the machine.
Fax Card
Shows that a fax card is installed.
Total Memory
Shows the total memory installed on the machine.
277
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Configuring the System Settings
Click [System Settings] to display the page for configuring the system settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [Sound Volume Adjustment], [Tray Paper Settings], [Copier],
[Fax], [Priority Tray], [Toner Saving], [I/O Timeout], [B&W Print Priority] and [Shortcut to Function].
Sound Volume Adjustment Tab
Sound Volume Adjustment
Item
Description
Panel Key Sound
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a key is pressed from [Off],
[Low], [Middle], or [High].
Ring Volume
Select the volume of the ring when a call is received from [Off], [Low],
[Middle], or [High].
On Hook Mode
Select the volume of the sound from the speaker during on hook mode from
[Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
Job End Tone
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a job is complete from
[Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
Job Error Tone
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a fax transmission error
occurs from [Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
Alarm Volume
Select the volume of the alarm that sounds when an operation error occurs
from [Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
Tray Paper Settings Tab
Tray 1
Item
Paper Size
Description
Select the paper size for Tray 1 from the following:
A4, B5 JIS, A5, A5 (210 × 148 mm), B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 ×
11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 × 13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13,
16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL Env, 8.5 ×
13.4, 8.5 × 13.6, Custom Size
278
Configuring the System Settings
Item
Paper Type
Description
Select the paper type for Tray 1 from the following:
Thin Paper (60-65g/m2), Plain Paper (66-74g/m2), Middle Thick Paper
(75-90g/m2), Thick Paper 1 (91-105g/m2), Recycled Paper, Color
Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper, Label Paper, Bond
Paper, Cardstock, Envelope, Thick Paper 2 (106-160g/m2)
Tray 2
Item
Paper Size
Description
Select the paper size for Tray 2 from the following:
A4, 8 1/2 × 11
Paper Type
Select the paper type for Tray 2 from the following:
Thin Paper (60-65g/m2), Plain Paper (66-74g/m2), Middle Thick Paper
(75-90g/m2), Thick Paper 1 (91-105g/m2), Recycled Paper, Color
Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper
Bypass Tray
Item
Paper Size
Description
Select the paper size for the bypass tray from the following:
A4, B5 JIS, A5, A5 (210 × 148 mm), B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 ×
11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 × 13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13,
16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL Env, 8.5 ×
13.4, 8.5 × 13.6, Custom Size
Paper Type
Select the paper type for the bypass tray from the following:
Thin Paper (60-65g/m2), Plain Paper (66-74g/m2), Middle Thick Paper
(75-90g/m2), Thick Paper 1 (91-105g/m2), Recycled Paper, Color
Paper, Letterhead, Prepunched Paper, Label Paper, Bond Paper,
Cardstock, Envelope, Thick Paper 2 (106-160g/m2)
279
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Tray 1 Priority
Item
Tray 1 Priority
Description
Select how print jobs using the Tray 1 are handled.
• System Settings
The paper settings configured on the machine's control panel are
applied to all print jobs. An error occurs when the paper settings
specified by the printer driver or the print command do not match the
machine's settings.
• Driver/Command
When executing a print job specifying the paper tray, the paper
settings specified in the printer driver or in the print command are
applied regardless of the machine's settings.
280
Configuring the System Settings
Bypass Tray Setting Priority
Item
Bypass Tray Setting
Priority
Description
Select how print jobs using the bypass tray are handled.
• System Settings
The paper settings configured on the machine's control panel are
applied to all print jobs. An error occurs when the paper settings
specified by the printer driver or the print command do not match the
machine's settings.
• Driver/Command
When executing a print job specifying the paper tray, the paper
settings specified in the printer driver or in the print command are
applied regardless of the machine's settings.
• Any Size/Type
Printing proceeds even if the paper size/type settings of the machine
and printer driver do not match, but if the paper is too small for the
print job, the printed image will be cropped.
• Any Custom Size/Type
The machine prints custom size print jobs according to the printer
driver’s settings and prints standard size print jobs according to the
machine’s settings.
For custom size print jobs, printing proceeds even if the paper size/
type settings of the machine and printer driver do not match, but if the
paper is too small for the print job, the printed image will be cropped.
For standard size print jobs, an error will occur if the paper size/type
settings of the machine and printer driver do not match.
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
281
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Copier Tab
Select Paper
Item
Select Paper
Description
Select the paper size used for printing copies from the following: [Tray 1],
[Tray 2], [Bypass Tray], [A4], or [8 1/2 × 11].
When a tray is selected, the machine prints from that tray only. When a
paper size is selected, the machine checks the trays for the paper of the
specified size in the order of priority as set in [Copier] in the [Priority Tray]
page.
If multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be
used for printing; when that tray runs out of paper, the machine
automatically switches to the next tray to continue printing.
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
Fax Tab
Select Paper Tray
Item
Select Paper Tray
Description
Select the tray for printing faxes from the following: [Auto], [Tray 1], or
[Tray 2].
If [Auto] is selected, the machine uses Tray 1 and Tray 2 if they contain
paper of the same size. In this case, the machine starts to print from the tray
specified as the priority tray for [Fax] in the [Priority Tray] page. If that tray
runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the other tray to
continue printing.
Only A4, Letter, or Legal size paper can be used for printing faxes. Make
sure to select a tray that contains paper of the valid size.
If Tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1] appears.
282
Configuring the System Settings
Fax Number Confirmation
Item
Fax Number
Confirmation
Description
Enable this setting to configure the machine to require a fax number to be
entered twice when specifying a destination manually.
This setting appears only when the administrator password is set in the
[Administrator] page.
Fax Received File Processing
Item
Description
Received File
Processing
Select whether received faxes are stored into the machine's memory for
printing or forwarded to a destination specified for [Forwarding
Destination].
Print Automatically
Select whether the faxes received into the machine's memory are printed
automatically or stored for later manual printing.
Print Forwarded File
Select whether the forwarded faxes are printed or not.
Notify Forward Status
Select whether e-mail notifications are sent after forwarding faxes or not.
Email notification destination depends on how [Forwarding Destination] is
specified:
• If specified with [E-mail Address]: the notification will be sent to the
administrator e-mail address specified in [Administrator E-mail
Address] in the [Administrator] page.
• If specified with [Scan Destination]: the notification will be sent to the
notification destination specified for the selected scan destination.
Note that if a destination e-mail address is not specified, no notification will
be sent even if this setting is enabled.
Forwarding Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination.
• [E-mail Address]: Enter a destination e-mail address. Can contain up
to 64 characters.
• [Scan Destination]: Select a scan destination as a forwarding
destination.
Number of Trials of
Forwarding (time)
Specifies how many times the machine attempts to forward a fax (1 to 255
times).
Interval of Forwarding
Trial (min.)
Specifies how many minutes the machine waits between forwarding
attempts (1 to 255 minutes).
283
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Authorized Reception
Item
Authorized Reception
Description
Enable this setting to set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from
the programmed Special Senders. This helps you screen out unwanted
documents, such as junk faxes, and prevents the wasting of fax paper.
Special Senders can be programmed in the [Special Sender] page.
Receive Conditions
Specifies whether to receive or reject faxes from the programmed Special
Senders.
• Special Sender
Receive faxes from the Special Senders and reject faxes from all other
senders.
• Other Than Special Sender
Reject faxes from the Special Senders and receive faxes from all other
senders.
• [Fax Received File Processing] appears only for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
Priority Tray Tab
Priority Tray
Item
Printer
Description
Select the tray that the machine checks first for paper that can be used for
the job from [Tray 1] or [Tray 2].
If automatic tray selection is specified for the print job and multiple trays
contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be used for printing;
when that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the
next tray to continue printing.
Copier
Select the tray that the machine checks first for paper that can be used for
the job from [Tray 1] or [Tray 2].
If [A4] or [8 1/2 × 11] is selected for [Select Paper] in the [Copier] page
and multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will
be used for printing; when that tray runs out of paper, the machine
automatically switches to the next tray to continue printing.
284
Configuring the System Settings
Item
Fax
Description
Select the tray that the machine uses first for printing out faxes from [Tray 1]
or [Tray 2].
If [Auto] is selected for [Select Paper Tray] in the [Fax] page and both Tray
1 and Tray 2 contain paper of the same size, the machine starts to print
from the specified tray. If that tray runs out of paper, the machine
automatically switches to the other tray to continue printing.
• The information about Tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
Toner Saving Tab
Toner Saving
Item
Toner Saving
Description
Enable this setting to print using a reduced amount of toner when printing
out copies.
I/O Timeout Tab
I/O Timeout
Item
Fixed USB Port
Description
Specifies whether the same printer/LAN-Fax driver can be used for multiple
machines or not under USB connection.
If this setting is enabled, the same printer/LAN-Fax driver you have
installed in your computer can be used with any machine other than the one
originally used for installation, if the machine is of the same model.
If disabled, you must install the printer/LAN-Fax driver separately for
individual machines, because the machine other than the original will be
recognized as a new device upon USB connection.
Locked Print Timeout
(seconds)
Specifies how many seconds the machine holds a new Locked Print file,
when the machine cannot store any more Locked Print files (0 to 300
seconds). Within this time, you can print or delete the new Locked Print file.
You can also print or delete an existing Locked Print file so that the new
Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.
285
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
• [Locked Print Timeout (seconds)] appears only for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
Black-and-White Print Priority Tab
B&W Print Priority
Item
B&W Print Priority
286
Description
Enable this setting to suppress the consumption of color toner when printing
black-and-white pages. Also, amount of color toner consumed during
warm-up time for maintenance will also be lowered.
Registering Destinations
Registering Destinations
Scan and fax destinations can be registered using Web Image Monitor.
Up to 100 scan destinations and 200 fax destinations (20 Quick Dial and 200 Speed Dial destinations)
can be registered. See the scan and fax sections for more information on registering destinations.
• For details about registering scan destinations, see page 128 "Registering Scan Destinations".
• For details about registering fax destinations using Web Image Monitor, see page 180
"Registering Fax Destinations".
287
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Registering Fax Special Senders
Fax Special Senders can be registered using Web Image Monitor.
Up to 30 Special Senders be registered. For details about registering Special Senders, see page 206
"Receiving a Fax".
288
Restricting Machine Functions According to User
Restricting Machine Functions According to
User
You can configure settings to require a user code when someone tries to use certain machine functions.
To enable this setting, you must first configure the machine settings via Web Image Monitor.
• This function is available for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw only.
• To print jobs that require authentication you can use only the PCL printer driver. Printing such jobs
from the PostScript 3 printer driver is not possible.
• For details about using Web Image Monitor, see page 270 "Using Web Image Monitor".
Enabling the User Restriction Settings
This section explains how to configure settings to permit only authorized users to use certain machine
functions.
Using Web Image Monitor, enable user restriction for all or some of the functions listed below, and then
register users who can use those functions.
• Copying (both color and black-and-white)
• Color copying
• Sending faxes
• Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder
• Scan to USB
• PictBridge printing
• Printing (both color and black-and-white)
• Color printing
• Sending faxes via LAN-Fax
You can specify functions available to each user upon authentication. Up to 30 users can be registered.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Restrict Available Functions].
3. Enter the administrator password if required.
4. Click [Apply].
289
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
5. Under "Available Functions", select [Restrict] for the functions you want to restrict, and
then click [Apply].
Select [Do not Restrict] for the functions you do not want to restrict.
The user restriction setting is enabled for the selected function. Proceed to the following steps to
register users.
6. Click [Available Functions per User].
A list of currently registered user entries appears.
7. Select a user entry, and then click [Change].
The following window appears.
8. Enter the user name in [User Name] using up to 16 alphanumeric characters.
9. Enter the user code in [User Code] using up to 8 digits.
The user code will be used to authenticate users when they try to use a restricted function.
290
Restricting Machine Functions According to User
10. Select the functions you want to make available to the user upon authentication.
Unselected functions will be unavailable to users authenticated under this user code.
11. Click [Apply].
12. Close the Web browser.
• You must enter both the user name and user code to register a user entry.
• Make sure that different user entries do not share the same user name or user code.
Modifying user entries
This section explains how to modify user entries.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Restrict Available Functions].
3. Enter the administrator password if required.
4. Click [Apply].
5. Click [Available Functions per User].
A list of currently registered user entries appears.
6. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].
7. Modify settings as necessary.
8. Click [Apply].
9. Close the Web browser.
Deleting user entries
This section explains how to delete user entries.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Restrict Available Functions].
3. Enter the administrator password if required.
4. Click [Apply].
5. Click [Available Functions per User].
A list of currently registered user entries appears.
6. Select the entry to delete, and then click [Delete].
7. Confirm that the entry you have selected is the entry that you want to delete.
8. Click [Apply].
291
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
9. Close the Web browser.
292
When Machine Functions are Restricted
When Machine Functions are Restricted
Restricted functions can be used only by authorized users.
Depending on the restricted function, users will be authenticated from the machine's control panel or in
the printer/LAN-Fax driver.
• This function is available for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw only.
• To print jobs that require authentication you can use only the PCL printer driver. Printing such jobs
from the PostScript 3 printer driver is not possible.
• The procedure in this section is an example based on Windows 7.
The table below shows the functions that can be restricted, and how users can be authenticated to use
them.
Restricted Function
Authentication method
• Copying (both color and
black-and-white)
The machine requests for a user code when a user presses the
[B&W Start] or [Color Start] key.
• Color copying
The user must enter a valid user code from the control panel.
• Sending faxes
• Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder
• Scan to USB
• PictBridge printing
The machine requests for a user code when a digital camera is
connected to the machine.
The user must enter a valid user code from the control panel.
• Printing (both color and
black-and-white)
The user must enter a valid user code in the printer or LAN-Fax
driver before executing a print command.
• Color printing
• Sending faxes via LAN-Fax
Authentication using the control panel
1. If the machine requests for the user code, press the box, enter a user code, and then press
[OK] twice.
If you enter a wrong user code 3 times, the machine beeps and denies further attempts of
authentication.
2. Press [OK].
293
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
3. If the printer requests for a user code, enter a user code.
If you enter a wrong user code, the printer denies further attempts of authentication.
4. Press [OK].
Authentication using the printer or LAN-Fax driver
1. Open the file you want to print on your computer.
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
3. In the [Select Printer] area, select the name of this machine, and then click [Preferences].
4. Click the [Valid Access] tab (PCL printer driver) or check the [User Code] check box. (LANFax driver).
5. Enter the user code using 1 to 8 digits, and then click [OK].
6. Execute a print command.
If an incorrect user code is entered, the job will be canceled automatically (without any error
message).
294
Configuring the Network Settings
Configuring the Network Settings
Click [Network Settings] to display the page for configuring the network settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [Network Status], [IPv6 Configuration], [Network Application],
[DNS], [Auto E-mail Notification], [SNMP], [SMTP], [POP3], [Internet Fax], and [Wireless].
• Depending on the settings you change, the machine might need to be restarted.
• Depending on the model you are using, some items might not appear.
Network Status Tab
General Status
Item
Description
Ethernet Speed
Shows the type and speed of the network connection.
IPP Printer Name
Shows the name used to identify the machine on the network.
Network Version
Shows the version of the machine's network module (a part of the machine
firmware).
Ethernet MAC Address
Shows the Ethernet MAC address of the machine.
Active Interface
Shows the active communication method.
Wi-Fi Direct IP Address
Shows the IP address of Wi-Fi Direct.
TCP/IP Status
Item
Description
DHCP
Select whether the machine should receive a dynamic IPv4 address
automatically using DHCP. To use DHCP, select [Active]. When enabled,
the items below cannot be configured.
IP Address
Enter the IPv4 address for the machine.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the network.
Gateway
Enter the IPv4 address of the network gateway.
295
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
IPv6 Configuration Tab
IPv6
Item
IPv6
Description
Select whether to enable or disable IPv6. You cannot disable IPv6 using
Web Image Monitor if the machine is currently in use in an IPv6
environment. In this case, use the control panel to disable [IPv6] under
network settings.
When disabled, [DHCP], [Manual Configuration Address], [Prefix Length],
and [Gateway Address] below cannot be configured.
IPv6 Address
Item
Description
DHCP
Select whether or not the machine obtains its IPv6 address from a DHCP
server.
IP Address (DHCP)
Displays the IPv6 address obtained from the DHCP server when [DHCP] is
set to [Active].
Stateless Address
Displays up to four stateless auto addresses.
Gateway Address
Displays the machine's default gateway address.
Link-local Address
Displays the link local address of the machine. The link local address is an
address that is valid only inside the local network (local segment).
Manual Configuration
Address
Enter the machine's IPv6 address. Can contain up to 39 characters.
Prefix Length
Enter the prefix length, using a value between 0 and 128.
Gateway Address
Enter the default gateway's IPv6 address. Can contain up to 39 characters.
Network Application Tab
Scanner Send Setting
Item
E-mail
296
Description
Select to enable the Scan to E-mail feature.
Configuring the Network Settings
Item
Description
Max. E-mail Size
Select the maximum size of scan files that can be attached to an e-mail
message (1 to 5 MB, or no limit).
FTP
Select to enable the Scan to FTP feature.
Folder
Select to enable the Scan to Folder feature.
Network Print Setting
Item
Description
IPP
Select to enable network printing using Internet Print Protocol (via TCP port
631/80).
FTP
Select to enable network printing using an embedded FTP server in the
machine (via TCP port 20/21).
RAW
Select to enable network raw printing.
Port No.
Enter the TCP port number to use for raw printing. The valid range is 1024
to 65535, except 53550 and 49999 (default is 9100).
LPR
Select to enable network printing using LPR/LPD (via TCP port 515).
mDNS Setting
Item
Description
mDNS
Select to enable Multicast DNS (via UDP port 5353). If disabled, the item
below cannot be configured.
Printer Name
Enter the name of the machine. Can contain up to 32 characters.
DNS Tab
DNS
Item
Description
DNS Method
Select whether to specify domain name servers manually or receive DNS
information from the network automatically. When set to [Auto-Obtain
(DHCP)], [Primary DNS Server], [Secondary DNS Server], and [Domain
Name] below become unavailable.
Primary DNS Server
Enter the IPv4 address of the primary DNS.
297
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Description
Secondary DNS Server
Enter the IPv4 address of the secondary DNS.
Domain Name
Enter the IPv4 domain name for the machine. Can contain up to 32
characters.
IPv6 DNS Method
Select whether to specify the domain server manually or have the machine
obtain its DNS information automatically.
When set to [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)], [Primary IPv6 DNS Server],
[Secondary IPv6 DNS Server], and [IPv6 Domain Name] below become
unavailable.
Primary IPv6 DNS
Server
Enter the IPv6 address of the primary IPv6 DNS server. Can contain up to
39 characters.
Secondary IPv6 DNS
Server
Enter the IPv6 address of the secondary IPv6 DNS server. Can contain up
to 39 characters.
IPv6 Domain Name
Enter the IPv6 domain name of the machine. Can contain up to 32
characters.
DNS Resolve Priority
Select whether to give priority to IPv4 or IPv6 for DNS name resolution.
DNS Timeout (seconds)
Enter the number of seconds the machine waits before considering a DNS
request to have timed out (1 to 999 seconds).
Host Name
Enter a host name for the machine. Can contain up to 15 characters.
Auto E-mail Notification Tab
E-mail Notification 1/E-mail Notification 2
Item
298
Description
Display Name
Enter a sender name for notification e-mail. Can contain up to 32
characters.
E-mail Address
Enter the address of the recipient of the alert email. Can contain up to 64
characters.
Paper Misfeed
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if a paper jam occurs.
Out of Paper
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if paper runs out.
Toner Almost Empty
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if toner becomes low.
Configuring the Network Settings
Item
Description
Call Service
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if the machine
requires servicing.
Out of Toner
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if toner runs out.
Cover Open
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if a cover is open.
SNMP Tab
SNMP
Item
SNMP
Description
Select whether to enable the machine to use SNMP services.
Trap
Item
Target Trap
Description
Select whether to enable the machine to send traps to the management host
(NMS).
When disabled, [SNMP Management Host 1] and [SNMP Management
Host 2] below become unavailable.
SNMP Management
Host 1
Enter the IP address or host name of a management host. Can contain up to
64 characters.
SNMP Management
Host 2
Enter the IP address or host name of a management host. Can contain up to
64 characters.
Community
Item
Description
Get Community
Enter the community name to use for authentication of Get requests. Can
contain up to 32 characters.
Trap Community
Enter the community name to use for authentication of Trap requests. Can
contain up to 32 characters.
299
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
System
Item
Description
Location
Enter the location of the machine. The location entered here is displayed on
the main page. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Contact
Enter the contact information of the machine. The contact information
entered here is displayed on the main page. Can contain up to 64
characters.
SMTP Tab
SMTP
Item
Description
Primary SMTP Server
Enter the IP address or host name of the SMTP/POP3 server. Can contain
up to 64 characters.
Port No.
Enter the port number for SMTP (1 to 65535).
Authentication Method
Select an authentication method from the following:
[Anonymous]: The user name and password are not necessary.
[SMTP]: The machine supports NTLM and LOGIN authentication.
[POP before SMTP]: The POP3 server is used for authentication. When
sending e-mails to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server
security level by connecting to the POP server for authentication.
User Name
Enter the user name for logging in to the SMTP server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
Password
Enter the password for logging in to the SMTP server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
Device E-mail Address
Enter the machine’s e-mail address.
This address is used as the sender's address of e-mail messages sent from
this machine, such as notification e-mails. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Server Timeout
(seconds)
300
Enter the number of seconds the machine waits before considering an
SMTP operation to have timed out (1 to 999).
Configuring the Network Settings
Item
Time Zone
Description
Select a time zone according to your geographic location. Selecting a
different time zone may cause transmission date and time to be incorrect for
email sent by the Scan to E-mail function, even when the machine's clock is
set correctly.
POP3 Tab
POP3 Settings
Item
Description
POP3 Server
Enter the IP address or host name of the POP3 server for e-mail reception.
The POP3 server specified here will be used for [POP before SMTP]. Can
contain up to 64 characters.
User Account
Enter the user name for logging in to the POP3 server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
User Password
Enter the password for logging in to the POP3 server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
Authentication
Select an authentication method from the following:
[None]: Password will not be encrypted.
[APOP Authentication]: Password will be encrypted.
[Auto]: Password will be encrypted or not encrypted according to the POP3
server’s settings.
Internet Fax Tab
Item
Description
Internet Fax
Transmission
Select whether to enable or disable the Internet Fax function.
Error Notification Email
Select whether to send a notification e-mail to the sender of the Internet Fax
or not when e-mail reception fails.
The text will include the machine's host name (as set in the DNS settings
page), model name, and contact e-mail address (as set in the administrator
settings page).
301
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Insert System-fixed Text
Description
Select whether to include system-fixed text in the body of the e-mail or not
when sending Internet Faxes.
The text will include the machine's host name (as set in the DNS settings
page), model name, and contact e-mail address (as set in the administrator
settings page).
Automatic POP
Select whether to automatically connect to the POP3 server to check for
new e-mails or not. If this setting is enabled, the connection will be made at
an interval specified in [POP Interval (minutes)].
POP Server: E-mail
Reception Setting
Select whether to leave or delete e-mails in the POP3 server after receiving
them.
[No]: Delete e-mails from the server after receiving them.
[Save E-mail]: Leave e-mails on the server after receiving them.
[Save Only Error Info]: Delete e-mails that are successfully received from
the server only.
POP Interval (minutes)
Specifies how many minutes the machine waits between automatic
connections to the POP3 server to acquire new e-mails (2 to 1440
minutes).
• [Internet Fax] appears only for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
Wireless Tab
Wireless LAN Status
Item
302
Description
Wireless LAN Status
Displays the status of the connection to the wireless LAN.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address.
Communication Mode
Displays the communication mode that the machine is connecting in.
SSID
Displays the SSID of the access point that the machine is connected to.
Wireless Signal Status
Displays the strength of the wireless signal that is being received.
Wireless
Specifies whether or not to use the wireless LAN.
Configuring the Network Settings
Wireless LAN Settings
Item
SSID
Description
Enter the SSID of the access point.
The SSID can contain up to 32 characters.
When you click [Scan List], a list of available access points is displayed.
You can select the SSID from the list.
Communication Mode
[Infrastructure] is selected by default. Therefore, connect the machine to a
wireless router or access point.
Authentication
Select an authentication method.
Encryption
Select an encryption method.
WPA Passphrase
If [WPA2-PSK] or [Mixed Mode WPA/WPA2] is selected for
[Authentication], enter the WPA encryption key.
WEP Key Length
If [WEP] is selected for [Encryption], select 64 bits or 128 bits for the length
of the encryption key.
WEP Transmit Key ID
Select an ID number to identify each WEP key in case multiple WEP
connections are configured.
WEP Key Format
Select a format for entering the WEP key.
WEP Key
Enter the WEP key. The number and type of characters you can enter vary
depending on the length and format selected for the key. See the following:
• WEP key length: [64bit], Format: [Hexadecimal]
WEP key max length: 10 characters (0-9, A-F, a-f)
• WEP key length: [64bit], Format: [ASCII]
WEP key max length: 5 characters (0x20-0x7e)
• WEP key length: [128bit], Format: [Hexadecimal]
WEP key max length: 26 characters (0-9, A-F, a-f)
• WEP key length: [128bit], Format: [ASCII]
WEP key max length: 13 characters (0x20-0x7e)
• If you are configuring the connection settings manually, check the SSID, authentication method, or
encryption key of the access point or wireless router in advance.
303
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
Item
SSID
Description
Enter the SSID name.
The SSID can contain up to 32 characters.
WPA Passphrase
304
Enter the passphrase for Wi-Fi Direct connection. You can enter 8 to 32
characters for a passphrase.
Configuring the IPsec Settings
Configuring the IPsec Settings
Click [IPsec Settings] to display the page for configuring the IPsec settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [IPsec Global Settings] and [IPsec Policy List].
• This function is available only when an administrator password is specified.
IPsec Global Settings Tab
Item
Description
IPsec Function
Select whether to enable or disable IPsec.
Default Policy
Select whether to allow for the default IPsec policy.
Broadcast and
Multicast Bypass
Select the services that you do not want to apply IPsec from the following:
All ICMP Bypass
Select whether to apply IPsec to ICMP packets (IPv4 and IPv6) from the
following:
[DHCPv4], [DHCPv6], [SNMP], [mDNS], [NetBIOS], [UDP Port 53550]
[Active]: All ICMP packets will be bypassed without IPsec protection.
"ping" command (echo request and echo reply) is not encapsulated by
IPsec.
[Inactive]: Some ICMP message types will be bypassed without IPsec
protection.
IPsec Policy List Tab
Item
Description
No.
IPsec policy number.
Name
Displays the name of the IPsec policy.
Address Settings
Displays the IP address filter of the IPsec policy as below:
Remote address/Prefix length
Action
Displays the action of the IPsec policy as "Allow", "Drop", or "Require
Security".
305
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Status
Description
Displays the status of the IPsec policy as "Active" or "Inactive".
To configure IPsec policies, select the desired IPsec policy, and then click [Change] to open the "IPsec
Policy Settings" page. The following settings can be made on the "IPsec Policy Settings" page.
IP Policy Settings
Item
Description
No.
Specify a number between 1 and 10 for the IPsec policy. The number you
specify will determine the position of the policy in the IPsec Policy List. Policy
searching is performed according to the order of the list. If the number you
specify is already assigned to another policy, the policy you are
configuring will take the number of the earlier policy, and the earlier policy
and any subsequent policies will be renumbered accordingly.
Activity
Select whether to enable or disable the policy.
Name
Enter the name of the policy. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Address Type
Select IPv4 or IPv6 as the type of IP address to be used in IPsec
communication.
Local Address
Displays the IP address of this printer.
Remote Address
Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the device with which to communicate.
Can contain up to 39 characters.
Prefix Length
Enter the prefix length of the Remote Address, using a value between 1 and
128. If this setting is left blank, "32" (IPv4) or "128" (IPv6) will be
automatically selected.
Action
Specify how the IP packets are processed from the following:
• [Allow]: IP packets are both sent and received without IPsec applied to
them.
• [Drop]: IP packets are discarded.
• [Require Security]: IPsec is applied to IP packets that are both sent and
received.
If you have selected [Require Security], you must configure [IPsec Settings]
and [IKE Settings].
306
Configuring the IPsec Settings
IPsec Settings
Item
Encapsulation Type
Description
Specify the encapsulation type from the following:
• [Transport]: Select this mode to secure only the payload section of
each IP packet when communicating with IPsec compliant devices.
• [Tunnel]: Select this mode to secure every section of each IP packet.
We recommend this type for communication between security
gateways (such as VPN devices).
Security Protocol
Select the security protocol from the following:
• [AH]: Establishes secure communication that supports authentication
only.
• [ESP]: Establishes secure communication that supports both
authentication and data encryption.
• [ESP&AH]: Establishes secure communication that supports both data
encryption and authentication of packets, including packet headers.
Note that you cannot specify this protocol when [Tunnel] is selected
for [Encapsulation Type].
Authentication
Algorithm for AH
Specify the authentication algorithm to be applied when [AH] or [ESP&AH]
is selected for [Security Protocol] from the following:
[MD5], [SHA1]
Encryption Algorithm
for ESP
Specify the encryption algorithm to be applied when [ESP] or [ESP&AH] is
selected for [Security Protocol] from the following:
[None], [DES], [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192], [AES-256]
Authentication
Algorithm for ESP
Specify the authentication algorithm to be applied when [ESP] is selected
for [Security Protocol] from the following:
[MD5], [SHA1]
Life Time
Specify the life time of the IPsec SA (Security Association) as a time period
or data volume. The SA will expire when the time period you specify
elapses or the volume of data you specify reaches the volume carried.
If you specify both a time period and a data volume, the SA will expire as
soon as either is reached, and a new SA will then be obtained by
negotiation.
To specify the life time of the SA as a time period, enter a number of
seconds.
To specify the life time of the SA as a data volume, enter a number of KBs.
307
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Item
Key Perfect Forward
Secrecy
Description
Select whether to enable or disable PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy).
IKE Settings
Item
Description
IKE Version
Displays the IKE version.
Encryption Algorithm
Specify the encryption algorithm from the following:
[DES], [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192], [AES-256]
Authentication
Algorithm
Specify the authentication algorithm from the following:
IKE Life Time
Specify the life time of the ISAKMP SA as a time period. Enter a number of
seconds.
IKE Diffie-Hellman
Group
Select the IKE Diffie-Hellman Group to be used in the generation of the IKE
encryption key from the following:
[MD5], [SHA1]
[DH1], [DH2]
308
Pre-Shared Key
Specify the PSK (Pre-Shared Key) to be used for authentication of a
communicating device. Can contain up to 32 characters.
Key Perfect Forward
Secrecy
Select whether to enable or disable PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy).
Printing Lists/Reports
Printing Lists/Reports
Click [Print List/Report] to display the page for printing reports. Then, select an item and click [Print] to
print out information for that item.
Print List/Report
Item
Description
Configuration Page
Prints general information about the machine and its current configuration.
Fax Journal
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs. For
details about automatic fax journal printing, see page 228 "Fax Features
Settings".
Fax TX/RX Standby File Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed,
List
sent, or forwarded.
Quick Dial Destination
List
Prints a list of Quick Dial entries.
Fax Speed Dial
Destination List
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.
Scanner Destination List
Prints a list of scan destinations.
Scanner Journal
Prints a scanner journal for the last 100 Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and
Scan to Folder transmissions.
Maintenance Page
Prints the maintenance page.
• Reports cannot be printed via Web Image Monitor if other jobs are printing. Before printing
reports, confirm that machine is not printing.
• Reports will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray
before printing reports.
309
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
Configuring the Administrator Settings
Click [Administrator Tools] to display the page for configuring the administrator settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [Administrator], [Reset Settings], [Backup Setting], [Restore
Setting], [Set Date/Time], [Energy Saver Mode], and [PCL6 Mode].
Administrator Tab
Administrator Settings
Item
Description
Change Password
Check this to configure the administrator password.
New Password
Enter the new administrator password. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Confirm New Password Enter the same password again, to confirm.
Change E-mail Address Check this to configure the administrator e-mail address.
Administrator E-mail
Address
Enter the administrator e-mail address.
If the machine's e-mail address is not configured in the [SMTP] page, this
address will be used as the sender's address of e-mails sent from this
machine, such as notification e-mails and Internet Faxes. Can contain up to
64 characters.
• Administrator e-mail address can only be configured with SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
Reset Settings Tab
Reset Settings
Item
310
Description
Reset Network Settings
Select to restore settings configured under the [Network Settings] and
[Administrator Tools].
Reset Menu Settings
Select to restore settings that are not related to the network to their defaults.
Clear Scan Destination
Select to clear the scan destinations.
Configuring the Administrator Settings
Item
Description
Reset Settings of
Available Functions
Select to clear the user restriction settings.
Clear Address Book
Select to clear the fax destinations.
Reset IPsec Settings
Select to clear the IPsec settings.
• [Reset IPsec Settings] appears only when the administrator password is specified.
Backup Setting Tab
• When sending the machine for repair, it is important that you create backup files in advance. The
machine's settings are returned to the default after repair.
Backup Setting
Item
Back up Network
Settings
Description
Backs up settings configured under the [Network Settings] and
[Administrator Tools].
Note that, however, [Max. E-mail Size] setting under [Network
Application] will not be backed up here; it will be backed up by [Back up
Menu Settings] instead.
Back up Menu Settings
Backs up settings that are not related to the network.
Back up Scan
Destination
Backs up scan destinations to a file.
Back up Settings of
Available Functions
Backs up user restriction settings to a file.
Back up Address Book
Backs up fax destinations to a file.
Back up IPsec Settings
Backs up the IPsec settings to a file.
Follow the procedure below to create configuration backup files.
1. Select the radio button for the type of data you wish to back up.
2. Enter the administrator password if required.
311
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [Save] in the confirmation dialog box.
5. Navigate to the location to save the backup file.
6. Specify a name for the file, and click [Save].
• [Back up IPsec Settings] appears only when the administrator password is specified.
Restore Setting Tab
• When the machine is returned from repair, it is important that you restore the machine's settings
from the backup files. The machine's settings are returned to the default after repair.
Restore Setting
Item
File to Restore
Description
Enter the path and name of the file to restore, or click [Browse...] to select
the file.
Follow the procedure below to restore configuration backup files.
1. Click [Browse...].
2. Navigate to the directory containing the backup file to restore.
3. Select the backup file, and click [Open].
4. Enter the administrator password if required.
5. Click [OK].
• If the settings are not restored successfully, an error message appears. Try again to restore the file
completely.
Set Date/Time Tab
Set Date
Item
312
Description
Year
Enter the current year (2000 to 2099).
Month
Enter the current month (1 to 12).
Configuring the Administrator Settings
Item
Description
Day
Enter the current day (1 to 31).
Date Format
Select the date format from [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or
[YYYY/MM/DD].
Set Time
Item
Description
Time Format
Select 24- or 12-hour time format.
Time (AM/PM)
Select [AM] or [PM] if 12-hour time format is selected.
hour (0-23)
Enter the current hour if 24-hour time format is selected (0-23).
hour (1-12)
Enter the current hour if 12-hour time format is selected (1-12).
min. (0-59)
Enter the current minute (0-59).
Energy Saver Mode Tab
Energy Saver Mode
Item
Energy Saver Mode 1
Description
Select [Active] to set the machine to enter Energy Saver mode 1 if the
machine has been idle for about 30 seconds.
It takes less time to recover from Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off
state or Energy Saver mode 2, but power consumption is higher in Energy
Saver mode 1 than in Energy Saver mode 2.
Energy Saver Mode 2
Select [Active] to set the machine to enter Energy Saver mode 2 after the
period of time specified for [Waiting Time (1 min. - 240 min.)] is passed (1
to 240 minutes).
The machine consumes less power in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy
Saver mode 1, but it takes longer to recover from Energy Saver mode 2
than from Energy Saver mode 1.
• The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job, prints a received fax,
or when the [Copy], [Color Start], or [B&W Start] key is pressed.
313
8. Configuring the Machine Using Utilities
• Regardless of the settings for Energy Saver mode 1 or Energy Saver mode 2, the machine enters
Energy Saver mode 1 after being idle for 10 minutes.
PCL6 Mode
PCL6 Mode
Item
PCL6 Mode
314
Description
Set this to [Universal] when using the Universal Driver and to [SP C260/
C262] when using the normal driver.
9. Maintaining the Machine
This chapter describes how to replace supplies and how to clean the machine.
Replacing the Print Cartridge
• Store print cartridge in a cool dark place.
• Actual printable numbers vary depending on image volume and density, number of pages printed
at a time, paper type and size, and environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity.
Toner quality degrades over time. Early replacement of the print cartridge might be necessary.
Therefore, we recommend you always keep a new print cartridge ready.
• For good print quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
• The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use
of parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
• If you try to print while the message "Replacement Required: Toner Cartridge (XX)" is being
displayed, another message "Continue printing?" may appear. If this happens, you can print a few
pages by pressing [Yes], although the print quality may be lower. Replace the toner as soon as
possible. If the message "Continue printing?" does not appear, replace the toner immediately.
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small objects to fall inside the machine.
• Do not expose the print cartridge without its cover to direct sunlight for a long time.
• Do not touch the print cartridge's photo conductor unit.
DUE254
• Do not touch the ID chip on the side of the print cartridge as indicated in the illustration below.
315
9. Maintaining the Machine
DUE255
• When removing print cartridges, be careful not to touch the laser scanning unit under the upper
cover (the position shown by the arrow in the illustration below).
DUE256
• If cyan, magenta, or yellow toner runs out, you can print in black and white using just the black
toner. Change the color mode setting to Black and White using the machine's driver.
• If black toner runs out, you cannot print in black and white or color until the black print cartridge is
replaced.
Messages on the screen
• Replace the indicated print cartridge when any of the following messages appear on the
screen:
"Replacement Required: Toner Cartridge" (XX)
("XX" indicates the toner color)
• Prepare the indicated print cartridge when any of the following messages appear on the
screen:
"Replace Required Soon: Toner Cartridge" (XX)
("XX" indicates the toner color)
316
Replacing the Print Cartridge
1. Pull up the lever on the top cover, and then carefully raise the top cover.
DUE257
2. Carefully lift out the print cartridge vertically, holding its center.
From the rear, the print cartridges are installed in the order of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y),
and black (K).
DUE259
• Do not shake the removed print cartridge. Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak.
• Place the old print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace.
• The toner color is indicated by the label on each print cartridge.
3. Take the new print cartridge out of the box, and then take it out of the plastic bag.
DUE260
317
9. Maintaining the Machine
4. Hold the print cartridge and shake it from side to side five or six times.
DUE261
Even distribution of toner within the bottle improves print quality.
5. Remove the protective cover from the print cartridge.
DUE262
6. Check the toner color and corresponding location, and then carefully insert the print
cartridge vertically.
DUE263
318
Replacing the Print Cartridge
7. Using both hands, hold the center of the top cover and close the cover carefully.
DUE264
8. Attach the protective cover you removed in Step 5 on the old print cartridge. Then, put the
old print cartridge into the bag, and then put it into the box.
DUE265
• Make sure to cover the old print cartridge with the protective cover for recycling and environmental
purposes.
•
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you
discard it by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
•
(mainly North America)
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you
can recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.
319
9. Maintaining the Machine
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle
Messages on the screen
• Replace the waste toner bottle when the following message appears on the screen:
"Replacement Required: Waste Toner Bottle"
• Prepare a waste toner bottle when the following message appears on the screen:
"Replace Required Soon: Waste Toner Bottle"
• Waste toner bottles cannot be reused.
• When removing the waste toner bottle, make sure not to tilt it.
• Make sure the transfer unit is installed. If the transfer unit is not installed, install it before turning on
the power.
• Before removing the waste toner bottle from the machine, spread paper or similar material around
the area to keep toner from dirtying your workspace.
1. Pull the front cover open lever and then carefully lower the front cover.
2
1
DUE227
2. Slide both levers on the front cover forward.
DUE266
320
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle
3. Holding the tabs on both ends of the transfer unit, tilt it backwards and lift it up.
2
1
DUE267
4. Holding the handle at the center of the waste toner bottle, carefully pull it partially out
without tilting it.
DUE268
5. Pull the waste toner bottle halfway out, hold the bottle firmly, and then pull it straight out.
DUE269
321
9. Maintaining the Machine
DUE270
To prevent the waste toner bottle from coming into contact with the intermediate transfer unit (the
position shown by the arrow in the illustration below), do not lift the bottle while pulling it out.
DUE271
6. Close the bottle cap.
DUE272
322
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle
DUE273
7. Holding the center of the new waste toner bottle, carefully insert it halfway into the
machine body.
Leave the bottle cap open.
DUE274
To prevent the waste toner bottle from coming into contact with the intermediate transfer unit (the
position shown by the arrow in the illustration below), do not lift the bottle while inserting it.
DUE275
8. Push in the waste toner bottle until it clicks.
Pressing the handle at the center, push the bottle all the way in.
323
9. Maintaining the Machine
DUE276
9. Place the transfer unit on the front cover. Slide the transfer unit along the guide rails into
the machine.
DUE277
10. When it stops, push on the PUSH mark until it clicks.
DUE278
324
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle
11. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
DUE229
When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly.
• For easy replacement, we recommend you purchase and store extra waste toner bottles.
• Comply with the waste toner bottle recycling program, whereby used waste toner bottles are
collected for processing. For details, ask your sales or service representative.
325
9. Maintaining the Machine
Replacing a Component
Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Unit
• This function is available for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw only.
If the Alert indicator on the control panel lights up and the "Replacement Required: Intermediate Transfer
Unit" message appears on the display, contact your sales or service representative.
Replacing the Fusing Unit and Transfer Roller
• This function is available for SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw only.
If the Alert indicator on the control panel lights up and the "Replacement Required: Transfer Roller" or
"Replacement Required: Fusing Unit" message appears on the display, contact your sales or service
representative.
326
Cautions When Cleaning
Cautions When Cleaning
Clean the machine periodically to maintain high print quality.
Dry wipe the exterior with a soft cloth. If dry wiping is not sufficient, wipe with a soft, damp cloth that has
been wrung out thoroughly. If you still cannot remove the stain or grime, use a neutral detergent, wipe
over the area with a thoroughly-wrung damp cloth, and then dry wipe the area and allow it to dry.
• To avoid deformation, discoloration, or cracking, do not use volatile chemicals, such as benzine
and thinner, or spray insecticide on the machine.
• If there is dust or grime inside the machine, wipe with a clean, dry cloth.
• You must disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year. Clean away any dust and
grime from the plug and outlet before reconnecting. Accumulated dust and grime pose a fire
hazard.
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small objects to fall inside the machine.
327
9. Maintaining the Machine
Cleaning the Toner Density Sensor
Clean the toner density sensor when the following message appears on the control panel.
"Density Sensor Require Cleaning"
1. Pull up the lever on the top cover, and then carefully raise the top cover.
Make sure that the ADF is closed.
DUE257
2. Remove the rearmost print cartridge.
DUE259
3. Slide the toner density sensor lever once to the left.
DUE279
328
Cleaning the Toner Density Sensor
4. Carefully insert the print cartridge removed in Step 2 vertically.
DUE263
5. Using both hands, hold the center of the top cover and close the cover carefully. Be
careful not to trap your fingers.
DUE264
329
9. Maintaining the Machine
Cleaning the Friction Pad and Paper Feed
Roller
If the friction pad or paper feed roller is dirty, a multi-feed or misfeed might occur. In this case, clean the
friction pad and paper feed roller as follows:
• Do not use chemical cleaning fluids or organic solvents such as thinner or benzine.
1. Turn off the power.
2. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Remove all the cables from the machine.
3. Pull out Tray 1 carefully with both hands.
DUE214
Place the tray on a flat surface. If there is paper in the tray, remove it.
4. Wipe the friction pads with a damp cloth.
DUE280
330
Cleaning the Friction Pad and Paper Feed Roller
5. Wipe the rubber part of the roller with a soft damp cloth. After that, wipe it with a dry
cloth to remove the moisture.
DUE281
6. Push the metal plate down until it clicks.
DUE215
7. Reload the removed paper into the tray, and then push the tray carefully into the machine
until it clicks into place.
DUE220
8. Insert the plug of the power cord into the wall socket securely. Connect all the interface
cables that were removed.
9. Turn on the power.
331
9. Maintaining the Machine
• If jams or multi-sheet feeds occur after cleaning the friction pad, contact your sales or service
representative.
• If the optional Tray 2 is installed, clean its friction pad and paper feed roller in the same way as
you did for Tray 1.
332
Cleaning the Registration Roller and Paper Tray
Cleaning the Registration Roller and Paper
Tray
The registration roller and paper tray can become dirty with paper dust if you print to non-standard
paper.
Clean the registration roller if white dots appear on prints.
• Do not use chemical cleaning fluids or organic solvents such as thinner or benzine.
• Do not touch the transfer roller (as shown below).
DUE282
1. Turn off the power.
2. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Remove all the cables from the machine.
3. Pull out Tray 1 carefully with both hands.
DUE214
Place the tray on a flat surface. If there is paper in the tray, remove it.
333
9. Maintaining the Machine
4. Wipe the inside of the paper tray with a cloth.
DUE283
5. Push the metal plate down until it clicks.
DUE215
6. Reload the removed paper into the tray, and then push the tray carefully into the machine
until it clicks.
DUE220
334
Cleaning the Registration Roller and Paper Tray
7. Pull the front cover open lever and then carefully lower the front cover.
2
1
DUE227
Be sure to set the registration roller in the position shown by the arrow in the illustration below.
DUE284
Clean the registration roller if prints are smeared after a paper jam is cleared.
8. Clean the registration roller by applying a soft damp cloth while turning it.
9. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
DUE229
When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly.
10. Plug in the power cord securely. Connect all the cables that were removed.
11. Turn on the power.
335
9. Maintaining the Machine
Cleaning the Exposure Glass
1. Lift the ADF.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
2. Clean the parts indicated with arrows with a soft damp cloth and then wipe the same
parts with a dry cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
DUE285
336
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder
Cleaning the Auto Document Feeder
1. Lift the ADF.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
2. Clean the parts indicated with arrows with a soft damp cloth and then wipe the same
parts with a dry cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
DAC005
When using SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw, proceed to Step 3.
3. Close the ADF.
4. Open the ADF cover.
2
1
DUE321
337
9. Maintaining the Machine
5. Clean the parts indicated below.
DUE322
6. Close the ADF cover.
338
Moving and Transporting the Machine
Moving and Transporting the Machine
This section provides cautions that you must follow when moving the machine both short and long
distances.
Repack the machine in its original packing materials when moving it over a long distance.
• Be sure to disconnect all cables from the machine before transporting it.
• The machine is a precision piece of machinery. Be sure to handle it carefully when moving it.
• Make sure to move the machine horizontally. Take extra caution when carrying the machine up or
down stairs.
• If Tray 2 is installed, remove it from the machine, and move them separately.
• Do not remove the print cartridge when moving the machine.
• Be sure to hold the machine level while carrying it. To prevent toner from spilling, move the
machine carefully.
• Keep the machine away from salt-bearing air and corrosive gases. Also, do not install the machine
in places where chemical reactions are likely (laboratories, etc.), as doing so will cause the
machine to malfunction.
Ventilation
When you use this machine in a confined space without good ventilation for a long time or print
large quantities, you might detect an odd smell.
This might cause the output paper to also have an odd smell.
When you detect an odd smell, regularly ventilate in order to keep the workplace comfortable.
• Set up the machine so that it does not directly ventilate towards people.
• Ventilation should be more than 30 m3/hr/person.
New machine smell
When a machine is new, it might have a unique smell. This smell will subside in about one week.
When you detect an odd smell, sufficiently ventilate and circulate the air in the room.
1. Be sure to check the following points:
• The power switch is turned off.
• The power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.
• All other cables are unplugged from the machine.
2. If Tray 2 is installed, remove it.
339
9. Maintaining the Machine
3. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides of the machine, and then move it
horizontally to the place where you want to use it.
DUE287
4. If you have removed Tray 2, reinstall it.
• To move the machine over a long distance, pack it well and empty all the paper trays. Take care
not to tip or tilt the machine during transit.
• Toner might spill inside the machine if the machine is not kept level during transit.
• For more information about moving the machine, contact your sales or service representative.
Disposal
Ask your sales or service representative for information about correct disposal of this machine.
Where to Inquire
Contact your sales or service representative for further information about the topics included in this
manual or to inquire about other topics not included in this manual.
340
10. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions for error messages and other problems.
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Messages are listed in alphabetical order in the table below.
"X" indicates a number in an error code that appear differently depending on a specific situation.
• If the alert indicator lights up continuously or flashes, press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen
and check the displayed message.
Message
2XXX14
Causes
The machine was not able to
print the received fax, or the
machine's memory reached
capacity while receiving a fax
because the document was too
large.
Solutions
• The paper tray was empty. Load
paper in the paper tray. See page 48
"Loading Paper".
• The paper tray did not contain A4,
Letter, or Legal size paper. Load valid
size paper in the tray, and configure
the paper size settings under [Paper
Settings] accordingly.
• A cover or tray was open. Close the
cover or tray.
• There was a paper jam. Remove the
jammed paper. See page 351
"Removing Paper Jams".
• A print cartridge was empty. Replace
the print cartridge. See page 315
"Replacing the Print Cartridge".
• The received fax was too large. Ask
the sender to resend the document in
parts as several smaller individual
faxes, or to send at a lower
resolution.
341
10. Troubleshooting
Message
ADF Original
Misfeed
Causes
An original has been jammed
inside the ADF.
Open ADF Cover
and remove paper.
Available: IDCard
Copy
A4 or 8 1/2
×11/A5 /A6
ID card copy could not be
performed because the tray
does not contain the valid size
paper, which are A4, Letter,
A5, or A6 size.
2-sided copy could not be
performed because the tray
A4/B5/LG/LT/EXE does not contain the valid size
paper, which are A4, B5, Letter,
8×13/8.25×13/8.5
Legal, Executive, 8 × 13 inches,
×13/16K
81/2 × 13 inches, Folio, or
16K.
Tray 1 or Tray 2
Busy
342
• Remove jammed originals, and then
place them again. See page 351
"Removing Paper Jams" and
page 363 "Paper Feed Problems".
• Check the originals are suitable for
scanning. See page 77 "Placing
Originals".
Available: 2 Sided
Copy
Available: 2 Sided
Copy
Solutions
• Set the machine to print copies using
the A4 or Letter size paper in the
[Select Paper] setting. See page 221
"Copier Features Settings".
• Specify the A4, Letter, A5, or A6 size
paper for the tray selected for printing
copies. See page 250 "Paper
Settings".
• Select the tray containing the A4, B5,
Letter, Legal, or Executive size paper
(other than the bypass tray) in the
[Select Paper] setting. See page 221
"Copier Features Settings".
• Specify the A4, B5, Letter, Legal,
Executive, 8 × 13 inches, 81/2 × 13
inches, Folio, or 16K size for the tray
selected for printing copies. See
page 250 "Paper Settings".
2-sided copy could not be
performed because paper is
specified to be fed from the
bypass tray.
Specify a setting other than [Bypass Tray]
for the [Select Paper] setting. See
page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
Fax transmission could not be
completed because the
destination's line was busy.
Wait for a while and send the fax again.
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Causes
Cannot Copy This
Setting
Solutions
Combined copying could not be
performed because the tray
Combine.: 2 page on does not contain the valid size
paper, which are A4, Letter, or
1 / 4 page on 1
Legal size.
• Set the machine to print copies using
the A4, Letter, or Legal size paper in
the [Select Paper] setting. See
page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
Cannot copy.
• Use the ADF, even when copying a
single sheet.
Set original to ADF.
Combined copying could not be
performed because the originals
were not placed in the ADF.
• Specify the A4, Letter, or Legal size
paper for the tray selected for printing
copies. See page 250 "Paper
Settings".
• If you need to use the exposure glass,
select [Off] or [Manual 2Sd Scan
Mode] in [Duplex/Combine] under
[Copier Features], and then try again.
See page 221 "Copier Features
Settings".
Check Paper Size
The paper size set for the
Press [FormFeed] to begin printing, or
document differs from the size of press [JobReset] to cancel the job.
the paper in the indicated tray.
Check Paper Type
The paper type set for the
document differs from the type
of the paper in the indicated
tray.
Connection Failed
The line could not be connected
correctly.
Press [FormFeed] to begin printing, or
press [JobReset] to cancel the job.
• Confirm that the telephone line is
properly connected to the machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line from
the machine, and connect a standard
telephone in its place. Confirm that
you can make calls using the
telephone. If you cannot make calls
this way, contact your telephone
company.
Cover open
A cover is open.
Close the cover completely.
Density Sensor
Require Cleaning
The machine failed to adjust
color registration.
Clean the toner density sensor. See
page 328 "Cleaning the Toner Density
Sensor".
343
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Dial Failed
Causes
The fax could not be sent.
Solutions
• Confirm that the fax number you
dialed is correct.
• Confirm that the destination is a fax
machine.
• Confirm that the line is not busy.
• You may need to insert a pause
between dial digits. Press [Redial]
after, for example, the area code.
• Check that [PSTN / PBX] in
[Administrator Tools] has been
specified in accordance with the
telephone line in use. See page 255
"Administrator Tools Settings".
Exceeded Maximum
Email Size
The scan file exceeds the size
limit for files that can be sent
through e-mail.
• Configure [Resolution] under [Scan
Settings] to reduce the scanning
resolution. See page 226 "Scanner
Features Settings".
• Configure [Max. E-mail Size] under
[Scan Settings] to increase the
allowed size. See page 226
"Scanner Features Settings".
Failed to Access File
Press Clear key
Failed to Create File
Press Clear key
344
The Scan to USB function failed
because the machine could not
access the USB flash disk
properly.
Use a USB flash disk that is not passwordor write-protected.
The Scan to USB function failed
because there was not enough
memory on the USB flash disk.
Use a USB flash disk with enough memory.
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
I-Fax POP3 Failed
Causes
Connection to the POP3 server
failed.
Solutions
• Confirm that the network cable is
properly connected to the machine.
• Confirm that the network settings such
as IP address, DNS, and POP3
settings have been configured
properly (make sure that no doublebyte character is used). See
page 295 "Configuring the Network
Settings".
Independent-supply
Toner: X
A non-supported print cartridge
is installed for the indicated
color.
Remove and replace it with a print
cartridge specified by an authorized
dealer.
Internal Misfeed
Paper has been jammed in the
machine.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 351 "Removing Paper Jams".
Memory Overflow
The number of fax jobs in
memory (unsent or unprinted
faxes) has reached maximum,
so new jobs cannot be stored.
Wait until pending jobs have been
transmitted or printed.
Memory Overflow
• The data is too large or
complex to print.
• When performing printing
on Legal size paper under
certain print quality setting,
print data becomes too
large and the job may be
canceled.
• Select [600 × 600 dpi] in
[Resolution] under [Printer Features]
to reduce the size of data. See
page 246 "Printer Features Settings".
• If using the PCL printer driver or DDST
printer driver, set [Gradation:] in
[Print Quality] to [Speed] or
[Standard]. If using the PostScript 3
printer driver, set [Print Quality] in
[Printer Features] to [Standard] or
[High Quality].
345
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Causes
Solutions
Memory Overflow
• If you try to print a Locked
Print file stored in the
machine with the printer
driver's [Gradation:] set to
[Fine] in the [Print Quality]
tab, printing may be
canceled depending on
the machine's current
memory usage.
• Print or delete other Locked Print files
in the machine, and then print the
Locked Print file that the machine
failed to print. Alternately, resend the
Locked Print file to the machine with
[Gradation:] set to [Speed] or
[Standard], and then print the Locked
Print file.
Memory Overflow
• The machine's memory
reached capacity while
scanning the first page of
the original to store a fax
job in memory before
transmission.
Resend the fax in parts as several smaller
individual faxes, or send at a lower
resolution.
• The machine's memory
reached capacity while
storing a fax in memory in
Memory Transmission
mode.
Misfeed: Duplex Unit
Paper has been jammed in the
duplex unit.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 351 "Removing Paper Jams".
Misfeed: Paper Tray
Paper has been jammed in the
paper tray.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 351 "Removing Paper Jams".
Misfeed: Standard
Tray
Paper has been jammed in the
paper exit area.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 351 "Removing Paper Jams".
Misfeed: Tray 1
Paper has been jammed in the
tray 1 paper input area.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 351 "Removing Paper Jams".
Misfeed: Tray 2
Paper has been jammed in the
paper tray.
Remove the jammed paper. See
page 351 "Removing Paper Jams".
Net Communication
Error
Connection with the server was
lost while sending or receiving
data.
Contact the network administrator.
Remove Paper
346
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Causes
Solutions
Network is not Ready A scanned file could not be sent
because the machine has not
received IP address information
from the DHCP server
completely.
Wait until the machine receives the IP
address information completely, and then
try the operation again.
On Hook or Stop key The machine has been off-hook
for an extended period of time.
Put down the handset phone or press the
[Clear/Stop] key.
Open Front Cover
The machine can start printing only if the
fusing unit levers are in the correct
positions for the paper type.
then move Envelope
Lever up/down.
The fusing unit levers are not
positioned correctly.
• To print on an envelope, open the
front cover, and then lower the left
and right levers to the envelope mark.
• To print on paper, open the front
cover, and then raise the left and right
levers to the plain paper mark.
Out of Paper: X
The indicated tray has run out of
paper.
Load paper to the indicated tray. See
page 48 "Loading Paper".
Please Restart
Machine
The machine needs to be
restarted.
Turn off the power, and then turn it back
on.
Remove Paper:
The machine failed to proceed
with the print job, because tray
1 or Tray 2 was specified as the
input tray but paper was set in
the bypass tray.
Remove paper from the bypass tray.
Replace Intermediate
Transfer Belt
The transfer belt is no longer
usable, and must be replaced.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
Replace Required
Soon:
The print cartridge is almost
empty.
Prepare a new print cartridge.
The waste toner bottle needs to
be replaced soon.
Prepare a new waste toner bottle.
Bypass Tray
Toner Cartridge (X)
Replace Required
Soon:
Waste Toner Bottle
347
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Replacement
Required:
Causes
Solutions
The fusing unit is no longer
usable, and must be replaced.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
Paper Feed Roller
The paper feed roller is no
longer usable, and must be
replaced.
Replacement
Required:
The machine has run out of
toner.
Replace the print cartridge. See page 315
"Replacing the Print Cartridge".
The transfer roller is no longer
usable, and must be replaced.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
RX Communication
Error
A reception error occurred, and
the fax could not be received
correctly.
If possible, contact the sender of the fax
and ask them to resend it.
Scan (NW)
Disconnected
A scanned file could not be sent
because the Ethernet cable was
not connected properly.
Reconnect the Ethernet cable properly,
and then try the operation again.
Scan (USB)
Disconnected
The USB cable was
disconnected while scanning
from a computer.
Reconnect the USB cable properly, and
then try the operation again.
Server Connection
Failed
A scanned file could not be sent
because the destination could
not be reached.
Confirm that the destination is registered
correctly, and then try the operation again.
Server Response
Error
An error occurred in
communication with the server
before beginning transmission.
Confirm that the destination is registered
correctly, and then try the operation again.
A fatal hardware error has
occurred, and the machine
cannot function.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
Fusing Unit
Replacement
Required:
Toner Cartridge (X)
Replacement
Required:
Transfer Roller
SCXXX
348
If the problem could not be solved, contact
the network administrator.
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Set Correct Paper
Causes
The tray selected in [Select
Paper Tray] under [Fax
Features] does not contain A4,
Letter, or Legal size paper.
Solutions
While the message is displayed, press [Set
Size]. A menu for changing the paper size
of the current tray appears.
Load A4/Letter/ Legal size paper in the
tray, and then select the corresponding
paper size.
Note that the paper size setting for the tray
under [Paper Settings] will be changed.
See page 250 "Paper Settings".
Set Original to ADF
Cannot use exposure
glass
with set. in [Scan
Size].
Scanning could not be
performed because the originals
were not placed in the ADF,
even though the machine is set
to scan originals larger than
A4/Letter size.
• Use the ADF, even when scanning
A4/Letter or smaller size originals.
• If you need to use the exposure glass,
set A4/Letter or smaller size in [Scan
Size] under [Scan Settings], and then
try again. See page 170 "Specifying
Scan Settings for Scanning".
Sort Copy was
Cancelled
The machine's memory reached
capacity while originals were
being scanned from the ADF to
perform sort copying.
Press [Exit] to print the originals that were
successfully scanned into memory. Then,
copy again the originals left in the ADF.
Setting Error:
The waste toner bottle has been
installed incorrectly.
Reinstall the waste toner bottle. See
page 320 "Replacing the Waste Toner
Bottle".
TX Communication
Error
A transmission error occurred,
and the fax could not be
transmitted correctly.
If the [Auto Redial] setting is enabled, the
machine will redial the number and try
again. If all attempts fail, or if the machine
is in Immediate Transmission mode, the fax
will not be transmitted. Try the operation
again.
Unavailable Paper
Type
2-sided copy could not be
performed because the tray
does not contain the valid type
paper, which is thin, plain,
middle thick, recycled, color,
preprinted or prepunched.
• Specify the tray containing the valid
type paper (other than the bypass
tray) in the [Select Paper] setting. See
page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
Waste Toner Bottle
• Specify the valid paper type for the
tray selected for printing copies. See
page 250 "Paper Settings".
349
10. Troubleshooting
Message
Causes
Unsupported Device
Please Remove
The Scan to USB function failed
because a USB device other
than a USB flash disk or a USB
flash disk with an unsupported
file system was used.
Use a USB flash disk that is compatible
with the Scan to USB function.
Unsupported USB
Hub Please Remove
The Scan to USB function failed
because a USB device other
than a USB flash disk or a USB
flash disk with an unsupported
file system was used.
Use a USB flash disk that is compatible
with the Scan to USB function.
USB Disconnected
The Scan to USB function failed
because the USB flash disk was
removed before the operation
could be completed.
Check that the USB flash disk is securely
inserted in the machine. Do not pull out the
USB flash disk until "Ready" appears on
the display.
The Scan to USB function failed
because there was not enough
memory on the USB flash disk.
Use a USB flash disk with enough memory.
The Scan to USB function failed
because the machine could not
access the USB flash disk
properly.
Use a USB flash disk that is not passwordor write-protected.
Press Clear key
USB Memory
Overflow
Press Clear key
Write Protect
Press Clear key
Solutions
• The message about intermediate transfer unit, fusing unit, and transfer roller appear only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw.
350
Removing Paper Jams
Removing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, one of the following messages appears on the control panel:
• If the alert indicator lights up continuously or flashes, press the [Status] icon on the [Home] screen
and check the displayed message.
Message
Internal Misfeed
Misfeed: Standard Tray
Misfeed: Paper Tray
Reference title
See page 354 "If paper jams inside the fusing
unit".
See page 356 "If paper jams inside a tray".
Misfeed: Tray 1
Misfeed: Tray 2
Misfeed: Duplex Unit
Remove Paper
See page 358 "If paper jams inside the transfer
unit".
ADF Original Misfeed
See page 359 "Removing Scanning Jams".
Open ADF Cover
and Remove paper.
See the section identified by the message and remove the jammed paper accordingly.
Removing Printing Jams
• The inside of this machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labeled " " (indicating a
hot surface).
• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.
• Some of the internal components of this machine might be fragile. When you remove jammed
paper, do not touch the sensors, connectors, LEDs, or other fragile parts that are shown in this
manual. Doing so may cause malfunctions.
For the location of the sensors in the machine and extended options, see the following illustrations.
351
10. Troubleshooting
Main unit
1
2
3
DUE292
1.
DUE288
2.
DUE289
352
Removing Paper Jams
3.
DUE290
Paper feed unit
1
DUE320
1.
DUE291
353
10. Troubleshooting
• Jammed paper may be covered in toner. Be careful not to get toner on your hands or clothes.
• Toner on prints made immediately after clearing a paper jam may be insufficiently fused and may
smudge. Make test prints until smudges no longer appear.
• Do not forcefully remove jammed paper, as it may tear. Torn pieces remaining inside the machine
will cause further jams and possibly damage the machine.
• Paper jam can cause pages to be lost. Check your print job for missing pages and reprint any
pages that did not print out.
If paper jams inside the fusing unit
If paper jams inside the fusing unit, follow the procedure below to remove it.
• Since the temperature around the guide is high, wait for it to cool down before checking for
jammed paper.
1. Pull the front cover open lever and then carefully lower the front cover.
2
1
DUE227
2. Lower the fusing unit lever, and pull out the jammed paper carefully.
DUE228
Do not touch the fusing unit.
354
Removing Paper Jams
DUE243
Pull the paper downward to remove it. Do not pull it upward.
DUE244
If you cannot find the jammed paper, check for it by pulling down the guide.
DUE245
355
10. Troubleshooting
3. Pull up the fusing unit levers.
DUE246
4. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
DUE229
When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly. After closing the cover,
check that the error is cleared.
If paper jams inside a tray
If paper jams in Tray 1 or 2, follow the procedure below to remove it.
1. Pull the front cover open lever and then carefully lower the front cover.
2
1
DUE227
356
Removing Paper Jams
2. Pull out the jammed paper carefully.
DUE247
Do not touch the fusing unit.
DUE243
If paper has jammed inside the transfer unit, holding both sides of the paper, pull the paper
carefully forward and out.
DUE248
357
10. Troubleshooting
3. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
DUE229
When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly. After closing the cover,
check that the error is cleared.
• Do not pull out the paper tray (Tray 1).
• If paper is jammed in Tray 2 but is difficult to locate, pull out Tray 2 to remove it. After removing the
paper, carefully push Tray 2 all the way back inside the machine.
If paper jams inside the transfer unit
If paper jams inside the transfer unit, follow the procedure below to remove it.
1. Pull the front cover open lever and then carefully lower the front cover.
2
1
DUE227
358
Removing Paper Jams
2. Carefully remove any paper that is jammed under the transfer unit.
DUE249
If you cannot find the jammed paper, look inside the machine.
3. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
DUE229
When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly. After closing the cover,
check that the error is cleared.
Removing Scanning Jams
• Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
If a paper jam occurs in the ADF, follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.
359
10. Troubleshooting
1. Open the ADF cover.
DUE250
2. Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it.
Be careful not to pull the original too hard, as it may rip.
DUE251
3. Close the ADF cover and the cover of the input tray for ADF.
DUE252
4. Lift the ADF, and if there is any original remaining in the ADF, gently pull the jammed
paper to remove it.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF. Doing so may damage the tray.
360
Removing Paper Jams
DUE253
5. Close the ADF.
361
10. Troubleshooting
When You Cannot Print Test Page
Possible cause
The power cord, a USB cable, or a
network cable is not connected
correctly.
The port connection is not
established correctly.
Solution
Make sure that the power cord, USB cable, and network
cable are connected correctly. Also confirm that they are not
damaged.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the machine, and then click [Printer
properties].
3. Click the [Ports] tab, and then make sure that the port is
set as a USB or network printer.
362
Paper Feed Problems
Paper Feed Problems
If the machine is operating but paper will not feed or paper jams occur frequently, check the condition of
the machine and paper.
Problem
Paper does not feed smoothly.
Solution
• Use supported types of paper. See page 63 "Supported
Paper".
• Load paper correctly, making sure that the side or end
fences of the paper tray, or the paper guides of the
bypass tray are properly adjusted. See page 48
"Loading Paper".
• If the paper is curled, straighten the paper.
• Take out the paper from tray and fan it well. Then,
reverse the top and bottom of the paper, and put it back
in the tray.
Paper jams occur frequently.
• If there are gaps between the paper and the side or end
fences of the paper tray, or the paper guides of the
bypass tray, adjust the side or end fences of the paper
tray, or the paper guides of the bypass tray to remove the
gaps.
• Avoid printing on both sides of paper when printing
images that contain large solid areas, which consume a
lot of toner.
• Use supported types of paper. See page 63 "Supported
Paper".
• Load paper only as high as the upper limit markings on
the side fence.
• Make sure that the friction pads and paper feed rollers
are clean. See page 330 "Cleaning the Friction Pad and
Paper Feed Roller".
363
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
Multiple sheets of paper are fed at
one time.
Solution
• Fan the paper well before loading. Also make sure that
the edges are even by tapping the stack on a flat surface
such as a desk.
• Make sure that the side or end fences are in the right
position.
• Use supported types of paper. See page 63 "Supported
Paper".
• Load paper only as high as the upper limit markings on
the side fence..
• Make sure that the friction pads and paper feed rollers
are clean.
• Check that paper was not added while there was still
some left in the tray. Only add paper when there is none
left in the tray.
Paper gets wrinkles.
• Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
See page 63 "Supported Paper".
• Paper is too thin. See page 63 "Supported Paper".
• If there are gaps between the paper and the side or end
fences of the paper tray, or the paper guides of the
bypass tray, adjust the side or end fences of the paper
tray, or the paper guides of the bypass tray to remove the
gaps.
• Check that both the left and right fusing unit levers have
been raised to the plain paper mark.
The printed paper is curled.
• Load the paper upside down in the paper tray.
• If the paper curl is severe, take prints from the output tray
more frequently.
• Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
See page 63 "Supported Paper".
• Select [Level 2: Medium] or [Level 3: Strong] in [AntiHumidity Level] under [System Settings]. Note that if you
select [Level 2: Medium] or [Level 3: Strong], the first
print takes longer than subsequent prints.
364
Paper Feed Problems
Problem
Images are not printed in the right
position
Solution
Adjust the front end fence and both side fences to match the
paper size.
See page 48 "Loading Paper".
DAC606
Images are printed diagonally to the
pages.
If there are gaps between the paper and the side or end
fences of the paper tray, or the paper guides of the bypass
tray, adjust the side or end fences of the paper tray, or the
paper guides of the bypass tray to remove the gaps.
DAC572
365
10. Troubleshooting
Print Quality Problems
Checking the Condition of the Machine
If there is a problem with the quality of printing, first check the condition of the machine.
Possible Cause
366
Solution
There is a problem with the
machine's location.
Make sure that the machine is on a level surface. Place the
machine where it will not be subject to vibration or shock.
Unsupported types of paper is used.
Make sure that the paper being used is supported by the
machine. See page 63 "Supported Paper".
The paper type setting is incorrect.
Make sure that the paper type setting of the printer driver
matches the type of paper loaded. See page 61 "Specifying
Paper Type and Paper Size Using the Printer Driver".
A non-genuine print cartridge is
being used.
Refilled or non-genuine print cartridge reduces print quality
and can cause malfunctions. Use genuine print cartridge only.
An old print cartridge is being used.
Print cartridge should be opened before their expiration date
and used within six months of being opened.
The machine is dirty.
See page 315 "Maintaining the Machine", and clean the
machine as required.
Color degradation has occurred.
Color degradation may occur in color printing after the
machine is moved or a large number of pages are printed. In
this case, adjust color registration by executing [Color
Registration] in [System Settings].
Print Quality Problems
Checking the Printer Driver Settings
Problem
The printed image is smudged.
Solution
PCL 5c/6, DDST
On the printer driver's [Paper] tab, select [Bypass Tray] in
the "Input Tray:" list. In the "Paper Type:" list, select a
proper paper type.
PostScript 3
On the printer driver's [Paper/Quality] tab, select
[Bypass Tray] in the "Paper Source" list. In the "Media"
list, select a proper paper type.
Images smudge when rubbed.
(Toner is not fixed.)
PCL 5c/6, DDST
On the printer driver's [Paper] tab, select a proper paper
type in the "Paper Type:" list.
PostScript 3
On the printer driver's [Paper/Quality] tab, select a
proper paper type in the "Media" list.
The printed image is different from
the image on the computer's display.
Only when using PCL 5c/6
When printing graphics, the output
and the screen are different.
To print accurately, specify the printer driver setting to print
without using the graphics command. For details about
specifying the printer driver setting, see the printer driver Help.
Images are cut off, or excess is
printed.
Use the same size paper selected in the application. If you
cannot load paper of the correct size, use the reduction
function to reduce the image, and then print. For details about
the reduction function, see the printer driver Help.
Photo images are coarse.
Use the application's or printer driver's settings to specify a
higher resolution.
On the printer driver's [Print Quality] tab, select [Raster]
in the "Graphics Mode" list.
For details about the printer driver's settings, see the printer
driver Help.
A solid line is printed as a dashed
line or appears blurred.
Change the dithering settings on the printer driver. For details
about the dithering settings, see the printer driver Help.
367
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
Fine lines are fuzzy, of inconsistent
thickness, or do not appear.
Solution
Change the dithering settings on the printer driver. For details
about the dithering settings, see the printer driver Help.
If the problem persists, specify the settings of the application in
which the image was created to change the thickness of the
lines.
368
Printer Problems
Printer Problems
This section describes printing problems and possible solutions.
When You Cannot Print Properly
Problem
An error occurs.
Solution
If an error occurs when printing, change the computer or
printer driver settings.
• Check the printer icon name does not exceed 32
alphanumeric characters. If it does, shorten it.
• Check whether other applications are operating.
Close any other applications, as they may be interfering
with printing. If the problem is not resolved, close
unneeded processes too.
• Check that the latest printer driver is being used.
A print job is canceled.
• Printing on Legal size paper may be canceled, if the
printing is performed with a certain print quality setting. If
using the PCL printer driver or DDST printer driver, set
[Gradation:] in [Print Quality] to [Speed] or [Standard]. If
using the PostScript 3 printer driver, set [Print Quality] to
[Standard] or [High Quality]. For details, see the printer
driver Help.
• If [I/O Timeout] under [System Settings] is set to 15
seconds, increase the time period. A print job may be
canceled if printing is frequently interrupted by data from
other ports, or if printing data is large and takes time for
processing. For details, see page 238 "System Settings".
369
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
A Locked Print file is canceled.
Solution
• The machine already has 5 jobs or 5 MB of Locked Print
data. Print or delete an existing Locked Print file. For
details, see page 89 "Printing Confidential Documents".
• Even if the machine cannot store any more Locked Print
files, the machine holds the new Locked Print file for the
period of time specified in [Locked Print] under [System
Settings] before canceling that file. Within this time, you
can print or delete the new Locked Print file. You can also
print or delete an existing Locked Print file so that the new
Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.
• For details about [Locked Print], see page 238 "System
Settings"
A Locked Print file is canceled.
Only when using PCL 5c/6
The Locked Print file has too many pages or it is too
large.Reduce the number of pages to print, or print with a
lower setting for [Gradation:] in [Print Quality]. For
details, see the printer driver Help.
There is a considerable delay
between the print start command
and actual printing.
• Processing time depends on data volume. High volume
data, such as graphics-heavy documents, take longer to
be processed.
• To speed up printing, reduce the printing resolution using
the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
• The machine is calibrating color. Wait for a while.
Documents are not printed properly
when using a certain application, or
image data is not printed properly.
Some characters are printed faintly
or not printed.
370
Change the print quality settings.
Printer Problems
Problem
Solution
It takes too long to complete the print
job.
• Photographs and other data intensive pages take a long
time to be processed so simply wait when printing such
data.
• Changing the settings with printer driver may help to
speed up printing.
See the printer driver Help.
• The data is so large or complex that it takes a long time
to be processed.
• If "Processing..." is displayed on the screen, the machine
is receiving data. Wait for a while.
• If " "Processing..." is displayed on the screen, the machine
is receiving data. Wait for a while.
• The printer is adjusting the color registration. Wait for a
while.
A printed image is different from the
image on the computer's display.
• When you use some functions, such as enlargement and
reduction, the layout of the image might be different from
that displayed in the computer display.
• Check that the page layout settings are properly
configured in the application.
• Make sure the paper size selected in the printer
properties dialog box matches the size of the paper
loaded. For details, see the printer driver Help.
Images are cut off, or excess pages
are printed.
If you are using paper whose size is smaller than the paper
size selected in the application, use the same size paper
selected in the application. If you cannot load paper of the
correct size, use the reduction function to reduce the image,
and then print.
See the printer driver Help.
371
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
The color of the printout is different
from the color on the computer's
display.
Solution
• The colors made using color toner may be different from
colors displayed on the display due to the difference of
methods to reproduce colors.
Only when using PCL 5c/6, DDST
Color gradation might appear differently if On is selected
for [Economy Color] on the [Print Quality] tab in the
printer driver's dialog box.
See the printer driver Help.
• Turn off the main power, and then turn it back on. If the
color still appears different on the printout, perform the
[Color Registration] under [System Settings]. For details,
see page 238 "System Settings".
If this procedure fails to resolve the problem, contact your
sales or service representative.
Color changes extremely when
adjusted with the printer driver.
Only when using PCL 5c/6, DDST
Do not make extreme settings for the color balance under
the [Print Quality] tab in the printer driver's dialog box.
See the printer driver Help.
Color documents are printed in
black and white.
• The printer driver is not set up for color printing.
See the printer driver Help.
• Some applications print color files in black and white.
372
Printer Problems
When You Cannot Print Clearly
Problem
The whole printout is blurred.
Solution
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has
been stored properly. See page 63 "Supported Paper".
• Select [Level 1: Weak], [Level 2: Medium] or [Level 3:
Strong] in [Anti-Humidity Level] under [System Settings].
Note that if you select [Level 2: Medium] or [Level 3:
Strong], the first print takes longer than subsequent prints.
• If you enable [Toner Saving] under [System Settings],
printing is generally less dense.
• If you select [On] for [Economy Color] in the [Print
Quality] tab (PCL printer driver or DDST printer driver) or
under [Printer Features] (PostScript 3 printer driver), print
will be at lower density. For details, see the printer driver
Help.
• The print cartridge is almost empty. If "Replacement
Required: Toner Cartridge (X)" ("X" indicates the toner
color) appears on the screen, replace the indicated print
cartridge.
• Condensation may have occurred. If rapid change in
temperature or humidity occurs, use this machine only
after it has acclimatized.
The toner is powdery and comes
away from the paper, or the printed
image has a matt appearance.
Toner smears appear on the print
side of the page.
Check if the fusing unit levers are properly set. Pull up the
fusing unit levers.
• The paper setting may not be correct. For example,
although you are using thick paper, the setting for thick
paper may not be specified.
Check the printer driver's paper settings.
See the printer driver Help.
• Check that the paper is not curled or bent. Envelopes can
be curled easily. Flatten out the paper before loading it.
See page 48 "Loading Paper".
373
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
White lines appear.
Solution
The intermediate transfer belt is dirty.
Follow the procedure below to clean the belt:
1. Open the top cover while the power is on.
2. Remove all print cartridges from the printer.
3. Close the top cover with both hands carefully.
DAC607
4. When cleaning finishes, open the top cover and attach
all the print cartridges again.
If this procedure does not resolve the problem, contact your
sales or service representative.
Horizontal lines appear on the
printed paper.
• Impact can cause lines to appear on printed paper and
other malfunctions.
Protect the printer from impact at all times, especially
while it is printing.
• If lines appear on prints, turn the printer off, wait a few
moments, and then turn it back on again. Then, perform
the print job again.
The print color is different from the
color specified.
If a specific color is missing, turn the power switch off and on.
If this does not resolve the problem, contact your sales or
service representative.
Photo images are coarse.
Some applications lower the resolution for making prints.
A color is missing or a printed image
is partially blurred.
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has
been stored properly.
See page 48 "Loading Paper".
• Toner is almost empty. If the following message appears
on the control panel, replace the print cartridge:
"Replacement Required: Toner Cartridge (X)". ("X"
indicates the toner color)
See page 315 "Replacing the Print Cartridge".
• Condensation may have occurred. If rapid change in
temperature or humidity occurs, use this printer only after
it has acclimatized.
Color shift occurs.
Perform the [Color Registration] under [System Settings].
For details, see page 238 "System Settings".
374
Printer Problems
Problem
White spots appear.
Solution
The surrounding registration roller or paper tray can become
dirty with paper dust if you use paper other than standard
paper.
Wipe any paper dust off both the paper tray and registration
roller.
See page 333 "Cleaning the Registration Roller and Paper
Tray".
Colorless dots appear on solid color
printouts.
Change the paper type currently selected in the Paper Type
settings, and then print.
Eg. [Recycled Paper] to [Thin Paper] to [Plain Paper].
See page 57 "Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size Using
the Control Panel".
White streaks or color streaks
appear.
Toner is almost empty. If an error message appears on the
control panel, replace the print cartridge of the color
indicated.
See page 315 "Replacing the Print Cartridge".
The backs of printed sheets are
blemished.
• When removing a jammed sheet, the inside of the printer
may have become dirty. Print several sheets until they
come out clean.
• If document size is larger than paper size, e.g. A4
document on B5 paper, the back of the next printed sheet
may become dirty.
Black gradation is not natural.
Only when using PostScript 3
Select [CMY + K] for [Gray Reproduction] in the printer
driver's dialog box.
See the printer driver Help.
Solid lines are printed as broken
lines.
Only when using PostScript 3
Change the [Dithering] setting in the printer driver's
dialog box.
See the printer driver Help.
375
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
Fine dot patterns do not print.
Solution
Only when using PostScript 3
Change the [Dithering] setting in the printer driver's
dialog box.
See the printer driver Help.
Solid areas, lines or text are shiny or
glossy when created as a mixture of
cyan, magenta, yellow.
Only when using PostScript 3
Select [Black by K] for [Gray Reproduction] in the printer
driver's dialog box.
See the printer driver Help.
Speckling occurs in areas of solid
black print.
Only when using PostScript 3
Select [CMY + K] for [Gray Reproduction] in the printer
driver's dialog box.
See the printer driver Help.
If rubbed with your finger, the print
smears.
The setting of the paper may not be correct. For example,
although thick paper is used, the setting for thick paper may
not be specified.
• Check the paper settings of this printer.
See page 48 "Loading Paper".
• Check the paper settings of the printer driver.
See the printer driver Help.
When Paper Is Not Fed or Ejected Properly
Problem
Prints fall behind the machine when
they are delivered.
376
Solution
Pull up the appropriate stop fence (forward fence for A4/
Letter, rear fence for Legal size prints). See page 17 "Guide to
Components".
Printer Problems
Problem
Prints do not stack properly.
Solution
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has
been stored properly. See page 63 "Supported Paper".
• Select [Level 2: Medium] or [Level 3: Strong] in [AntiHumidity Level] under [System Settings]. Note that if you
select [Level 2: Medium] or [Level 3: Strong], the first
print takes longer than subsequent prints.
• Pull up the appropriate stop fence (forward fence for
A4/Letter, rear fence for Legal size prints). See page 17
"Guide to Components".
The printed paper is curled.
• Load the paper upside down in the paper tray.
• If the paper curl is severe, retrieve prints from the output
tray more frequently.
• The paper being used may be damp. Use paper that has
been stored properly.
• Select [Level 1: Weak], [Level 2: Medium] or [Level 3:
Strong] in [Anti-Humidity Level] under [System Settings].
Note that if you select [Level 2: Medium] or [Level 3:
Strong], the first print takes longer than subsequent prints.
• If you enable [Toner Saving] under [System Settings],
printing is generally less dense.
Printed envelopes come out creased. Check if the fusing unit levers are properly set. Lower the fusing
unit levers.
Other Printing Problems
Problem
The toner has run out and printing
has stopped.
Solution
When the "Continue printing?" message appears on the
control panel, pressing [Yes] allows you to print a few more
pages, but the print quality of those pages may be lower.
377
10. Troubleshooting
Copier Problems
When You Cannot Make Clear Copies
Problem
The printed copy is blank.
Solution
The original is not placed correctly.
When using the exposure glass, place originals copy side
down. When using the ADF, place them copy side up. See
page 77 "Placing Originals".
The wrong original was copied.
If copying from the exposure glass, make sure that there are
no originals in the ADF.
Copied pages do not look the same
as the originals.
Select the correct scan mode according to the type of original.
See page 122 "Specifying Scan Settings for Copying"
Black spots appear when
photocopying a photographic print.
The original may have stuck to the exposure glass due to high
humidity.
Place the original on the exposure glass, and then place two
or three sheets of white paper on top of it. Leave the ADF open
when copying.
A moire pattern is produced.
The original probably has heavily lined or dotted areas.
Switching the setting for image quality between [Photo] and
[Text/Photo] may eliminate the moire pattern.
See page 170 "Specifying Scan Settings for Scanning".
The printed copy is dirty.
• Image density is too high.
Adjust the image density. See page 170 "Specifying
Scan Settings for Scanning".
• Toner on the printed surface is not dry.
Do not touch printed surfaces immediately after copying.
Remove freshly printed sheets one by one, taking care
not to touch printed areas.
• The exposure glass or ADF is dirty. See page 315
"Maintaining the Machine".
• Before placing originals on the exposure glass, make
sure that toner or correction fluid is dry.
378
Copier Problems
Problem
When copying from the exposure
glass, the print area of the copy is
out of alignment with the original.
Solution
Place the original copy side down, making sure that it is
aligned to the rear left corner and pressed flat against the
exposure glass.
When You Cannot Make Copies as Wanted
Problem
Solution
Photocopied pages are not in
correct order.
On the control panel, change the [Sort] setting under copy
settings to collate pages as you require. For details about
[Sort], see page 221 "Copier Features Settings".
Copied pages are too dark or too
light.
Adjust the image density. See page 170 "Specifying Scan
Settings for Scanning".
Cannot make copies with
satisfactory tones.
Adjust the tone in [Color Adjustment] in Copier Features. You
can adjust the intensity of red, green and blue. See page 221
"Copier Features Settings".
379
10. Troubleshooting
Scanner Problems
When You Cannot Browse the Network to Send a Scan File
Problem
The following machine settings may
not be correct:
Solution
Check the settings. See page 295 "Configuring the Network
Settings".
• IP address
• Subnet Mask
When Scanning Is Not Done As Expected
Problem
Solution
The machine does not start scanning. The ADF or its cover is open. Close the ADF or its cover.
The scanned image is dirty.
• The exposure glass or ADF is dirty. See page 315
"Maintaining the Machine".
• Before placing originals on the exposure glass, make
sure that toner or correction fluid is dry.
380
The scanned image is distorted or
out of position.
The original was moved during scanning. Do not move the
original during scanning.
The scanned image is upside down.
The original was placed upside down. Place the original in the
correct orientation. See page 77 "Placing Originals".
The scanned image is blank.
The original was placed with the front and back reversed.
When using the exposure glass, place originals copy side
down. When using the ADF, place originals copy side up. See
page 77 "Placing Originals".
The scanned image is too dark or
too light.
Adjust the image density. See page 170 "Specifying Scan
Settings for Scanning".
The Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or
Scan to Folder function does not
work.
Check if a USB flash disk is inserted into the machine. If a USB
flash disk is inserted, scanning functions other than Scan to
USB are not available from the control panel.
Fax Problems
Fax Problems
When You Cannot Send or Receive Fax Messages As Wanted
Transmission
Problem
Cannot send files.
Causes
Solutions
The telephone line may be
disconnected.
Check if the telephone line is properly
connected to the machine. For details,
see Setup Guide.
The machine cannot accept
a new fax job because there
are 5 unsent faxes in
memory already.
Wait until any of these faxes is
transmitted completely, or use the
[Delete TX Stand.File] function to delete
unnecessary faxes. For details, see
page 228 "Fax Features Settings".
Document appears blank at
the other end.
The original was placed
upside down.
The original was placed upside down.
Place the original in the correct
orientation. See page 77 "Placing
Originals".
Printed or sent images are
spotty.
The exposure glass,
exposure glass, exposure
glass cover, or guide plate
of the ADF is dirty.
Clean them. For details about how to
clean the machine, see page 336
"Cleaning the Exposure Glass". Make
sure ink or correction fluid is dry before
placing originals.
Reception is possible, but
transmission is not.
There are regions and
Contact your sales or service
telephone exchanges where representative.
a dial tone cannot be
detected.
Transmission failed due to
"maximum e-mail size"
error.
If the e-mail size specified
on the machine is too large,
the Internet Fax document
cannot be sent.
Change the setting for [Maximum Email
Size] in [Scan Settings]. For details
about the maximum e-mail size, see
page 226 "Scanner Features Settings".
381
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
Causes
Solutions
When using On Hook Dial,
"Receiving..." appears and
transmission is not allowed.
If the machine fails to detect
the size of the original when
the [B&W Start] key is
pressed, it performs a
receiving operation.
Press [Scan Size] in [Scan Settings],
select the scan size, and then resend the
document.
LAN-Fax Driver does not
work.
The entered login user
name, login password, or
driver encryption key is
incorrect.
Check your login user name, login
password, or driver encryption key,
and then enter them correctly. For
details, contact your administrator.
Reception
Problem
382
Causes
Solutions
Cannot receive files.
The telephone line may be
disconnected.
Check if the telephone line is properly
connected to the machine. For details,
see Setup Guide.
The Receiving File indicator
lights up and the received
document is not printed.
The machine cannot print
because it is out of paper or
toner.
The machine does not print
received fax documents.
[Fax Features] is configured
to store received
documents.
Print the fax documents using Web
browser or the Print Stored RX File
function. For details about printing
received faxes stored in memory,
page 215 "Printing Out Faxes Stored in
Memory" and page 282 "Fax Tab".
The machine failed to print
received fax documents.
The paper has run out.
Load paper into the tray.
• Load paper into the tray.
• Add toner.
• The paper tray does not contain
paper of the right size. Load paper
of the right size in the paper tray.
Fax Problems
Printing
Problem
Causes
Solutions
Print is slanted.
The paper is fed at a slant.
Load the paper correctly. For details
about loading paper, see page 48
"Loading Paper".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The number sheets loaded
in the paper tray exceeds
the capacity of the machine.
Load paper only as high as the upper
limit markings inside the paper tray.
The paper tray's side fence
is set too tightly.
Pinch the fence lightly, and then adjust
its position.
The paper is too thick or too
thin.
Use the recommended paper. For
details about the recommended paper,
see page 63 "Supported Paper".
Printed paper is being used.
Do not load sheets that have already
been copied or printed.
Sheets are sticking together.
Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them. Alternatively, feed the
sheets into the machine one at a time.
Printed copies are together,
resulting in jams.
Sheets are sticking together.
Fan the sheets thoroughly before
loading them. Alternatively, feed the
sheets into the machine one at a time.
Copy paper becomes
creased.
Printed paper is being used.
Do not load sheets that have already
been copied or printed.
The paper is too thin.
Use the recommended paper. For
details about the recommended paper,
see page 63 "Supported Paper".
Edges of sheets are
creased.
You are using a nonrecommended paper.
Use the recommended paper. For
details about the recommended paper,
see page 63 "Supported Paper".
Black lines appear on the
file printed at the
destination.
The exposure glass,
exposure glass, exposure
glass cover, or guide plate
of the ADF is dirty.
Clean the components. For details
about how to clean the machine, see
page 336 "Cleaning the Exposure
Glass".
383
10. Troubleshooting
Problem
The background of received
images appears dirty.
Causes
Image density is too high.
Images from the back of the
page appear.
Received image is too light.
Solutions
Adjust the image density. See
page 170 "Specifying Scan Settings for
Scanning".
When using moist, rough, or Use the recommended paper. For
processed paper, areas of
details about the recommended paper,
print may not be fully
see page 63 "Supported Paper".
reproduced.
The image density has been
specified too low.
Increase the image density. For details
about how to change the density, see
page 122 "Adjusting Image Density".
The original of the
transmitted fax was printed
on paper that is too thin.
Ask the sender to reprint the original on
thicker paper, and then fax it again.
When an Error Is Notified via a Report or E-mail
When a report is printed from the machine
Error Report
An Error Report is printed if a document cannot be successfully sent or received.
Possible causes include a problem with the machine or noise on the telephone line. If an error
occurs during transmission, resend the original. If an error occurs during reception, ask the sender
to resend the document.
• If an error happens frequently, contact your service representative.
• The "Page" column gives the total number of pages.
Power Failure Report
• Right after recovery from power failure, the internal battery needs to be sufficiently recharged
to guard against future data loss. Keep the machine plugged in and the power on for about
24 hours after the power loss.
Even if the power is turned off, the contents of the machine memory (for example, programmed
numbers) will not be lost. Lost items will include any fax documents stored in memory using Memory
Transmission or Reception.
If a file deleted from memory, Power Failure Report is automatically printed as soon as the power is
restored.
384
Fax Problems
This report can be used to identify lost files. If a document stored for Memory Transmission was lost,
resend it. If a document received by Memory Reception was lost, ask the sender to resend it.
Error Report (E-mail)
The Error Report (E-mail) is printed by the machine when it is unable to send an Error notification
Email.
For details about the Error notification Email, see page 385 "When an error notification E-mail is
received".
Transmission Error Report
The Transmission Error Report is printed by the machine when it is unable to send a Transmission
Error Mail Notification. For details about the Transmission Error Mail Notification, see page 385
"When an error notification E-mail is received".
When an error notification E-mail is received
Error notification e-mail
The machine sends the Error Notification Email to the sender when it is unable to successfully
receive a particular e-mail message by Internet Fax Function. A "cc" of this notification is also sent
to the administrator's e-mail address if the address has been specified.
• If an incoming Internet Fax from another party bypasses the SMTP server, even if reception is
not successful, an Error Mail Notification is not sent to the sender.
• You can select to send Error Notification Email using Web Image Monitor. For details, see
page 295 "Configuring the Network Settings".
• If Error Notification Email cannot be sent, the Error Report (E-mail) is printed by the machine.
• If an error occurs when an e-mail is received via SMTP, the SMTP server sends an error
notification e-mail to the originator of the document.
Server-generated error e-mail
The transmitting server sends this error e-mail to the originator of an e-mail that has failed to be
transmitted successfully (due to reasons such as specifying an incorrect e-mail address).
• If an Internet Fax transmission bypasses the SMTP server, even if transmission is not successful,
an error e-mail is not sent from the server.
• After a server-generated error e-mail is printed, the first page of the sent document is printed.
Transmission Error Mail Notification
If an e-mail fails to be sent due to a transmission error, the machine sends the Transmission Error
Mail Notification to the sender. If an e-mail could not be sent using the forward function, the
Transmission Error Mail Notification will be sent to the destination e-mail address for forwarding.
If there is an additional user-registered e-mail address or administrator e-mail address, the
Transmission Error Mail Notification will be sent to that address.
385
10. Troubleshooting
• If Transmission Error Mail Notification cannot be sent, Transmission Error Report is printed by
the machine.
Error Code
The table below describes the meaning of error codes that appear under "Results" on Fax Journal or
transmission status report, and what to do when a particular error code appears.
"X" indicates a number in an error code that appear differently depending on the situation.
Error Code
1XXX11
Solution
An original has been jammed inside the ADF while sending a
fax in Immediate Transmission mode.
• Remove jammed originals, and then place them again.
See page 363 "Paper Feed Problems".
• Check the originals are suitable for scanning. See
page 77 "Placing Originals".
1XXX21
The line could not be connected correctly.
• Check if the telephone line is properly connected to the
machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line cord from the machine,
and connect the cord to a telephone. Check if you can
make calls using the telephone. If you cannot make calls
this way, contact your telephone company.
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service
representative.
1XXX22 to 1XXX23
Dial fails when trying to send faxes.
• Check if that the fax number you dialed is correct.
• Check if that the destination is a fax machine.
• Check if that the line is not busy.
• You may need to insert a pause between dial digits. Press
[Redial] after, for example, the area code.
• Check if [PSTN / PBX] under [Administrator Tools] has
been specified properly for your connection method to
the telephone network. See page 255 "Administrator
Tools Settings".
386
Fax Problems
Error Code
1XXX32 to 1XXX84
Solution
An error occurred while sending a fax.
• Check if the telephone line is properly connected to the
machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line cord from the machine,
and connect the cord to a telephone. Check if you can
make calls using the telephone. If you cannot make calls
this way, contact your telephone company.
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service
representative.
2XXX14
The machine was not able to print the received fax, or the
machine's memory reached its capacity while receiving a fax
because the document was too large.
• The paper tray was empty. Load paper in the paper tray.
See page 48 "Loading Paper".
• The tray selected in [Select Paper Tray] under [Fax
Features] did not contain A4, Letter, or Legal size paper.
Load valid size paper in the tray, and configure the
paper size settings under [Paper Settings] accordingly.
• A cover or tray was open. Close the cover or tray.
• There was a paper jam. Remove the jammed paper. See
page 351 "Removing Paper Jams".
• A print cartridge was empty. Replace the print cartridge.
See page 315 "Replacing the Print Cartridge".
• The received fax was too large. Ask the sender to re-send
the document in parts as several smaller faxes, or to send
the fax at a lower resolution.
2XXX32 to 2XXX84
An error occurred while receiving a fax.
• Check if the telephone line is properly connected to the
machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line cord from the machine,
and connect the cord to a telephone. Check if you can
make calls using the telephone. If you cannot make calls
this way, contact your telephone company.
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service
representative.
387
10. Troubleshooting
Error Code
3XXX11
Solution
Connection to the server failed while sending an Internet Fax.
• Check if the network cable is properly connected to the
machine.
• Check if the network settings such as the IP address,
DNS, and SMTP settings have been configured properly
(make sure that no double-byte character is used). See
page 295 "Configuring the Network Settings".
3XXX12
E-mail transmission failed while sending an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the header of the e-mail. Check if
the network settings such as the IP address, DNS, and
SMTP settings have been configured properly (make sure
that no double-byte character is used). See page 295
"Configuring the Network Settings".
3XXX13
E-mail transmission failed while sending an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the part header of the e-mail.
Check if the network settings such as the IP address,
DNS, and SMTP settings have been configured properly
(make sure that no double-byte character is used). See
page 295 "Configuring the Network Settings".
3XXX14
E-mail transmission failed while sending an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the converted TIFF file. Check if the
network settings such as the IP address, DNS, and SMTP
settings have been configured properly (make sure that
no double-byte character is used). See page 295
"Configuring the Network Settings".
3XXX33
The machine memory reached capacity while sending an
Internet Fax.
• The fax was too large. Resend the document in parts as
several smaller faxes, or send the fax at a lower
resolution.
388
Fax Problems
Error Code
4XXX21
Solution
Connection to the server failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• Check if the network cable is properly connected to the
machine.
• Check if the network settings such as the IP address,
DNS, and POP3 settings have been configured properly
(make sure that no double-byte character is used). See
page 295 "Configuring the Network Settings".
4XXX22
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• LIST command to the POP3 server failed. Ask the sender
to check the e-mail settings.
4XXX23
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the header of the e-mail. Ask the
sender to check the e-mail settings.
4XXX24
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the part header of the e-mail. Ask
the sender to check the e-mail settings.
• The e-mail had an invalid Content-Type, or an
unsupported type of file (such as PDF or JPEG) was
received. Ask the sender to check the file type.
4XXX25
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the text part of the part body of the
e-mail. Ask the sender to check the e-mail settings.
4XXX26
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the received TIFF file (which
resulted from a condition not indicated by the error codes
4XXX43 to 4XXX45). Ask the sender to check the TIFF
file.
4XXX42
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the part header of the e-mail. Ask
the sender to check the e-mail settings.
389
10. Troubleshooting
Error Code
4XXX43
Solution
A TIFF file could not be received via Internet Fax properly.
• The compression method of the received TIFF file was
other than MH/MR/MMR. Ask the sender to check the
TIFF file.
4XXX44
A TIFF file could not be received via Internet Fax properly.
• The resolution of the TIFF file was not supported, or the
width of the TIFF file was that of A3 or B4 paper. Ask the
sender to check the TIFF file.
4XXX45
A TIFF file could not be received via Internet Fax properly.
• The format of the TIFF file was other than TIFF-S/F. Ask
the sender to check the TIFF file.
4XXX46
The machine memory reached its capacity while receiving an
Internet Fax.
• The fax was too large. Ask the sender to resend the
document in parts as several smaller faxes, or send at a
lower resolution.
390
Common Problems
Common Problems
This section describes how to troubleshoot common problems that may occur while operating the
machine.
Problem
The machine does not turn on.
Possible cause
The power cord is not
connected properly.
Solution
• Make sure that the power
plug is firmly inserted into
the wall outlet.
• Make sure that the wall
outlet is not defective by
connecting another
working device.
An error message is shown on
the machine's screen.
An error has occurred.
See page 341 "Error and Status
Messages on the Screen".
Pages do not print.
The machine is warming up or
receiving data.
Wait until "Printing..." appears
on the screen. If "Processing..."
is displayed on the screen, the
machine is receiving data.
Pages are not printed.
The interface cable is not
connected correctly.
• Reconnect the cable.
• Check that the interface
cable is the correct type.
Strange noise is heard.
The supplies are not properly
installed.
Confirm that the supplies are
properly installed.
The volume of the sounds
produced by the machine is too
loud.
The volume is set to the high
level.
Adjust the volume of the beep,
ring, speaker, and alarm
sounds. For details, see
page 238 "System Settings".
The volume of the sounds
produced by the machine is too
quiet.
The volume is muted or set to the Adjust the volume of the beep,
low level.
ring, speaker, and alarm
sounds. For details, see
page 238 "System Settings".
The network setting may not
have been configured properly
or the 3G dongle may not be
connected properly.
Using Web Image Monitor,
check the setting and check
whether printing can be
performed.
If the problem persists, contact
your service representative.
391
10. Troubleshooting
• If any of these problems persist, turn off the power, pull out the power cord, and contact your sales
or service representative.
392
11. Configuring Network Settings
Using OS X
This chapter describes how to connect the machine to the network and specify the network settings using
OS X.
Configurations differ according to the communication environment of your system.
Connecting the Machine to a Wired Network
The following procedure is explained using OS X 10.11 as an example.
Using a USB Cable
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
If your computer does not have a CD-ROM drive, download a setup file from our website.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
4. Double-click the [macOS] folder.
5. Double-click the folder of driver you want to install.
6. Follow the instructions in the setup wizard.
7. Click [Close] in the [Summary] dialog box.
8. Start System Preferences.
9. Click [Printers & Scanners].
Check that the machine automatically recognized by plug-and-play appears in the printers list.
10. Click the [+] button.
If [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
11. Click [Default].
12. Select the printer that has "USB" indicated in the [Kind] column.
13. Select the printer you are using from the [Use:] pop-up menu.
14. Click [Add].
15. Quit System Preferences.
Setup is completed.
393
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
Using an Ethernet Cable
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
If your computer does not have a CD-ROM drive, download a setup file from our website.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
4. Double-click the [macOS] folder.
5. Double-click the folder of driver you want to install.
6. Follow the instructions in the setup wizard.
7. Click [Close] in the [Summary] dialog box.
8. Start System Preferences.
9. Click [Printers & Scanners].
10. Click the [+] button.
If [Add Printer or Scanner...] appears, click it.
11. Click [Default].
12. Select the printer that has "Bonjour" indicated in the [Kind] column.
If the printer name is not displayed, select the icon that corresponds to your network environment
(TCP/IP, etc.).
13. Select the printer you are using from the [Use:] pop-up menu.
14. Click [Add].
15. Click [Duplexer] on the [Setting up] screen, and then click [OK].
16. Quit System Preferences.
17. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
18. Press [Network Settings].
19. Press [IPv4 Configuration].
20. Press [IPv4 DHCP].
21. Select [Active] to automatically obtain the IP address or [Inactive] to specify the IP
address manually.
If you have selected [Active], proceed to Step 25.
22. Enter the machine's IPv4 address in [IP Address].
23. Enter the subnet mask in [Subnet Mask].
24. Enter the gateway address in [Gateway Address].
25. Press [OK].
394
Connecting the Machine to a Wired Network
26. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
Setup is completed.
395
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
Connecting the Machine to a Wireless Network
There are four methods for connecting the machine to a wireless network:
• Using the Wi-Fi Setup Wizard
See page 396 "Using the Wi-Fi Setup Wizard".
• Using the WPS button
See page 398 "Using the WPS Button".
• Using a PIN code
See page 399 "Using a PIN Code".
Installing the Printer Driver
The following procedure is explained using OS X 10.11 as an example.
1. Turn on your computer.
2. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
If your computer does not have a CD-ROM drive, download a setup file from our website.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
4. Double-click the [macOS] folder.
5. Double-click the folder of driver you want to install.
6. Follow the instructions in the setup wizard.
7. Click [Close] in the [Summary] dialog box.
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Wizard
A router (access point) is needed to set up a connection.
Checking the SSID and encryption key
The SSID and Encryption key for the router (access point) may be printed on a label affixed to the
router (access point). For details about the SSID and Encryption key, refer to the router (access
point) manual.
Configuring settings using the control panel
Before doing the following procedure, install the printer driver according to the procedure on
page 396 "Installing the Printer Driver".
Make sure the Ethernet cable is not connected to the machine.
1. Check that the router (access point) is working correctly.
396
Connecting the Machine to a Wireless Network
2. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
3. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press [Network Settings].
5. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number
keys, and then press [OK].
A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools
Lock] under [Administrator Tools] menu.
6. Press [Wi-Fi Enable].
7. Press [Enable].
8. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
9. Press the wireless LAN icon.
10. Press [Setup Wizard].
11. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number
keys, and then press the [OK].
A password for accessing the [Wi-Fi Configuration] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools
Lock] under [Administrator Tools] menu.
12. Press the SSID of the router (access point) from the searched SSID list.
13. Enter the encryption key using the number keys, and then press the [Connect].
As the passphrase, you can enter either 8 to 63 ASCII characters (0x20-0x7e) or 64
hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f).
14. Check the result.
• Connection has succeeded:
Configuring the Wi-Fi settings is complete.
• Connection has failed:
Check the configuration for the router (access point), and then try the connection again.
397
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
Using the WPS Button
A router (access point) is needed to set up a connection.
Before doing the following procedure, install the printer driver according to the procedure on page 396
"Installing the Printer Driver".
Make sure the Ethernet cable is not connected to the machine.
1. Check that the router (access point) is working correctly.
2. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
3. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
4. Press [Network Settings].
5. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]
under [Administrator Tools] menu.
6. Press [Wi-Fi Enable].
7. Press [Enable].
8. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
9. Press the wireless LAN icon.
10. Press [WPS].
11. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK].
A password for accessing the [Wi-Fi Configuration] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]
under [Administrator Tools] menu.
12. Press [PBC].
13. Press [Connect].
"Please wait for 2 minutes" appears, and the machine starts to connect in PBC method.
398
Connecting the Machine to a Wireless Network
14. Press the WPS button on the router (access point) within two minutes.
For details about how to use the WPS button, refer to the manuals for the router (access point).
15. Check the result.
• Connection has succeeded:
Press [OK] to return to the screen displayed in Step 12, and then press the [Home] key to
return to the initial screen.
Configuring the Wi-Fi settings is complete.
• Connection has failed:
Press [OK] to return to the screen displayed in Step 12. Check the configuration for the router
(access point), then try the connection again.
Using a PIN Code
A router (access point) is needed to set up a connection. To establish a connection using the PIN code,
use a computer that is connected to the router (access point).
Before doing the following procedure, install the printer driver according to the procedure on page 396
"Installing the Printer Driver".
Make sure the Ethernet cable is not connected to the machine.
1. Check that the router (access point) is working correctly.
2. Open the PIN code configuration window (web page) for the router (access point) on
your computer.
3. Press the [Home] key.
DUE302
4. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
5. Press [Network Settings].
399
11. Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
6. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]
under [Administrator Tools] menu.
7. Press [Wi-Fi Enable].
8. Press [Enable].
9. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
10. Press the wireless LAN icon.
11. Press [WPS].
12. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press [OK].
A password for accessing the [Wi-Fi Configuration] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock]
under [Administrator Tools] menu.
13. Press [PIN].
14. Check the PIN code.
Write down the PIN code in case you might forget it.
15. Enter the machine’s PIN code (8 digits) on the router (access point)’s web page. (The web
page accessed in Step 2)
16. Execute WPS (PIN system) from the router (access point)’s web page.
17. Press [Connect].
"Please wait for 2 minutes" and connecting with PIN method starts.
18. Check the result.
• Connection has succeeded:
Press [OK] to return to the screen displayed in Step 13, and then press the [Home] key to
return to the initial screen.
Configuring the Wi-Fi settings is complete.
• Connection has failed:
Press [OK] to return to the screen displayed in Step 13. Check the configuration for the router
(access point), then try the connection again.
400
12. Appendix
This chapter describes the machine specifications and consumables.
Transmission Using IPsec
For securer communications, this machine supports the IPsec protocol. When applied, IPsec encrypts
data packets at the network layer using shared key encryption. The machine uses encryption key
exchange to create a shared key for both sender and receiver. To achieve even higher security, you can
also renew the shared key on a validity period basis.
• IPsec is not applied to data obtained through DHCP or DNS.
• IPsec compatible operating systems are Windows 7 or later, Windows Server 2008 or later, OS X
10.9 or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 or later. However, some setting items are not supported
depending on the operating system. Make sure the IPsec settings you specify are consistent with the
operating system's IPsec settings.
• If you cannot access Web Image Monitor due to IPsec configuration problems, disable IPsec under
[Administrator Tools] on the control panel, and then access Web Image Monitor.
• For details about specifying the IPsec settings using Web Image Monitor, see page 305
"Configuring the IPsec Settings".
• For details about enabling and disabling IPsec using the control panel, see page 255
"Administrator Tools Settings".
Encryption and Authentication by IPsec
IPsec consists of two main functions: the encryption function, which ensures the confidentiality of data,
and the authentication function, which verifies the sender of the data and the data's integrity. This
machine's IPsec function supports two security protocols: the ESP protocol, which enables both of the
IPsec functions at the same time, and the AH protocol, which enables only the authentication function.
ESP Protocol
The ESP protocol provides secure transmission through both encryption and authentication. This
protocol does not provide header authentication.
• For successful encryption, both the sender and receiver must specify the same encryption
algorithm and encryption key. The encryption algorithm and encryption key are specified
automatically.
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are
specified automatically.
401
12. Appendix
AH Protocol
The AH protocol provides secure transmission through authentication of packets only, including
headers.
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are
specified automatically.
AH Protocol + ESP Protocol
When combined, the ESP and AH protocols provide secure transmission through both encryption
and authentication. These protocols provide header authentication.
• For successful encryption, both the sender and receiver must specify the same encryption
algorithm and encryption key. The encryption algorithm and encryption key are specified
automatically.
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are
specified automatically.
• Some operating systems use the term "Compliance" in place of "Authentication".
Security Association
This machine uses encryption key exchange as the key setting method. With this method, agreements
such as the IPsec algorithm and key must be specified for both sender and receiver. Such agreements
form what is known as an SA (Security Association). IPsec communication is possible only if the
receiver's and sender's SA settings are identical.
The SA settings are auto configured on both parties' machines. However, before the IPsec SA can be
established, the ISAKMP SA (Phase 1) settings must be auto configured. When this is done, the IPsec SA
(Phase 2) settings, which allow actual IPsec transmission, will be auto configured.
Also, for further security, the SA can be periodically auto updated by applying a validity period (time
limit) for its settings. This machine only supports IKEv1 for encryption key exchange.
Multiple settings can be configured in the SA.
Settings 1-10
You can configure ten separate sets of SA details (such as different shared keys and IPsec
algorithms).
IPsec policies are searched through one by one, starting at [No.1].
402
Transmission Using IPsec
Encryption Key Exchange Settings Configuration Flow
This section explains the procedure for specifying encryption key exchange settings.
Machine
PC
1. Set the IPsec settings on Web Image Monitor.
1. Set the same IPsec settings as the machine on
PC.
2. Enable IPsec settings.
2. Enable IPsec settings.
3. Confirm IPsec transmission.
• After configuring IPsec, you can use "ping" command to check if the connection is established
correctly. Because the response is slow during initial key exchange, it may take some time to
confirm that transmission has been established.
• If you cannot access Web Image Monitor due to IPsec configuration problems, disable IPsec under
[Administrator Tools] on the control panel, and then access Web Image Monitor.
• For details about disabling IPsec using the control panel, see page 255 "Administrator Tools
Settings".
Specifying Encryption Key Exchange Settings
• This function is available only when an administrator password is specified.
1. Start the web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [IPsec Settings].
3. Click the [IPsec Policy List] tab.
4. Select the number of the setting you want to modify in the list, and then click [Change].
5. Modify the IPsec related settings as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password, and then click [Apply].
7. Click the [IPsec Global Settings] tab, and then select [Active] in [IPsec Function].
8. If necessary, specify [Default Policy], [Broadcast and Multicast Bypass], and [All ICMP
Bypass] also.
9. Enter the administrator password, and then click [Apply].
403
12. Appendix
• An administrator password can be specified in the [Administrator] tab.
Specifying IPsec Settings on the Computer
Specify exactly the same settings for IPsec SA settings on your computer as are specified for the IPsec
Settings on the machine. Setting methods differ according to the computer's operating system. The
following procedure is based on Windows 7 in an IPv4 environment as an example.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then click
[Administrative Tools].
2. Double-click [Local Security Policy], and then click [IP Security Policies on Local
Computer].
3. In the "Action" menu, click [Create IP Security Policy...].
The IP Security Policy Wizard appears.
4. Click [Next].
5. Enter a security policy name in "Name", and then click [Next].
6. Clear the "Activate the default response rule" check box, and then click [Next].
7. Select "Edit properties", and then click [Finish].
8. In the "General" tab, click [Settings...].
9. In "Authenticate and generate a new key after every", enter the same validity period (in
minutes) that is specified on the machine in [IKE Life Time], and then click [Methods...].
10. Confirm that the Encryption Algorithm ("Encryption"), Hash Algorithm ("Integrity"), and
IKE Diffie-Hellman Group ("Diffie-Hellman Group") settings in "Security method
preference order" all match those specified on the machine in [IKE Settings].
If the settings are not displayed, click [Add...].
11. Click [OK] twice.
12. Click [Add...] in the "Rules" tab.
The Security Rule Wizard appears.
13. Click [Next].
14. Select "This rule does not specify a tunnel", and then click [Next].
15. Select the type of network for IPsec, and then click [Next].
16. Click [Add...] in the IP Filter List.
17. In [Name], enter an IP Filter name, and then click [Add...].
The IP Filter Wizard appears.
18. Click [Next].
404
Transmission Using IPsec
19. In [Description:], enter a name or a detailed explanation of the IP filter, and then click
[Next].
You may click [Next] and proceed to the next step without entering any information in this field.
20. Select "My IP Address" in "Source address", and then click [Next].
21. Select "A specific IP Address or Subnet" in "Destination address", enter the machine's IP
address, and then click [Next].
22. For the IPsec protocol type, select "Any", and then click [Next].
23. Click [Finish], and then click [OK].
24. Select the IP filter that you have just created, and then click [Next].
25. Click [Add...] in the Filter Action.
The Filter Action Wizard appears.
26. Click [Next].
27. In [Name], enter a Filter Action name, and then click [Next].
28. Select "Negotiate security", and then click [Next].
29. Select one of options for computers allowed to communicate with, and then click [Next].
30. Select "Custom" and click [Settings...].
31. When [ESP] is selected for the machine in [Security Protocol] under [IPsec Settings], select
[Data integrity and encryption (ESP)], and configure the following settings:
Set the value of [Integrity algorithm] to the same value as the [Authentication Algorithm for ESP]
specified on the machine.
Set the value of [Encryption algorithm] to the same value as the [Encryption Algorithm for ESP]
specified on the machine.
32. When [AH] is selected for the machine in [Security Protocol] under [IPsec Settings], select
[Data and address integrity without encryption (AH)], and configure the following
settings:
Set the value of [Integrity algorithm] to the same value as the [Authentication Algorithm for AH]
specified on the machine.
Clear the [Data integrity and encryption (ESP)] check box.
33. When [ESP&AH] is selected for the machine in [Security Protocol] under [IPsec Settings],
select [Data and address integrity without encryption (AH)], and configure the following
settings:
Set the value of [Integrity algorithm] under [Data and address integrity without encryption (AH)] to
the same value as [Authentication Algorithm for AH] specified on the machine.
Set the value of [Encryption algorithm] under [Data integrity and encryption (ESP)] to the same
value as [Encryption Algorithm for ESP] specified on the machine.
405
12. Appendix
34. In the Session key settings, select "Generate a new key every", and enter the same
validity period (in [Seconds] or [Kbytes]) as that specified for [Life Time] on the machine.
35. Click [OK], and then click [Next].
36. Click [Finish].
If you are using IPv6, you must repeat this procedure from Step 12 and specify ICMPv6 as an
exception. When you reach Step 22, select [58] as the protocol number for the "Other" target
protocol type, and then set [Negotiate security] to [Permit].
37. Select the filter action that you have just created, and then click [Next].
38. Select one of options for an authentication method, and then click [Next].
39. Click [Finish], and then click [OK] twice.
The new IP security policy (IPsec settings) is specified.
40. Select the security policy that you have just created, right click on it, and then click
[Assign].
IPsec settings on the computer are enabled.
• To disable the computer's IPsec settings, select the security policy, right click, and then click [Unassign].
Enabling and Disabling IPsec Using the Control Panel
• This function is available only when an administrator password is specified.
1. Press the [Setting] icon on the [Home] screen.
2. Press [Administrator Tools].
3. Press [IPsec].
4. Press [Active] or [Inactive].
• A password for accessing the [Administrator Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
For details about [Admin. Tools Lock], see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• You can press [Exit] to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
406
Notes About the Toner
Notes About the Toner
• Proper operation cannot be guaranteed if any third-party toner is used.
• Depending on printing conditions, there are cases where the printer cannot print the number of
sheets indicated in the specifications.
• Replace the print cartridge if the printed image suddenly becomes pale or blurred.
• When operating the machine for the first time, use the print cartridge supplied with this machine. If
this cartridge is not initially used, the following problems may occur:
• "Replace Required Soon:" Toner Cartridge (XX) will be displayed before the toner runs out.
• "Replacement Required:" Toner Cartridge (XX) will be displayed when the toner runs out, but
instead the printed image suddenly becomes pale or blurred.
• The lifetime of the photo conductor, which is built into the print cartridge, is taken into account in
displaying "Replace Required Soon:" Toner Cartridge (XX). If the photo conductor stops working
before the toner runs out, "Replace Required Soon:" Toner Cartridge (XX) may be displayed.
407
12. Appendix
Specifications of the Machine
This section lists the machine's specifications.
• We have obtained each author's permission for the use of applications including open-source
software applications. For details about the copyright information for these software applications,
see "OSS.pdf" on the CD-ROM supplied with the machine.
General Function Specifications
Item
Description
Configuration
Desktop
Print process
Laser electrostatic transfer
Maximum paper size for scanning
using the exposure glass
A4, Letter (81/2 × 11 inches)
Maximum paper size for scanning
using the ADF
Legal (81/2 × 14 inches)
Maximum paper size for printing
Legal (81/2 × 14 inches)
Warm-up time (23 °C, 71.6 °F)
30 seconds or less
Paper sizes
For details, see page 63 "Supported Paper".
Paper type
For details, see page 63 "Supported Paper".
Paper output capacity (80 g/m2, 20
lb)
150 sheets
Paper input capacity (80 g/m2, 20
lb)
• Tray 1
250 sheets
• Tray 2
500 sheets
• Bypass tray
1 sheet
408
Specifications of the Machine
Item
ADF capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Description
• SP C260SFNw
35 sheets
• SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw
50 sheets
Memory
256MB
Power requirements
220-240 V, 6 A, 50/60 Hz
120-127 V, 11 A, 60 Hz
Power consumption
The power level when the main switch
is turned off and the power cord is
plugged into an outlet: 1 W or less
• Maximum
1300 W or less
• Ready
60.7 W
• During printing
Color: 404W
B&W: 331W
Power consumption
The power level when the main switch
is turned off and the power cord is
plugged into an outlet: 1 W or less
• Maximum
1300 W or less
• Ready
58.2 W
• During printing
Color: 404W
B&W: 331W
409
12. Appendix
Item
Noise emission
Description
• Sound power level
Stand-by: 40 dB (A)
During printing:
Color: 64 dB (A)
B&W: 63 dB (A)
• Sound pressure level
Stand-by: 34 dB (A)
During printing:
Color: 58 dB (A)
B&W: 57 dB (A)
Machine dimensions (Width × Depth ×
Height)
• SP C260SFNw
420 × 493 × 460 mm (16.6 × 19.5 × 18.2 inches)
• SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw
420 × 493 × 473 mm (16.6 × 19.5 × 18.7 inches)
Weight (machine body with
consumables)
• SP C260SFNw
29 kg (64 lb.) or less
• SP C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw
30 kg (66.2 lb.) or less
• Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual values measured in accordance with ISO
7779.
• Sound pressure level is measured from the position of the bystander.
Printer Function Specifications
Item
Printing speed
Description
Black and white: 21 pages per minute (Simplex/Letter), 12
pages per minute (Duplex/Letter)
Color: 21 pages per minute (Simplex/Letter), 12 pages per
minute (Duplex/Letter)
410
Specifications of the Machine
Item
Description
Resolution
600 × 600 dpi
First print speed
14 seconds or less
Interface
• Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX)
• USB 2.0
• Wi-Fi
• USB2.0 Host
Printer language
PCL6, PCL5c, DDST, PostScript3, PictBridge
Fonts (PCL6, PCL5c, PostScript3)
80 fonts
Copier Function Specifications
Item
Maximum resolution (scanning and printing)
Description
• Exposure glass
Scanning: 600 × 600 dpi
Printing: 600 × 600 dpi
• ADF
Scanning: 300 × 600 dpi
Printing: 600 × 600 dpi
First copy speed (A4, at 23 °C, 71.6 °F)
20 seconds or less
Gradation
Scanning: 256 levels
Printing: Four-value
411
12. Appendix
Item
Multiple copy speed
(Countries other than European countries)
Description
• When copying multiple simplex originals
(simplex printing)
• 20 pages per minute (A4)
• 21 pages per minute (Letter (81/2 ×
11 inches)
• When copying multiple copies of simplex
originals one by one (simplex printing)
• Black and white: 20 pages per minute
• Full Color: 12 pages per minute
• When copying multiple copies of two-sided
originals one by one (duplex scanning,
simplex printing) (only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw)
• Black and white: 20 pages per minute
• Full Color: 12 pages per minute
• When copying multiple copies of two-sided
originals one by one (duplex scanning,
duplex printing) (only for SP
C261SFNw/SP C262SFNw)
• Black and white: 12 pages per minute
• Full Color: 12 pages per minute
Reproduction ratio
• Fixed ratio
50%, 71%, 82%, 93%, 122%, 141%,
200%, 400%
50%, 65%, 78%, 93%, 129%, 155%,
200%, 400%
• Zoom ratio
25% to 400%
Copy quantity
412
99
Specifications of the Machine
Scanner Function Specifications
Item
Maximum scanning area (horizontal × vertical)
Description
• Exposure glass
216 × 297 mm (8.5 × 11.7 inches)
• ADF
216 × 356 mm (8.5 × 14 inches)
Maximum resolution when scanning from the
control panel (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan
to Folder, Scan to USB)
• Exposure glass
600 × 600 dpi
• ADF
300 × 300 dpi
Maximum resolution when scanning from a
computer (TWAIN)
• Exposure glass
19200 × 19200 dpi
• ADF
600 × 600 dpi
Maximum resolution when scanning from a
computer (WIA)
Gradation
600 × 600 dpi
• Input: 16 bit color processing
• Output: 8 bit color processing
Scanning time
• Black and white: 5 seconds or less
• Color: 10 seconds or less (A4/600 dpi/
Compressed)
Not including transfer time.
ADF throughput
• Black and white: 20 image per minute (300
× 600 dpi)
• Full Color: 12 image per minute (300 × 600
dpi)
Interface
Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX), USB 2.0,
Wi-Fi
Sendable file formats
TIFF, JPEG, PDF
413
12. Appendix
Item
Address book
Description
Maximum 100 items
Number of redials: 1
Fax Function Specifications
Fax transmission and reception
Item
Access line
Description
• Public switched telephone networks (PSTN)
• Private branch exchange (PBX)
Transmission mode
Scan line density
ITU-T Group 3 (G3)
• 8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm (200 ×
100 dpi)
• 8 dots per mm × 7.7 line per mm (200 ×
200 dpi)
Transmission time
3 seconds (8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm,
33.6 kbps, MMR, ITU-T # 1 chart)
Transfer rate
33.6 kbps to 2400 bps (auto shift down system)
Data compression methods
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Memory capacity
100 sheets (8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm,
MMR, ITU-T # 1 chart)
Address book
• Speed dial
200 items
• Quick dial
20 items
• Number of redials for Fax
1
414
Specifications of the Machine
Internet Fax transmission and reception
Item
Interface
Communication protocols
Description
Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX), Wi-Fi
• Transmission
SMTP, TCP/IP
• Reception
POP3, TCP/IP
Transmission function
E-mail
E-mail format
Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion
Attached file forms (transmission): TIFF-S (MH
encoding)
Attached file forms (reception): TIFF-S/TIFF-F
(MH/MR/MMR encoding)
Authentication method
SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Original size
A4 (Length is up to 356 mm)
Scan line density
8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm (200 × 100
dpi)
8 dots per mm × 7.7 line per mm (200 × 200
dpi)
415
12. Appendix
Item
Destination machine specifications
Description
• Communication protocols
• Transmission
SMTP, TCP/IP
• Reception
POP3, TCP/IP
• E-mail format
• Format
MIME, Base64
• Content-Type
Image/tiff
Multipart/mixed (text/plain, Image/
tiff (attached file forms))
• Data format
• Profile
TIFF-S
• Encoding
MH
• Original size
A4
• Resolution (dpi)
200 × 100, 200 × 200
Paper Feed Unit TK1220
Paper capacity
500 sheets
Paper size
For details, see page 63 "Supported Paper".
Dimensions (Width × Depth × Height)
400 × 450 × 127 mm (15.8 × 17.8 × 5 inches)
Paper weight
For details, see page 63 "Supported Paper".
416
Specifications of the Machine
Weight
Less than 4 kg (8.9 lb.)
417
12. Appendix
Consumables
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we
recommend that you use only the expendable supplies available at an authorized dealer.
Print Cartridge
Print cartridge
Black
Average printable number of pages per cartridge *1
SP C260DNw/SP C260SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
2,000 pages
SP C261DNw/SP C261SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
2,000 pages
(mainly North America)
2,300 pages
SP C262DNw/SP C262SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
4,500 pages, 6,500 pages
(mainly North America)
6,500 pages
418
Consumables
Print cartridge
Cyan
Average printable number of pages per cartridge *1
SP C260DNw/SP C260SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
1,600 pages
SP C261DNw/SP C261SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
1,600 pages
(mainly North America)
2,300 pages
SP C262DNw/SP C262SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
4,000 pages, 6,000 pages
(mainly North America)
6,000 pages
Magenta
SP C260DNw/SP C260SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
1,600 pages
SP C261DNw/SP C261SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
1,600 pages
(mainly North America)
2,300 pages
SP C262DNw/SP C262SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
4,000 pages, 6,000 pages
(mainly North America)
6,000 pages
419
12. Appendix
Print cartridge
Yellow
Average printable number of pages per cartridge *1
SP C260DNw/SP C260SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
1,600 pages
SP C261DNw/SP C261SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
1,600 pages
(mainly North America)
2,300 pages
SP C262DNw/SP C262SFNw:
(mainly Europe and Asia)
4,000 pages, 6,000 pages
(mainly North America)
6,000 pages
*1 The printable number of pages is based on pages that are compliant with ISO/IEC 19798 and the image
density set as the factory default. ISO/IEC 19798 is an international standard on measurement of printable
pages, set by the International Organization for Standardization.
• For information about consumables, see our website.
• If print cartridges are not changed when necessary, printing will become impossible. For easy
replacement, we recommend you purchase and store extra print cartridges.
• The actual number of printable pages varies depending on the image volume and density, number
of pages printed at a time, paper type and paper size used, and environmental conditions such as
temperature and humidity.
• Print cartridges may need to be changed sooner than indicated above due to deterioration over
the period of use.
• Print cartridges (consumables) are not covered by warranty. However, if there is a problem,
contact the store where they were purchased.
• When you first use this machine, use the print cartridges packaged with the machine.
• The supplied print cartridges are good for approximately 1,000 pages.
• This machine routinely performs cleaning and uses toner during this operation to maintain quality.
• To prevent a cleaning malfunction, you may need to replace a print cartridge even if it is not empty.
420
Consumables
Waste Toner Bottle
Name
Waste Toner Bottle SP C220
Average printable number of pages per cartridge *1
25,000 pages
*1 A4/Letter 5% test chart, 3 pages per job, printing in 50% black and white/color.
• The actual number of printable pages varies depending on the image volume and density, number
of pages printed at a time, paper type and paper size used, and environmental conditions such as
temperature and humidity.
• If the waste toner bottle is not changed when necessary, printing will become impossible. For easy
replacement, we recommend you purchase and store extra waste toner bottles.
421
12. Appendix
Information for This Machine
User Information on Electrical & Electronic Equipment
Europe and Asia)
(mainly
Users in the countries where this symbol shown in this section has been specified in
national law on collection and treatment of E-waste
Our Products contain high quality components and are designed to facilitate recycling.
Our products or product packaging are marked with the symbol below.
The symbol indicates that the product must not be treated as municipal waste. It must be disposed of
separately via the appropriate return and collection systems available. By following these instructions
you ensure that this product is treated correctly and help to reduce potential impacts on the environment
and human health, which could otherwise result from inappropriate handling. Recycling of products
helps to conserve natural resources and protect the environment.
For more detailed information on collection and recycling systems for this product, please contact the
shop where you purchased it, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.
All Other Users
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities, the shop where you bought this
product, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.
For Users in India
This product including components, consumables, parts and spares complies with the "India E-waste
Rule" and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or
polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for
cadmium, except for the exemptions set in the Rule.
422
Information for This Machine
For Turkey only
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)
In accordance with the Battery Directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users Annex II,
the above symbol is printed on batteries and accumulators.
This symbol means that in the European Union, used batteries and accumulators should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
In the EU, there are separate collection systems for not only used electrical and electronic products but
also batteries and accumulators.
Please dispose of them correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.
Environmental Advice for Users
(mainly Europe)
Users in the EU, Switzerland and Norway
Consumables yield
Please refer to either the User's Manual for this information or the packaging of the consumable.
Recycled paper
The machine can use recycled paper which is produced in accordance with European standard
EN 12281:2002 or DIN 19309. For products using EP printing technology, the machine can print
on 64 g/m2 paper, which contains less raw materials and represents a significant resource
reduction.
423
12. Appendix
Duplex printing (if applicable)
Duplex printing enables both sides of a sheet of paper to be used. This saves paper and reduces
the size of printed documents so that fewer sheets are used. We recommend that this feature is
enabled whenever you print.
Toner and ink cartridge return program
Toner and ink cartridge for recycling will be accepted free of charge from users in accordance with
local regulations.
For details about the return program, please refer to the Web page below or consult your service
person.
https://www.ricoh-return.com/
Energy efficiency
The amount of electricity a machine consumes depends as much on its specifications as it does on
the way you use it. The machine is designed to allow you to reduce electricity costs by switching to
Ready mode after it prints the last page. If required, it can immediately print again from this mode.
If no additional prints are required and a specified period of time passes, the device switches to an
energy saving mode.
In these modes, the machine consumes less power (watts). If the machine is to print again, it needs
a little longer to return from an energy saving mode than from Ready mode.
For maximum energy savings, we recommend that the default setting for power management is
used.
Products that comply with the Energy Star requirement are always energy efficient.
Notice To Wireless LAN Interface Users
(mainly Europe)
Declaration of Conformity
Notice to Users in EEA Countries
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available by accessing the URL: http://www.ricoh.com/products/
ce_doc2/
and selecting the product applicable.
Operating frequency band: 2400 - 2483.5 MHz
maximum radio-frequency power: less than 20.0 dBm
As this equipment with the radiating part is not intended to be used in close proximity to the human
body, it is recommended to use at least 20cm apart from the user.
424
Information for This Machine
NOTES TO USERS REGARDING FACSIMILE UNIT (NEW ZEALAND)
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted
that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement
of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance
that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a
different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds
for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such
circumstances.
Devices connected to the telephone port may lose their memory if this fax machine is on line for
extended periods. To prevent this, such devices should have the facility for battery or similar backup of
memory.
This device may be subject to ringing or bell tinkle when certain other devices are connected to the same
line. If this occurs, the problem should not be referred to the Telecom Faults Service.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other
Telecom customers.
Telepermitted equipment only may be connected to the auxiliary telephone port. The auxiliary telephone
port is not specifically designed for 3-wire connected equipment that may not respond to incoming
ringing when attached to this port.
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA)
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
Notes to users in the United States of America
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
425
12. Appendix
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Caution:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment
and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is
desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from
person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Certification
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Part 68 of the FCC Rules regarding Facsimile Unit
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. On
the cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in
the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone
company.
2. This equipment uses the RJ11C USOC jack.
3. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must
comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for
detail.
4. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming
426
Information for This Machine
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the
local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the
format US:AAAEQ##TXXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3).
5. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
6. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures
that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will
provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted
service.
7. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact
Ricoh USA, Inc. Customer Support Department at 1-888-456-6457. If this device is causing
problems with your telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect
the equipment until the problem is resolved.
8. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication), see
the manual provided with this machine for instruction on resolving the problem.
9. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission,
public service commission or corporation commission for information.
10. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about
what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging
up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or
other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other
individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,
other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other
number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the following steps:
Follow the FAX HEADER programming procedure in the Programming chapter of the operating
instructions to enter the business identification and telephone number of the terminal or business. This
427
12. Appendix
information is transmitted with your document by the FAX HEADER feature. In addition to the information,
be sure to program the date and time into your machine.
Notes to Canadian Users of Wireless Devices
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and
meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens d'appareils sans fil
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un
environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus
entre le radiateur et le corps humain.(à l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles)
Notes to Canadian Users regarding Facsimile Unit
This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical
specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five.
428
Information for This Machine
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens
Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de dispositifs qui peuvent
être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme des IES de tous les dispositifs
n'excède pas cinq.
ENERGY STAR Program
ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment
The ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment encourage energy conservation
by promoting energy efficient computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving
functions.
It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily.
Targeted products are computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, copiers, scanners, and multifunction
devices. Energy Star standards and logos are internationally uniform.
Saving Energy
This machine is equipped with the following Energy Saver modes: Energy Saver mode 1 and Energy
Saver mode 2. If the machine has been idle for a certain period of time, the machine automatically
enters Energy Saver mode.
The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job, prints a received fax, or
when any key is pressed.
429
12. Appendix
Energy Saver mode 1
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 1 if the machine has been idle for about 30 seconds. It
takes less time to recover from Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off state or Energy Saver
mode 2, but power consumption is higher in Energy Saver mode 1 than in Energy Saver mode 2.
Energy Saver mode 2
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 2 after the period of time specified for this setting is
passed. Power consumption is lower in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy Saver mode 1, but it
takes longer to recover from Energy Saver mode 2 than from Energy Saver mode 1.
Specifications
Energy Saver mode 1
Power Consumption*1
44.2 W
42.6 W
Energy Saver mode 2
Duplex Function*2
Default Time
30 seconds
Recovery Time*1
10 seconds or less
Power Consumption*1
1.3 W
Default Time
1 minute
Recovery Time*1
30 seconds
Standard
*1 Recovery time and power consumption may differ depending on the conditions and environment of the
machine.
*2 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used with) a
duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.
For details about Energy Saver modes, see page 255 "Administrator Tools Settings".
• If the machine is in Energy Saver mode for 24 hours continuously, the machine automatically
returns to normal state and performs self-maintenance.
430
Trademarks
Trademarks
Adobe and Acrobat are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
the United States and/or other countries.
Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
OS X, TrueType, App Store, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Firefox® is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under
license.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
LINUX® is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, Windows Vista®, and Internet Explorer® are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Mopria and the Mopria logo are trademarks of Mopria Alliance, Inc.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
PictBridge is a trademark.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other countries.
Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
Wi-Fi® and Wi-Fi Direct® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
The proper name of Internet Explorer 6 is Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
431
12. Appendix
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Starter
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 for Itanium-based Systems
Microsoft® Windows® Web Server 2008
Microsoft® Windows® HPC Server 2008
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 for Itanium-based Systems
Microsoft® Windows® Web Server R2 2008
Microsoft® Windows® HPC Server R2 2008
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
432
Trademarks
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Datacenter
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Datacenter
• The product names of Windows Server 2016 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Essentials
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
433
12. Appendix
434
INDEX
2-sided copy........................................................ 109, 114
A
Address book..............................................128, 237
address book (LAN-Fax)........................... 202, 205
ADF.......................................................................337
ADF (Auto Document Feeder)..................... 79, 337
Administrator password.......................15, 255, 310
Administrator settings.......................................... 310
Administrator Tools settings................................ 255
Attaching Paper Feed Unit TK1220.................... 25
Authentication...................................................... 401
Authorized reception..................................217, 284
Auto e-mail notification settings......................... 298
B
B&W print priority............................................... 286
Backup settings.................................................... 311
Basic operation........................................... 137, 219
Broadcast function.............................................. 194
Bypass tray.................................................... 53, 279
Bypass tray setting priority................................. 278
C
Canceling a copy................................................105
Canceling a fax................................................... 201
Canceling a Transmission................................... 190
Cleaning............................327, 328, 330, 333, 336
Community........................................................... 299
Confidential document.......................................... 89
Configuration page.................................... 263, 309
Configuring Network Settings Using OS X
Ethernet............................................................................ 394
Installing the driver.......................................................... 396
USB.................................................................................. 393
Wireless LAN.................................................................. 396
Configuring the machine
Printing the configuration page...................................... 263
Using the control panel...................................................219
Confirming information
Printer driver settings.......................................................... 84
Consumables....................................................... 418
Control panel......................................................... 22
Copier features.................................................... 221
Copier mode screen........................................... 102
Copy
Basic operation............................................................... 104
Combine............................................................... 109, 114
Copying onto envelopes................................................... 54
Enlarge............................................................................. 107
ID Card copy...................................................................119
Reduce............................................................................. 107
Scan settings.................................................................... 122
Specifications.................................................................. 411
Counter information............................................ 274
Cover sheet.......................................................... 205
D
Date and time settings................................ 179, 312
Date setting.......................................................... 312
Default settings.................................................... 310
Density..................................................................171
Direct printing........................................................ 93
Disclaimer.............................................................. 14
DNS setting.......................................................... 297
Duplex.................................................................. 277
E
E-mail notification 1............................................ 298
E-mail notification 2............................................ 298
Economy Color Prints.......................................... 276
Encryption............................................................ 401
Encryption key exchange................................... 403
Energy saver mode.................................... 313, 429
Entering characters................................................ 42
Error messages.................................................... 341
Exposure glass.....................................................336
Extending tray 1.................................................... 51
Exterior................................................................... 17
F
Fax
Fax setting workflows..................................................... 176
LAN-Fax...........................................................................200
Lists/Reports.................................................................... 218
Receiving a fax................................................................ 206
Registering destinations.................................................. 180
Sending a fax.................................................................. 186
Specifications.................................................................. 414
Fax destinations.........................180, 182, 183, 287
Fax features......................................................... 228
435
Fax journal........................................................... 263
Fax mode screen................................................. 177
Fax Number confirmation...................................283
Fax only mode..................................................... 209
Fax printing.......................................................... 215
Fax received file processing............................... 283
Fax Speed Dial destination list........................... 263
Fax TX/RX standby file list.................................. 309
FAX/TAD mode.................................................. 209
FAX/TEL Auto mode........................................... 209
FAX/TEL manual mode.......................................208
Forwarding..................................................212, 213
Fusing Unit........................................................... 326
G
General status..................................................... 295
I
I/O timeout..........................................................285
IKE settings........................................................... 305
Image density............................................. 122, 197
Immediate transmission....................................... 186
Interior.................................................................... 21
Intermediate transfer unit.................................... 326
Internet fax.................................................. 210, 301
Internet fax transmission and reception............. 415
Introduction............................................................ 13
IPsec global settings............................................ 305
IPsec policy settings.............................................305
IPsec settings........................................................ 305
IPsec transmission................................................ 401
IPv6 configuration............................................... 296
IPv6 environment................................................. 296
J
Job cancel.............................................................. 87
L
LAN-Fax............................................................... 200
Language............................................................. 272
List of Option.......................................................... 15
Lists...................................................... 218, 263, 309
Loading paper....................................................... 48
Locked Print............................................................ 90
436
M
Machine information...........................................277
Maintaining the machine
Cleaning the machine.................... 327, 330, 336, 337
Replacing the print cartridge.......................................... 315
Maintenance page.....................................263, 309
mDNS setting....................................................... 296
Memory transmission.......................................... 186
Menu chart.......................................................... 220
Model-specific information...................................13
Moving................................................................. 339
Multi-access........................................................... 37
N
Network application........................................... 296
Network print setting........................................... 296
Network settings......................................... 265, 295
Network status..................................................... 295
Non-recommended paper................................... 72
Notes.................................................................... 407
O
On hook dial....................................................... 195
Operation Tools.....................................................41
Option settings....................................................... 82
Original.................................................................. 78
Original type....................................................... 122
P
Page counter........................................................274
Paper Feed Unit TK1220............................. 25, 416
Paper jam.......................... 351, 354, 356, 358, 359
Paper mismatch..................................................... 87
Paper recommendations....................................... 78
Paper size...............................................................57
Paper Storage........................................................73
Paper tray............................................................ 273
Paper types............................................................ 66
Bond Paper.........................................................................66
Cardstock........................................................................... 66
Color Paper........................................................................ 66
Envelope............................................................................. 66
Label Paper........................................................................ 66
Letterhead........................................................................... 66
Middle Thick paper........................................................... 66
Plain Paper......................................................................... 66
Preprinted Paper................................................................ 66
Prepunched Paper............................................................. 66
Recycled Paper.................................................................. 66
Thick Paper 1..................................................................... 66
Thick Paper 2..................................................................... 66
Thin Paper...........................................................................66
PCL6..................................................................... 314
PictBridge......................................................... 93, 94
Placing originals.................................................... 77
POP3 settings.......................................................301
Print
Basic operation.................................................................. 86
Combine............................................................................. 81
Duplex................................................................................ 81
Printing on envelopes........................................................ 54
Specifications.................................................................. 410
Print area................................................................ 73
Print cartridge..............................................315, 418
Print counter......................................................... 274
Print functions......................................................... 98
Print output functions..............................................99
Print quality functions............................................. 98
Printer features..................................................... 246
Priority tray........................................................... 284
Q
Quick Dial destination list................................... 263
R
Reception mode.................................................. 206
Redial function..................................................... 195
Registering information
Destinations.......................................................... 128, 180
E-mail address................................................................. 146
Fax number...................................................................... 255
Folder............................................................................... 137
FTP server......................................................................... 150
Replacing the Fusing Unit and Transfer Rollor.. 326
Replacing the intermediate transfer unit............ 326
Reports.........................................................263, 309
Resend key...........................................................153
Reset settings........................................................ 310
Resolution.................................................... 172, 198
Restore settings.................................................... 312
Restrict user function................................... 289, 293
S
SA (Security Association)................................... 402
Scan
Registering destinations.................................................. 128
SANE............................................................................... 169
Scan settings.................................................................... 170
Scan to E-mail................................................................. 146
Scan to Folder................................................................. 137
Scan to FTP...................................................................... 150
Scan to USB.....................................................................154
TWAIN.............................................................................162
WIA.................................................................................. 165
Scan destinations...................... 128, 134, 153, 287
Scan size.............................................................. 170
Scan to E-mail............................................. 128, 146
Scan to Folder..................................................... 128
Scan to FTP..................................................128, 150
Scanner destination list.............................. 263, 309
Scanner feature................................................... 226
Scanner function..................................................413
Scanner journal................................................... 263
Scanner mode screen......................................... 126
Scanner send setting........................................... 296
Select paper........................................................ 282
Select paper tray................................................. 282
Sending a fax...................................................... 188
Set date................................................................ 312
Set time.................................................................312
SMTP settings....................................................... 300
SNMP settings..................................................... 299
Sound volume adjustment...................................278
Special senders................................................... 216
Specifications....................408, 410, 411, 413, 414
Specifying the paper type and paper size... 60, 61
Speed Dial......................................... 182, 183, 193
Standby file list.................................................... 263
Status information................................................ 273
Status messages.................................................. 341
Supported paper................................................... 63
System.................................................................. 299
System information.............................................. 273
System settings............................................ 238, 278
437
T
TCP/IP status....................................................... 295
Time setting.......................................................... 312
Toner.................................................................... 273
Toner saving........................................................ 285
Top page............................................................. 271
Trademarks.......................................................... 431
Transfer Rollor..................................................... 326
Transmission mode.............................................. 186
Trap...................................................................... 299
Tray 1..................................................................... 48
Tray 1 priority...................................................... 280
Tray 2................................................................... 279
Tray paper settings..................................... 250, 278
Troubleshooting................................. 378, 380, 381
Error and status messages on the screen...................... 341
Other problems................... 362, 363, 366, 369, 391
TWAIN scanning.................................................162
U
User code............................................................ 293
User restriction....................................................... 15
W
Waste toner bottle...................................... 320, 421
Web Image Monitor........................................... 270
What you can do with this machine
Copier function................................................................ 101
Fax function..................................................................... 175
Printer function.................................................................... 81
Scanner function............................................................. 125
Wireless LAN settings......................................... 302
Wireless settings.................................................. 302
438
MEMO
439
MEMO
440
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
M0AX-8604B
© 2017
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
M0AX-8604B
Download PDF